IAD FUEL SETTLING TANK FARM INBOUND PARTICLE …

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

IAD FUEL SETTLING TANK FARM INBOUND PARTICLE SEPARATOR

IL1102

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY

Prepared by:

ReStl Designers, Inc Burns & McDonnell Engineering Ashe Consultants, Inc. 702 Russell Avenue, Suite 402 9400 Ward Parkway 950 Herndon Pkwy, Ste 320 Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877 Kansas City, MO 64114 Herndon VA, 20170 301-258-0933 816-333-9400 703-230-2500

Project 62548

Final Submittal

May 4, 2012

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

Div. 26

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

bcoulliette

Typewritten Text

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IL1102 FUEL SETTLING TANK FARM INBOUND PARTICLE SEPARATOR FINAL SUBMISSION 4 MAY 2012

TABLE OF CONTENTS TC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 0 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 10 00 Summary 01 29 00 Application for Payment 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittals 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 77 00 Project Closeout 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00 Cast-In Place Concrete

DIVISION 05 – METALS

SECTION 05 12 00 Structural Steel

05 45 00 Aluminum

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 13 34 23.26 Shipping Containers

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 21 10 00 Fire-Suppression Piping


TABLE OF CONTENTS TC-2

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 81 00 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Programming

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 20 00 Earth Moving

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – FUEL SYSTEM SECTION 33 05 31 Leak Monitoring System Modifications 33 05 33 Abandon Existing Fuel Lines 33 47 13 Impervious Membrane Liner

33 52 43 Fuel System General Requirements 33 52 44 Identification of Fuel Piping and Equipment 33 52 45 Fuel System Pipe, Connections, and Installation 33 52 46 Fuel System Coatings for Corrosion Protection 33 52 47 Fuel System Valves 33 52 48 Fuel System Accessories 33 52 51 Fuel System Filtration 33 52 53 Inspection, Testing, and Flushing

*****

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IL1102 FUEL SETTLING TANK FARM INBOUND PARTICLE SEPARATOR FINAL SUBMITTAL 4 MAY 2012

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300 - 1

SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Airport Orders and Instructions (O&I’s) and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Orders and Instructions IAD6-2-2 is attached to and a part of this Specification Section and the project requirements. (Note: References to Air BP in this O&I are intended to reference ASIG, the current fuel facility operator.)

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. During the period of this Project, the Authority anticipates that other construction contracts may be underway at or near the site of work of this Contract. A list of adjacent construction activities follows:

1.4 PERMITTING

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's “Building Codes Manual”. This manual describes Building Codes organization, Construction permitting process, Building Code inspection process, and Certificate of Occupancy requirements.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

A. Maintain adequate pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow and safety along the service roads, sidewalks, parking lots and other roadways on Airport property. In addition, this requirement applies to crossroads, approaches, and entrances affected by or made necessary by the Work. Coordinate activities throughout the project in a manner that allows emergency access, without delays to emergency response vehicles, to all areas of the Project that are occupied by employees.

B. Prior to starting construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement, submit and obtain the COTR's written approval of a Traffic Maintenance Plan. Develop plan in accordance with the safety requirements of the FAA, Airport Operations, and the Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices”. Utilize the form indicated in the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Virginia Work Area Protection Manual – Standards and Guidelines”.



C. Provide and maintain temporary signage, "Jersey barriers," and such other traffic control devices or personnel as required complying with approved Traffic Maintenance Plan.

D. Maintain the construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement from the beginning of construction operations until final acceptance of the project. The maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day with adequate equipment and forces to the end of project to ensure that roadways and structures are maintained in satisfactory condition at all times, including barricades and warning signs as necessary for performance of the work.

E. Keep the portions of the project being used by public, pedestrian, aircraft, [mobile lounges] and vehicular traffic, whether it is through or local traffic, in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Remove snow and control all ice within the project boundaries. Removal of snow and ice for the benefit of the traveling public will be performed by the Authority. Bear all cost of maintenance work during construction and before the project receives a Certificate of Occupancy for constructing and maintaining approaches, crossings, intersections and other features as may be necessary.

F. Keep the portions of the road and aircraft pavement surfaces being used by the public free from irregularities, obstructions, mud, dirt, snow, ice, and any characteristic that might present a hazard or annoyance to traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Maintain a vacuum/sweeper and flusher truck at the site at all times to clean roadway and aircraft surfaces affected by construction traffic at the request of Airport Operations or the COTR.

1.6 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Phase construction activities as necessary to accommodate all airport operations without disruption. Adhere to all current Airport Orders and Instructions (O & Is), Airport Bulletins, and Airport Advisories. The Authority will provide relevant Orders and Instructions to Offerors in the Solicitation Package. Bulletins and Advisories will be provided to the offeror by the Authority as they are issued.

1.7 TENANT OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work of this Project will be performed in close proximity to tenant-occupied areas. Coordinate and conduct work activities in such fashion tenant operations, and access to the tenant spaces will not be impaired in any manner except as detailed on Contractor's Work Plans. COTR will review and approve in writing all Work Plans.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.



B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other signs of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during excavation or other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered.

C. Aircraft deicing fluids will be encountered in the water (including utility manholes) and in the soils. Concentrations of aircraft deicing fluids in water and soils will range from non-detect to saturation. Aircraft deicing fluids are propylene based Type I and Type IV fluids. The fluids emit an unpleasant odor when the breakdown (biodegradation) is occurring. Follow OSHA requirements while working in aircraft deicing impacted areas. Coordinate with the COTR for obtaining Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for aircraft deicing fluids.

D. Petroleum contaminated soils and water may be encountered during the construction of this project. Petroleum impacted soils range from saturated to 1.0 ppm. Petroleum impacted water ranges from free product to “non - detect.” Maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations.

1. Do not use petroleum-contaminated soils as backfill around new piping or utilities. Transport petroleum contaminated soils to a location identified by the COTR. Place the contaminated soils on two layers of reinforced 6 mil plastic sheeting, install and maintain sediment and erosion controls, and adequately cover the stockpile to prevent water infiltration.

1.9 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS

A. Notify immediately, through the COTR, the PMC Archaeology/Historic Preservation Coordinator if subsurface structural features, concentrations of artifacts, rubble, bone/shell, or burnt material are uncovered or otherwise discovered. Prompt reporting will avoid potentially severe problems resulting from the destruction of significant resources and may limit the impact on construction operations and schedules.

1.10 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Be responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction activities, utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer within 21 calendar days after Notice-to-Proceed. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the Contractor during and after construction.

C. Preserve all roadways, pedestrian and directional signage. Deliver all signs removed and not required for reinstallation to the Authority as directed by the COTR.

D. Replace or repair lost or damaged signs at no cost to the Authority.



1.11 SECURITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Maintain the integrity of the Airport Security fence. Maintain the integrity of doors and walls between public areas and Air Operations Area (AOA) at all times. Comply with Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1500, 1540, 1542 and 1544.

B. Possession of and display of a proper and current Airport Identification Badge, issued by Airport Operations is required for all Contractor personnel passing into the AOA. Refer to "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract for specific requirements. Security requirements have increased significantly at Washington Dulles International Airport. Contractor can expect up to two hours waiting time to clear construction vehicles into the AOA. Offerors shall become intimately familiar with all TSA and Authority security requirements. No increase in contract price will be provided to the Contractor should the contractor not be aware of any security procedure in place at time of submitting their offer that leads to increased time and inconvenience to accomplish the work.

C. Pay all fines levied by the Transportation Security Administration for penalties resulting from security infractions perpetrated by or caused by Contractor’s personnel or work forces of Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers.

D. Establish and maintain the security of Contractor’s staging areas, equipment and materials.

E. Provide escort for delivery vehicles transporting materials and supplies to or from the Contractor's staging or work areas into the AOA, in accordance with requirements stated in "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract.

F. Do not park within 300 feet of a terminal building unless specifically authorized by Airport Operations.

G. All workers in the sterile areas, which are defined as areas accessible to ticketed passengers only, may utilize tools in their work provided that:

1. Tools are essential and necessary to the Work. 2. Keep tools controlled at all times. 3. Do not leave tools unattended. 4. Store tools in locked boxes.

H. No knives will be permitted in the sterile areas.

I. No firearms or weapons of any type are allowed on the airport.

J. No cartridge style nail guns, nor any tools that use a cartridge or any explosive charge, are allowed without prior written notification of COTR. Obtain written approval from the COTR before bringing such tools on the project.

K. Conform to all Orders and Instructions pertaining to vehicle inspection. Modify below to indicate specific routes or entrance gates as required to suit project.



1.12 MATERIAL HAULING

A. Access and egress to and from the Airport for hauling operations shall be through the entrances indicated. Conduct hauling operations between the hours of 7:00 am and 5:00 pm.

B. The designated haul routes for hauling operations will not require vehicles crossing and/or utilizing existing taxi lanes or taxiways. Under no conditions shall the Contractor plan use of taxiways and taxi lanes for hauling equipment. Haul routes for this project are as indicated.

C. Use load covers on all dump trucks. Load dump trucks so that no spillage occurs during transit on the State, municipal, or Airport roadways, taxiways, and aprons. Clean wheels of trucks leaving the Project construction site of all soil and rocks.

1.13 PORTABLE LIGHTING

A. Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times to eliminate glare that could impair runway, taxiway, apron, ground operations, and Airport Traffic Control Tower operations. Equip portable lighting with reflectors and glare shields to prevent spillover of light into operational areas.

1.14 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide two-way radio communication between certain of the Contractor’s personnel on the job site. Provide radios with a minimum of 5 watts transmitting power. Select the frequency utilized for these transmissions. Submit proposed frequencies to COTR for approval in writing by the COTR. Frequencies shall not conflict with or overlay any of the Airports radio frequencies.

B. Provide, at a minimum, the following with radio equipment: The Project Superintendent, Foreman of all work groups physically separated from the general vicinity of the Project Superintendent, gate guards, and others who may be working in a separate and remote area. Provide two additional radios with the same frequencies to PMC for use by the COTR and the Lead Inspector.

C. Provide two-way radios capable of operating on both the "Ground" and "Ramp" frequencies for work adjacent to or affecting taxiways, Mobile Lounge roads, or Mobile Lounge docking areas. Such radios shall be either a handheld programmable type capable of operating off of vehicle power and antenna or a vehicle-mounted type, which operates solely off of the vehicle’s power, and antenna. Provide radios that provide a minimum of 3 watts transmitting power. Provide radios of sufficient power to communicate with the appropriate controller.

1.15 SPECIAL AUTHORITY CONSULTANT

A. The Contractor is hereby advised of the involvement of Parsons Management Consultants (PMC) as Program Management Support Services Consultant to the Authority for the capital construction programs at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport and Washington Dulles International Airport. PMC will have a continuing role in this project by assisting the Authority in specialized areas.



1. PMC will provide administrative support during design, solicitation, and construction. 2. PMC will coordinate Contractor requests for technical information and receive, review

and manage all Contractor submittals. 3. PMC has reviewed technical submittals during design, including drawings, specifications,

cost estimates, construction phasing plans, and technical reports. 4. PMC will be responsible for review of technical submittals during construction, including

selected shop drawings, certifications, test reports, calculations and samples. 5. PMC will conduct field inspections of the Work in progress and inspect for Substantial

Completion and Final Acceptance. PMC inspection does not relieve Contractor of responsibilities of performing Contract required inspections as required by contract documents.

B. All other contract management is the sole responsibility of the Authority.

1.16 SAFETY

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the most current edition of the Authority Construction Safety Manual”. Offerors are provided with the most recent addition when obtaining contract documents prior to proposal. Requirements included in this Section are in addition to the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. Comply with all local, State and Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more stringent requirement shall govern. For additional information see Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”.

B. Contractor Safety Organization:

1. Safety Engineer.

a. Duties: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual. b. Qualifications: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual.

C. Submit the résumés of individuals proposed to serve in the role of Contractor’s Safety Engineer to the COTR for approval in writing. In addition to indicating the qualifications in the Authority Construction Safety Manual résumés shall include but not be limited to such items as: work experience, education, safety and health training completed, memberships in professional associations, professional certifications, professional registrations and professional references confirming the qualifications and personal references of contacts for verification shall also be required.

D. Provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all times during execution the work of this Contract. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, as well as amendments to these laws. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Compliance with government requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction industry. Stop work whenever a work procedure or a condition at a work site is deemed unsafe by the either of the following individuals: COTR, Program Safety Manager (PSM), the



Contractor’s Project Manager, the Contractor’s Foreman, or the Contractor’s Safety Engineer(s).

E. Provide a full-time on-site Contractor Safety Engineer for the duration of this Contract with no other duties assigned. The Safety Engineer shall be responsible for all safety and health requirements as included herein and as required by the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual.

F. The contractor shall submit the resumes of all proposed safety and health professionals who shall serve in the role of Safety Engineer(s) to the COTR for approval. The resumes shall include, but not be limited to such items as: work experience, education, safety and health training completed, memberships in professional associations, professional certifications, professional registrations, and professional references confirming the qualifications shall also be required. Documentation confirming the qualifications and personal references of contacts for verification shall also be required.

G. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual." Provide during the Work the services of Safety Engineer(s) as outlined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”. The Safety Engineer shall undertake the duties and responsibilities as stated in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual".

H. Flagmen Training: The Authority will sponsor Flagman training sessions. Contractor's personnel who will be assigned flagmen duties on the Airport for this project shall attend training sessions.

I. Fire Safety: Conform to the following requirements:

1. Obtain a permit to perform any welding, cutting, or hot work from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal.

2. Ensure adequate access to all construction areas for emergency response. 3. Obtain a permit from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal to store, handle, or use any

hazardous material, including but not limited to fuels for equipment. Complete an application prior to issuance.

4. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 5. Provide at least seven (7) days' notice for any request for inspections, tests, permits, etc.,

required of personnel from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal. 6. Provide to the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal a list of emergency contact numbers

for the COTR and the Contractor prior to the commencement of Work.

J. Submit Site-Specific Safety and Health Plans to COTR within 15 calendar days of Notice to Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. Prepare this plan using the Authority’s Guidelines as defined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and as supplemented by these specifications for each and every work zone as shown on the drawings or as anticipated by the Contractor. Safety plan should include training for all contractor and subcontractor personnel regarding OSHA safety requirements for, and potential hazards of working in a facility that stores and transports Jet A aviation fuel. COTR must approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan prior to the start of any work.

K. Be responsible for the safe operation of all job site motor vehicles. Provide a “spotter” or flagman for all backing operations of construction vehicles with restricted rear vision.



L. All motorized equipment and vehicles working on or entering MWAA construction project work areas shall be equipped with functional audible backup alarms.

M. Crane Operators. On Airports Authority projects, Crane Operators shall be certified to operate the equipment by an approved independent certifying agency.

N. Comply with sample safety plan as designated in the MWAA Construction Safety Manual.

1.17 HEIGHT LIMITATION

A. For all demolition and construction within the Airport, limit the height of Contractor's equipment to a maximum of 50 feet.

B. Prior to beginning any work coordinate with the COTR the height of all cranes, boom trucks, scaffolds or similar vehicles of construction. Properly mark all construction equipment with safety flags and warning lights in accordance with current FAA and Airport Operations requirements. Submit FAA Form 7460, provided by COTR, for all variations on approved crane heights.

1.18 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of construction activity. However, in the interest of the Authority's neighbors, the maximum acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure the noise level using an "A" scale at a point 4'-0" above ground at property line nearest noise source.

B. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits indicated above.

C. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the airport’s tenants or the traveling public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an “A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to airport tenants or the traveling public.

1.19 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK

A. The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work as to the requirements of the Contract.



1.20 AIRPORT SECURITY/VEHICLE INSPECTION PROCEDURE

A. The number of vehicular access points into secure areas at IAD has been reduced to an operational minimum. Those gates that remain open are divided into two categories:

1. Vehicular gates for approved vehicles and individuals who hold appropriate and valid airport access media and do not require escorts.

2. Vehicular gates for those vehicles that have invalid or no airport access authorization and/or the vehicle operator and passenger(s) do not have valid access authorization media and require escorts.

B. The access points for vehicle operator and passenger(s) who have appropriate and valid airport access media are Gates 317 and 317. Vehicles that require escorts of any type are prohibited at those gates.

C. All vehicles and personnel that will require an escort shall enter the AOA via Gates 313, Gate 317, Gate 141, or Gate 118. The vehicle gates at Gate 118 and Gate 141 are designated as AOA entry points for vehicles and persons that require an escort and their primary work site is located on the north side of the airport. Gate 313 is designated as large equipment contractor/construction access point, and Gate 317 is to be used by contractors and employees whose primary work site is located on the south side of the airport. These access gates are as indicated.

D. Other access gates through which the contractor may gain access to a specific project site are as indicated and must be approved by Airport Operations and the Transportation Security Agency.

E. The following procedures will be utilized for all escorted vehicles and AOA approved vehicles with non-badged passengers seeking entry to the AOA:

1. All vehicles are searched. 2. Coordinate all vehicle deliveries with the COTR in advance. Provide the vehicle license

plate number and expected delivery time for all vehicle deliveries. Contractor may compile the expected daily delivery schedule on one sheet for submission to the COTR.

3. The vehicle operator shall have in his or her possession a commercial manifest, which identifies the contents of the vehicle and/or trailer.

4. An escort from the company for whom the shipment is intended shall respond to the vehicle access gate and remain with the vehicle until the vehicle exits the secured area.

5. A vehicle search will be conducted and once cleared; vehicles will be permitted escorted access to their delivery point.

6. Contractors should expect delays up to 2 hours at Gate 313 as a result of these security provisions.

7. Priority consideration may be offered to concrete trucks with resulting delays estimated to be 20 minutes. To receive priority consideration, schedule concrete deliveries with Airport Operations and COTR at time of batching.

F. Prior approval from the Manager of Airport Operations or his/her designated representative is

required for any exceptions to the above procedures.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION 007300


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Products ordered in advance. 6. Authority-furnished products. 7. Use of premises. 8. The Authority's occupancy requirements. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of the Authority's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification:

1. Project consists of modification to existing tank inlet and outlet valves, addition to and modification of system filtration, and modifications to leak monitoring piping at the fuel settling tank farm and hydrant system tank farm. Project Location: Washington Dulles International Airport.

B. Architect/Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated May 4, 2012, were prepared for Project by Burns & McDonnell Engineering, ReStl Designers, Inc., and Ashe Consultants.

C. Construction Manager: Parsons Management Consultants has been engaged as Construction Manager for this Project to serve as an advisor to the Authority and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between the Authority and Contractor, according to a separate contract between the Authority and Construction Manager.


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. For additional functions of Parsons Management Consultants, see "Supplementary Conditions."

D. The Work consists of modifications to valves and filtration associated with the Fuel Settling Tank Farm at Washington Dulles International Airport.

1. The Work includes, but is not limited to:

a. Rotation of the inlet valves for tanks 22 and 23 and rotation of outlet and recirculation valves for tanks 22, 23 and 24. Work includes valve modifications to make the valve port capable of flushing accumulated debris. Work includes related collateral construction to existing systems/ structures to accommodate reorientation the valves.

b. New and modification to existing access stairs, platforms, and foundations to accommodate maintenance and operation of the rotated inlet valves for tanks 22, 23, and 24 per item 1 above.

c. The replacement of existing single outbound prefilter at the facility with three larger parallel pre-filters.

d. New and modification to existing access stairs, platforms, and foundations to accommodate maintenance and operation of the facility filtration per item 3 above.

e. New service crane and related structure to accommodate maintenance and operation of the facility filtration.

f. The addition of an outbound filter/separator in parallel with the existing filter/separator.

g. Modifications to the existing Clay Treater at Hydrant System Tank Farm. h. Grout filling of three underground double-wall fuel supply pipes at the Hydrant

Fuel System Tank Farm and installation of one new above ground fuel pipeline between the Fuel Sample Building and the existing Clay Treater.

i. Grout fill center leak monitoring pipes interstice. j. Replace and/or repair connections to the inspection ports. k. Clean and video inspect liquid and vapor sensing pipes as indicated.

2. For additional requirements for the examination of plans, specifications, and Project site see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

E. The following sequencing/milestones are identified for this contract. Coordination of construction efforts at the Fuel Settling Tank Farm Dike Areas, Fuel Settling Tank Farm Equipment Pad and Hydrant System Tank Farm should be coordinated to minimize periods when work cannot proceed due to ongoing Tank Farm Operations. Contractor shall submit project schedule as required in DIVISION 01 Specifications indicating these milestones and the remaining required schedule information.

1. Tank Valve Rotation Sequence/Milestones:

a. Mobilization. b. Long Lead Item Submittal and Review. c. New Equipment Procurement (including new 16 inch DBB Plug Valve). d. Existing Valves (24 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB Plug Valves)

Preparation, Shipment, Modification and Return. e. Advance Notification to Operator for Tank 23 Draindown. f. Tank 23 Available from Operator for Modifications.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

g. Isolate and Drain Fill Line to Tank 23. h. Remove 24 inch Fill Valve for Tank 23. i. Install Refurbished 24 inch DBB Valve from d) above. j. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 23 Fill Valve. k. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 23 Fill Valve. l. Modify platform at Tank 23 Fill Valve. m. Dry Test 24 inch Fill Valve for Tank 23. n. Coordinate and charge Tank 23 Fill Line with fuel. o. Isolate and Drain Suction Line from Tank 23. p. Remove 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 23. q. Install Refurbished 16 inch DBB Valve from c) above. r. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 23 Suction Valve. s. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 23 Suction Valve. t. Modify platform at Tank 23 Suction Valve. u. Dry Test 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 23. v. Coordinate and charge Tank 24 Suction Line with fuel. w. Isolate and Drain Low Suction Line to Tank 23. x. Remove 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 23. y. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from d) above. z. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 23 Low Suction Valve. aa. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 23 Low Suction Valve. bb. Dry Test 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 23. cc. Coordinate and charge Tank 23 Low Suction Line with fuel. dd. Isolate and Drain Recirculation Line to Tank 23. ee. Remove 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 23. ff. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from d) above. gg. Tank 23 Removed Valves (24 inch DBB, 16 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB, 10 inch

DBB Plug Valves) Preparation, Shipment, Modification and Return. hh. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 23 Recirculation Valve. ii. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 23 Recirculation Valve. jj. Dry Test 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 23. kk. Coordinate and charge Tank 23 Recirculation Line with fuel. ll. Notify Operator and Operationally Test Rotated Valves and associated electrical

and controls operations. mm. Test Cooling Ring System. nn. Commission Rotated Valves, power and controls for Acceptance. oo. Operational Testing Verification Period by Operator. pp. Full Acceptance by Authority and Operator. qq. Notification to Operator for Tank 22 Draindown. rr. Tank 22 Available from Operator for Modifications. ss. Isolate and Drain Fill Line to Tank 22. tt. Remove 24 inch Fill Valve for Tank 22. uu. Install Refurbished 24 inch DBB Valve from gg) above. vv. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 22 Fill Valve. ww. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 22 Fill Valve. xx. Modify platform at Tank 22 Fill Valve. yy. Dry Test 24 inch Fill Valve for Tank 22. zz. Coordinate and charge Tank 24 Fill Line with fuel. aaa. Isolate and Drain Suction Line from Tank 22. bbb. Remove 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 22.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

ccc. Install Refurbished 16 inch DBB Valve from gg) above. ddd. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 22 Suction Valve. eee. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 22 Suction Valve. fff. Modify platform at Tank 22 Suction Valve. ggg. Dry Test 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 22. hhh. Coordinate and charge Tank 22 Suction Line with fuel. iii. Isolate and Drain Low Suction Line to Tank 22. jjj. Remove 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 22. kkk. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from gg) above. lll. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 22 Low Suction Valve. mmm. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 22 Low Suction Valve. nnn. Dry Test 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 22. ooo. Coordinate and charge Tank 22 Low Suction Line with fuel. ppp. Isolate and Drain Recirculation Line to Tank 22. qqq. Remove 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 22. rrr. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from gg) above. sss. Tank 22 Removed Valves (24 inch DBB, 16 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB, 10 inch

DBB Plug Valves) Preparation, Shipment, Modification and Return (Return 24 inch DBB Valve to Operator).

ttt. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 22 Recirculation Valve. uuu. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 22 Recirculation Valve. vvv. Dry Test 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 22. www. Coordinate and charge Tank 22 Recirculation Line with fuel. xxx. Notify Operator and Operationally Test Rotated Valves and associated electrical

and controls operations. yyy. Test Cooling Ring System. zzz. Commission Rotated Valves, power and controls for Acceptance. aaaa. Operational Testing Verification Period by Operator. bbbb. Full Acceptance by Authority and Operator. cccc. Notification to Operator for Tank 24 Draindown. dddd. Tank 24 Available from Operator for Modifications. eeee. Modify platform at Tank 24 Fill Valve. ffff. Isolate and Drain Suction Line from Tank 24. gggg. Remove 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 24. hhhh. Install Refurbished 16 inch DBB Valve from sss) above. iiii. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 24 Suction Valve. jjjj. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 24 Suction Valve. kkkk. Modify platform at Tank 24 Suction Valve. llll. Dry Test 16 inch Suction Valve for Tank 24. mmmm. Coordinate and charge Tank 24 Suction Line with fuel. nnnn. Isolate and Drain Low Suction Line to Tank 24. oooo. Remove 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 24. pppp. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from sss) above. qqqq. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 24 Low Suction Valve. rrrr. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 24 Low Suction Valve. ssss. Dry Test 10 inch Low Suction Valve for Tank 24. tttt. Coordinate and charge Tank 24 Low Suction Line with fuel. uuuu. Isolate and Drain Recirculation Line to Tank 24. vvvv. Remove 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 24. wwww. Install Refurbished 10 inch DBB Valve from sss) above.


SUMMARY 011000 - 5

xxxx. Tank 24 Removed Valves (16 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB, 10 inch DBB Plug Valves) Preparation, Shipment, Modification and Return to Operator.

yyyy. Modify fire protection piping at Tank 24 Recirculation Valve. zzzz. Modify electrical connections and heat tracing at Tank 24 Recirculation Valve. aaaaa. Dry Test 10 inch Recirculation Valve for Tank 24. bbbbb. Coordinate and charge Tank 24 Recirculation Line with fuel. ccccc. Notify Operator and Operationally Test Rotated Valves and associated electrical

and controls operations. ddddd. Test Cooling Ring System. eeeee. Commission Rotated Valves, power and controls for Acceptance. fffff. Operational Testing Verification Period by Operator. ggggg. Full Acceptance by Authority and Operator.

2. Leak Monitoring Sequence / Milestones (work concurrent with Tank Valve Rotation above):

a. Submit and Procure Materials. b. Excavate and Remove Tank 23 Center Inspection Port and Dewater. c. Grout Fill Tank 23 Center Inspection Piping Interstitial Space. d. Replace Tank 23 Inspection Port. e. Clean and Video Inspect Tank 23 Leak Monitoring Pipes. f. Repair and Test Tank 23 Liner. g. Review and Acceptance of Tank 23 Leak Monitoring System by Authority and

Operator. h. Return Tank 23 Leak Monitoring System to Operator. i. Acceptance of Tank 23 Leak Monitoring. j. Excavate and Remove Tank 22 Center Inspection Port and Dewater. k. Grout Fill Tank 22 Center Inspection Piping Interstitial Space. l. Replace Tank 22 Inspection Port. m. Clean and Video Inspect Tank 22 Leak Monitoring Pipes. n. Repair and Test Tank 22 Liner. o. Review and Acceptance of Tank 22 Leak Monitoring System by Authority and

Operator. p. Return Tank 22 Leak Monitoring System to Operator. q. Acceptance of Tank 22 Leak Monitoring. r. Excavate and Remove Tank 24 Center Inspection Port and Dewater. s. Grout Fill Tank 24 Center Inspection Piping Interstitial Space. t. Replace Tank 24 Inspection Port. u. Clean and Video Inspect Tank 24 Leak Monitoring Pipes. v. Repair and Test Tank 24 Liner. w. Review and Acceptance of Tank 24 Leak Monitoring System by Authority and

Operator. x. Return Tank 24 Leak Monitoring System to Operator. y. Acceptance of Tank 24 Leak Monitoring.

3. FSTF Equipment Pad Modifications (Coordinate with other work and with Operations):

a. Submit and Procure Equipment and Materials. b. Request Equipment Pad Turnover by Operator. c. Fabricate Pipe Spools. d. Construct Pad and install Storage Container.


SUMMARY 011000 - 6

e. Equipment Pad Available from Operator. f. Drain Lines and Vessels. g. Remove existing Prefilters and Filter Separator and related structures. h. Install new Prefilters, Filter Separators, piping, valves, electrical, controls and

structures sufficient for temporary operation of Equipment Pad to Transfer Fuel. i. Flush and Test Partial System (sequence items 9 thru 14 will be incorporated if

duration of work at equipment pad requires interim fuel transfer(s) by Operator). j. Commissioning of System for Temporary Operation. k. Acceptance of Partial System by Authority and Operator. l. Temporary Fuel Transfer Operations by Operator. m. Return of Equipment Pad to Contractor for Completion of Construction. n. Drain Lines and Vessels. o. Complete Installation new Prefilters, Filter Separators, piping, valves, electrical,

controls and structures. p. Flush and Test System. q. Commissioning of System. r. Operational testing by System Operator. s. Acceptance of Partial System by Authority and Operator.

4. Hydrant Fueling Tank Farm Modifications (work can begin immediately at this location):

a. Remove 10 inch DBB Plug Valves for modification and reuse at Tank 23. b. Submit and procure materials. c. Isolate and Drain affected Vessels and Lines. d. Remove Vessels. e. Demolish Existing Aboveground Piping. f. Install new Aboveground Piping. g. Modify Equipment as indicated. h. Test Lines. i. Fill and Test Lines and Equipment. j. Commissioning. k. Operational Testing by Operator. l. Acceptance by Authority and Operator.

F. At least 90 days prior to each startup and commissioning required for the contract, the Contractor shall submit for review and approval, prior to commencing the associated startup or commissioning, a sequence and detailed checklist associated with each such startup and commissioning operation. Attached at the end of this specification Section is a sample of such documentation for reference. A copy of this documentation in MS Word format will be made available to the Contractor upon request.

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

1.5 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.


SUMMARY 011000 - 7

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to the portion of the tank farms indicated in the design documents.

2. Authority Occupancy: Allow for Authority occupancy of site and day-to-day use by the facility operator.

3. Contractor shall have use of premises for construction operations within the Contract Limit Lines indicated during construction period, during the hours indicated, and as directed by COTR. Contractor's use of premises is limited by the Operator’s requirements to maintain facility operations at all times during construction and the Authority's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

4. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to the Authority, the Authority's employees, tenants, air carriers, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use driveways and entrances for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

B. Utilize areas designated for Contractor staging, storage, and parking, as indicated. For additional requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

C. Use of Existing Buildings: Maintain existing buildings in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect buildings and their occupants during construction period.

1. For additional requirements for airfield and terminal buildings, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.6 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Authority Occupancy: The Authority and/or its tenants will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with COTR during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Authority usage, and perform the Work so as not to interfere with day-to-day Airport operations.

1. COTR will prepare and obtain a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Authority occupancy.

2. Before partial Authority occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, the Authority will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

3. On occupancy, the Authority will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

B. For additional requirements for tenant operational requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."


SUMMARY 011000 - 8

1.7 CONTRACTOR HOURS OF OPERATION

A. Contractor Working Hours: The Authority anticipates that the Contractor may be required to work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established schedule. Contractor will be allowed and may be required by the nature of the Project to work 24 hours a day, seven days a week in the performance of the Work. Work is subject to restrictions of the Airport operational requirements. Notify the COTR 24-hours in advance of any change to the work schedule.

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: With the exception of Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) standard specifications and Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications the Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-Division format using the CSI/CSC's "Master Format 2004" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section titles to help with cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete as all available Sections and Section numbers are not used and the CSI numbering system is not sequentially complete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Interpret words and meanings as appropriate. Infer words implied, but not stated, as the sense requires. Interpret singular words as plural, and plural words as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are used in these Specifications. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.9 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. Employ underground utilities location subcontractor to locate and mark the horizontal location of all utility lines that might be impacted by construction activities, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Electric power lines.


SUMMARY 011000 - 9

2. Natural gas lines. 3. Sanitary Sewers. 4. Storm Sewers. 5. FAA communications, signal, and security lines. 6. Runway lighting lines 7. Water supply piping. 8. Fuel Lines. 9. Telephone lines. 10. Data lines. 11. Underground Storage Tanks. 12. High Temperature Hot Water (HTHW) and chilled water lines. 13. Dedicated Fire System (DFS) lines.

B. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk at (703) 417-8300 a minimum of 72 hours prior to starting activities that include but are not limited to location and marking of horizontal locations of telephone and telecommunications lines belonging to the Authority as part of the Airport Communication System. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk a minimum of 72 hours prior to beginning operations, that include but are not limited to excavating, boring, pile-driving, digging or planting. Note the ACS does not locate utilities. Location is the responsibility of the Contractor’s underground utilities location subcontractor. The Airport Communications System (ACS) is merely notified as indicated previously.

C. The information in the Contract Documents concerning the type and location of underground utilities is neither guaranteed nor inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for determining the type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, so as to avoid damage thereto.

D. Check and verify the horizontal and vertical location (coordinates and elevation) of all utility lines that may exist within the limits of new work, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, by use of a Subsurface Utility Engineering company. Reconfirm such locations and verification of utilities discovered, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, and submit to the COTR a dimensional survey with such notations.

E. Dig test pits by hand shovel in the vicinity of the discovered utilities. Excavate test holes utilizing a vacuum excavator.

F. Repair any damage to discovered utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Authority. The Authority will assist the Contractor by making available any known information.

G. Submit to the COTR, for written approval, the name of the independent subsurface utility engineering company to be used.

H. The individual who performs the utility detection and location work shall have as a minimum five (5) years of similar experience in the area of subsurface utility detection and location engineering.

I. Submit to COTR the following:


SUMMARY 011000 - 10

1. List of utility detection equipment along with product information and data sheets that will be used specifically for this contract.

2. List of employee qualifications and résumés of those individuals who will be assigned specifically to this contract.

3. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, a survey of all subsurface utility engineering results indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities.

1.10 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, prepare a schedule of such outage. Include in outage schedule duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in any emergency. Apply for all outages of utility systems in writing. Fully coordinate outage requests with COTR. Obtain approval in writing by COTR. Schedule all outages at least three (3) weeks in advance with a 96-hour notification provided by the Contractor confirming date, time, and duration. Outages will normally be scheduled to occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:30 am, Tuesday through Thursday.

B. Provide a suction/pump truck during all sanitary sewer line outages to support the disabled lift stations. Transport sewage to alternate lift stations located on the Airport and dispose of in accordance with Airport procedures. Provide a suction/pump truck with a capacity of 3,000 gallons or greater.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



SECTION 011000 ATTACHMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS TC-1

ATTACHMENT TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 011000

PRE-COMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FUEL PIPING FILL, HYDROSTATIC TEST & FLUSHING CHECKLIST FUEL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLIST PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST OPERATTIONAL ACCEPTANCE CHECKLIST START-UP / COMMISSIONING PLAN ATTACHMENT A – PRE-START-UP TASKS ATTACHMENT B – START-UP TASKS ATTACHMENT C – INSTRUMENT INDEX ATTACHMENT D – PRE-START-UP VALVE LINEUP

*****

Washington Dulles International Airport Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

Fuel Piping Fill, Hydrostatic Test & Flushing Checklist

For

Fuel Settling Tank Farm Inbound Particle Separator Project

MARCH 2012

Washington Dulles International Airport Fuel Settling Tank Farm Inbound Particle Separator Fuel System Test & Flush Checklist March 2012

Page 2 of 9

Introduction:

The attached checklist shall be used to identify requirements that must be satisfied prior to commencing

work involved in the final phases of construction and testing of jet fuel valves piping and equipment at

the Fuel Settling Tank Farm at the Washington-Dulles Airport.

The Commissioning Team, consisting of MWAA, PMC, Prime Contractor (and their subcontractors)

and the Commissioning Manager must be in complete agreement that conditions are satisfactory to

safely introduce fuel to piping, followed by the settling tanks, and commission filtration equipment and

control systems to allow flushing of piping subsequent to completion of hydrostatic testing.

Personnel invited to this review include:

Name: Position: MWAA Owner Engineer Name: Position: COTR Resident Engineer Name: Position: PMC Assistant to Resident Engineer Name: Position: PMC Design Task Manager Name: Position: Commissioning Agent Name: Position: Product Supply Manager (ASIG) Name: Position: Team Leader (ASIG) Name: Position: Fire Marshal (Dulles Airport) Name: Position: Prime Contractor Name: Position: Prime Contractor, Site Manager Name: Position: Mechanical Project Superintendent Name: Position: Electrical Project Superintendent Name: Position: PMC Lead Inspector Name: Position: Name: Position:


Page 3 of 9

I. Construction and Design in Accordance with Design Specifications

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments

A. Installation and Handover A1 Manufacturer’s shop tests (e.g., material

certification, performance tests, etc.) are complete

A2 Subcontractor quality assurance documentation for the project has been reviewed, including weld x-rays, weld maps, hydrostatic and pneumatic test charts, NDT reports, loop checks, functional check-out lists, etc. and are current with project completion. Open issues have been resolved.

A3 Is the entire project complete? If not, have those incomplete sections of the project been communicated to the appropriate personnel who may be affected? Were risks associated with partial handover assessed?

A4 Post-construction walk-through inspection complete and deficiencies/punch list items corrected:

A5 General status and forecast project completion dates are coordinated with completion of fuel piping hydrostatic testing, flushing and soak testing

A6 Introduction of fuel to settling tanks, is coordinated with piping testing, flushing and overall completion of the project

A7 Project completion schedule is in place and is current

A8 Remaining HOT work has been identified, procedures are in place for control of work in conjunction with fuel movement.

The Safety Plan MUST clearly identify how Hot work in all areas of the Settling Tank Farm will be permitted once any additional fuel is introduced to the facility

A9 Procedures are in place to appraise airport personnel of daily and weekly activities during testing and movement of fuel

Safety Plan and Work Plan combined must provide clear instructions as to communication between Constructor and Airport Safety/Operations Departments

B. Piping Systems B1 Piping installation field verified in accordance

with the P&IDs and installation drawings

B2 Lock open and lock closed valves have been inspected and are properly secured in their intended position, and verified against documentation

Valves are in position to permit filling and hydrostatic testing. Locks and tags are installed to identify valves that are not to be operated.

B3 All block valves should be in the correct position (normally open or closed) and handle is able to go full travel. Safe access to valve operation verified.

B4 All construction spades removed as required. All permanent spades are in place; all temporary spades have been removed. The


Page 4 of 9

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments spade list has been reviewed and approved.

B5 All spades are tagged and documented in accordance with ASIG Spading procedure.

B6 Contractor’s Work Plan for filling, Hydrostatic testing and flushing has been submitted and approved by the Commissioning Team

B7 All pneumatic testing of Jet fuel piping is complete

B7 All lines are properly labeled.

C. Rotating Equipment C1 All lubrication systems are in service. Bearings

are lubed per manufacturer’s specs.

C2 All equipment has been filled with proper fluids to the appropriate level and charged as necessary.

C3 Mechanical equipment has been checked for proper alignment and rotation; functional checkouts have been performed on equipment and controls.

Respective vendor representatives scheduled by Contractor to be on site for final pre-commissioning checks prior to operation of rotating equipment

C4 All equipment guards have been installed.

D. Instruments, Controls D1 Instrument taps verified to be properly lined up.

All instruments presently in service shall remain in service. ASIG operations MUST issue permit before any device that is in service can be worked on by Construction personnel

D2 A list of all valves, controls and alarms that are in service has been issued by Construction/Operations.

Procedures are in place to ensure that operating controls and alarms are not jeopardized or negated by construction activities.

D3 Motorized valves confirmed to stroke properly. D4 Fail-safe actions have been verified. D5 Control loops and alarms have been tested.

No operating control loops or alarms can be either worked on or taken out of service by Construction without prior issue of a permit from ASIG

D6 Actual alarm triggers loaded to PLC.

Programmer will be on site prior to introduction of fuel to tanks and equipment to finalize checks and testing of indicators and alarms.

D7 Instrument loop checks are current

Programmer will be on site prior to introduction of fuel to tanks and equipment to finalize checks and testing of indicators and alarms.

D8 Procedures are in place to execute final testing and “hot cut-over” of controls and instrumentation

All “WORK” on PLC or control loops shall be coordinated with ASIG Operations prior to commencing work.

D9 Fire Alarms are tested and functional

Special permission MUST be obtained before any fire alarm or EFSO device is worked on or


Page 5 of 9

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments taken out of service (ASIG permit system)

D10 EFSO switches are installed, tested and functional

Special permission MUST be obtained before any fire alarm or EFSO device is worked on or taken out of service (ASIG permit system)

E. Electrical E1 All explosion-proof boxes and conduit covers

are properly secured and all purges have been lined up.

E2 All equipment and associated breaker panels not to be used or not available for use are out of service. All lock offs are tagged and listed.

E3 The UPS and/or emergency power and backup systems are in a ready state.

E4 Lockout provisions exist at switchgears and at start/stop switches.

F. Safety Systems F1 Initial safety equipment installation complete.

Including fire extinguishers, first aid stations, safety showers, etc.

Contractor shall be responsible for providing all local and temporary fire protection equipment, etc.

F2 Initial safety equipment inspections performed and found acceptable.

F3 Barriers to prevent traffic access to unit have been installed.

Barriers MUST be installed and maintained in place in accordance with the Safety Plan

F4 Fire protection systems are adequate. Performance test completed.

F5 Deluge systems verified for readiness. F6 Passive fire-proofing provided.

Hot Work permits may require additional temporary containment and fire protection depending on circumstances

F7 Fire detection, gas detection systems for combustible gases are installed as applicable and have been reviewed for proper detector location and correct response/action.

F8 Safety equipment, including fire fighting devices, fire extinguishers, escape devices, and eyewash stations, have been inspected and reviewed for proper operation and location.

F9 Hazard zones clearly defined. See Safety PlanF10 All safety signs installed, such as “Hearing

Protection Required”, etc.

F11 Platforms, kick boards, stairs, ladders, cages, etc. installed correctly. Adequate capability for egress from platforms.

II. Hazardous Analysis Complete

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments 1 Has Risk Management Plan been updated and

submitted to the PSM Group.


Page 6 of 9

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments 2 All changes to design, including field changes,

have been reviewed for hazards, approved through the project management of change process, and all relevant information has been updated.

3 Process Hazard Analysis (HAZOP) complete for entire process (including changes) and accepted safety items field verified as implemented and closure documented.

4 Have HSE recommendations from HSE studies, PHSERs, specialist reviews, been resolved and closure documented?

III. Safety, Operating, Maintenance, Emergency and MSDS/COSHH Procedures Prepared

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments A. Operating Procedures

A1 Start-up procedures developed/updated, reviewed, complete, have been issued and are readily available.

A2 Equipment Lock-off/Tag-out procedures developed or updated.

A3 Sampling procedures developed/updated and schedule established.

A4 Plan is in place for any additional sampling during commissioning.

A5 JSA has been performed on commissioning/ decommissioning procedures.

Job Safety Analysis

A6 All MSDS assessments complete.

B. Emergency Procedures B1 Emergency action or response plan updated

and personnel trained.

B2 Procedures to be followed by those who must remain on the unit to perform critical functions prior to emergency evacuation.


Page 7 of 9

C. Control of Ongoing Work

C1 All naked flame work stopped. C2 Plan in place to minimize personnel in Fuel

Settling Tank Farm during commissioning and subsequent operation.

C3 All continuing construction work coordinated with operation of operating systems as well as fill of fuel piping and new equipment

C4 Operators plant radio system functioning. C5 Leak detection systems operating correctly. C6 Critical construction work in project area has

been completed and equipment associated with operation of existing facilities is turned over to ASIG operations.

IV. Employees Training Complete and Documented

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments 1 Training of operators, shift supervisors,

operating engineers, and operating superintendents/managers complete as applicable and qualifications documented:

Operator Tarining shall be ongoing throughout final testing and initial operation of the Fuel Settling Tank Farm modifications

a) Operating procedures b) Safe work practices c) Emergency evacuation procedures d) HAZCOM & HAZWOPER training and

certification complete

Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard

e) Core safety training 2 Have environmental permit requirements been

incorporated into training?

3 Training conducted on maintenance and mechanical integrity procedures

4 Contractors associated with the process trained on hazards of the process, safe work practices, and steps required to perform job safely.

5 Vendor, contract services, and specialist support for start-up identified and confirmed available.

V. Site Cleanup and Preparedness

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments A. Work Place Conditions and Plant Preparedness for Start-up

A1 Facility care/control/custody has been transferred to Operations.

Contractor shall remain the Single Point of Accountability during filling, hydrostatic testing and flushing of fuel systems

A2 Area has been cleared of construction equipment, surplus equipment, extraneous tools, unused parts, and empty drums.

A3 Remaining construction material is stored in designated areas.


Page 8 of 9

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments A4 Obstructions have been removed to provide

adequate access to emergency equipment, for emergency vehicles and paths for egress in an emergency.

A5 Scaffolding that could hinder operators has been removed.

A6 All temporary piping, hoses, and process or utility connections not required for start-up have been removed.

A7 Drains have been inspected for blockage. A8 All drain/vent valves are closed and plugged; all

low points are drained.

A9 All required utilities have been confirmed to be available.

A10 Equipment is air-free, dried to the prescribed dew point, and ready for introduction of fuel.

A11 Activities concurrent with start-up have been identified. Risks associated with these activities have been assessed and appropriate safeguards have been verified to be in place.

A12 Management of change has been transferred from the project to the site’s MOC system.

A13 All trip hazards have been removed. A14 There is adequate access to all pumps and they

are free to operate.

A15 There is adequate access to all key isolation valves and they are free to operate.

A16 Access to control room is unrestricted. A17 All unnecessary crane pads are removed. A18 All access and egress routes have been cleared

from obstruction.

A19 All platforms and gratings are secure. A20 All handrails have been instated. A21 All platform ladder gates are operating correctly. A22 All fixed ladders are available and clear of

obstructions.

A23 All stairways are available and clear of all obstructions.

A24 Lighting of all areas is adequate A25 All works in PLC outstations complete and re-

instated to operational condition.

Final checkout and testing by Controls Contractor to be completed prior to introduction of fuel to tanks and equipment

A26 All works in electrical power systems complete and re-instated to operational condition.

A27 General housekeeping is an acceptable standard.

A28 Date agreed for final pre-commissioning housekeeping tour.

A29 Date agreed for post start-up housekeeping. A30 Appropriate fire fighting equipment in position

and accessible.

A31 Fire Station audit of BA, first aid and fire fighting equipment, and emergency access complete.


Page 9 of 9

B. Materials on Site

B1 All unnecessary chemical and waste storage containers removed.

B2 All insulation material is safely stored. B3 Remaining scaffold material is stored in

designated areas.

B4 Skips removed or emptied as required. B5 All waste cleared on site by notification.

C. Protective Equipment

C1 All guards fitted to rotating machinery. C2 Ensure TRV register is fully up to date and

adequate process relief is available.

C3 Isolation valve LO/LC register is fully up to date and validated.

C4 Radioactive source register is fully up to date and validated.

C5 PLC alarms for commissioning are re-enabled. C6 Sufficient steam traps are installed and

operable.

C7 Insulation required for commissioning is in place.

C8 All earth/lightning conductors on tanks and equipment re-instated.

VI. Environmental

No. Item Complete Y N NA Comments 1 Have changes to the original permitting

information been provided to Environmental Dept. for review?

2 Have permits or exemptions been received? 3 Have environmental permit requirements been

identified for operating procedures and training?

4 Environmental permitting compliance verified. 5 Have all waste streams been checked for

proper handling?

6 Have fluids from pressure testing and other commissioning activities been captured and properly disposed?

7 Have startup notifications been issued to relevant environmental agencies?

WASHINGTON-DULLES JET FUEL SETTLING TERMINAL

INBOUND PARTICLE SEPARATOR PROJECT

COMPLETIONS & ACCEPTANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DRAFT: 1

FUEL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLIST

(Page 1 of 14)

Instructions:

1. Fuel System tests outlined in this Checklist are to conducted as the final phase of

completion and commissioning testing. 2. Following the written operating procedures in the Operations and Maintenance Manual is

the “how-to” at this phase. In order to be accurate, deviations from the written procedure must be documented and the procedure revised as necessary.

3. The Contractor is to notify the proper authorities, COTR and ASIG that items are ready for inspection and testing. Twenty-four hours' notice shall be given for all inspection and tests.

4. All Fuel System tests must be witnessed by the COTR or his representative(s) and ASIG. 5. Test results are to be documented on this Checklist with signatures from the COTR or his

representative(s) and ASIG. 6. Document if the test passed or failed. Any of the Authority designated witnesses can

deem a test as failing. Arbitration of the failed test may ultimately be a decision of the Airport Manager and the IAD FUELS LLC Chairperson.

7. The Contractor is responsible for the site during the Sub-system Testing.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 2 of 14)

1. Interface with

Colonial Pipeline. DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Receipt from Colonial

into tankage.

b. Collecting a sample

for analysis at the

composite sampler.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 3 of 14)

2. Auto-Sampling DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Collecting a sample

for analysis at the

tank sampler.

b. Collecting a sample

from incoming fuel

from Colonial




DRAFT: 1


(Page 4 of 14)

3. Tank Receiving DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Receiving into Tank

22.

b. Receiving into Tank

23.

c. Receiving into Tank

24.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 5 of 14)

4. Jet Fuel Storage

Tanks(T-22,23

&24): DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Test MOV opening and

closing using PLC

(four valves per

tank).

b. Manually declutch each

MOV, manually

cycle through its

open and closed

positions, and re-

clutch.

c. Verify MOV open or

close positions are

correct for each tank

mode (Receive-

Settle- Dispense).




DRAFT: 1


(Page 6 of 14)

4. Jet Fuel Storage

Tanks(T-22,23 &24)

continued DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

d. Verify limit switch

position of each

MOV is correctly

transmitted to the

PLC and indicated on

the control computer

screen.

e. Verify tank fill MOV

closes when the tank

high-high level

switch is activated.

f. Test floating suction

arm position

indicator.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 7 of 14)

5. Aboveground Storage

Tank Instruments

(Storage Tank #22): DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Test Level Transmitter

System

(1) Test high-high level

alarm, and alarm

communication for

inlet MOV closure.

b. Test high-high level

switch, alarm signal

to PLC, and

communications to

for inlet MOV

closure.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 8 of 14)


Tank Instruments

(Storage Tank #23: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment


System:


alarm, and alarm

for inlet MOV

closure.



to PLC, and

communications for

inlet MOV closure.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 9 of 14)


Tank Instruments

(Storage Tank #24: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment


System:


alarm, and alarm

for inlet MOV

closure.



to PLC, and

communications for

inlet MOV closure.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 10 of 14)

8. Transfer Pumps: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Test pump start/stop

control and

communication with

PLC.

b. Verify pumps will not

operate unless at least

one tank 16-inch

suction valve is open.

c. Verify individual

pumps stop on no-

flow signal from flow

switch.

d. Test operation of

suction line pressure

transmitter

communication to

PLC.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 11 of 14)

8. Transfer Pumps

(continued): DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

e. Test low pressure alarm

of suction line

pressure transmitter.

f. Test operation of pump

discharge line

pressure transmitter.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 12 of 14)

9. Pre-filters: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Test differential

pressure gauge.

b. Test differential

pressure transmitter

output to PLC.

c. Test high differential

pressure alarm at

PLC.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 13 of 14)

10. Filter/ Separators: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Test differential

pressure gauge.

b. Test differential

pressure transmitter

output to PLC.

c. Test high differential

pressure alarm at

PLC.

d. Test water slug valve

rate of flow control.

e. Test water slug valve

shutdown via ballast

float switch.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 14 of 14)

11. Leak Monitoring

Piping: DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B Comment

a. Verify dry status of

leak monitoring

piping.




DRAFT: 1

“PRE-COMMISSIONING” CHECK LIST

(Page 1 of 9)

Task No.

Task Identification COTR Initials

A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

1.0 General

1.1 O&M Manuals

1.2 Operating Procedures

1.3 Operator Training

1.4 Pre-commissioning Testing

1.5 Relief Valves Relief valves and instruments that are subject to damage during hydrostatic tests or flushing procedures are removed or isolated

1.6 Vessels All vessel inspection, cleaning and closure certificates are complete.

1.7 Fire Fighting Equipment All fire protection systems for tanks and associated equipment have been tested and are in service

1.8 Safety Equipment All safety equipment is in place for personnel and equipment protection

1.9 Safety Devices All mechanical safety devices are installed and have been tested.

1.10 Dike Drains Dike drains are ready for operation.

1.11 Fuel Sample Containers Containers, hoses and equipment for fuel sampling is available on site.

1.12 Fuel Sampling Sampling procedures, lab schedules, analytical analysis methods and acceptance criteria has been established.




DRAFT: 1

CHECK LIST “PRE-COMMISSIONING”

(Page 2 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

1.13 MSDS All required MSDS sheets are available to all personnel in Contractor and ASIG files

1.14 Field Training All operators, fire department and contractors are familiar with the systems being tested and procedures that are to be followed; classroom training has been conducted.

1.15 Fuel Delivery Fuel delivery is confirmed and scheduled to support initial fill of each modified tank

1.16 Fuel Disposal Plans are in place to contain spills and dispose of any degraded fuel.

1.17 Pressure Tests All pneumatic and hydrostatic testing of fuel piping has been completed and sign-off sheets are in turn-over documents.

1.18 Emergency Plans All emergency plans have been developed, reviewed and approved; and all personnel are familiar with them.

1.19 Buildings All building inspections are complete and accepted with exceptions.

1.20 Underground Piping All impacted underground piping has been tested and test certificates are in turn-over documents. Pipe coating has been installed and inspected. Backfill of underground piping is complete.

2.0 Safety

2.1

Single Point of Authority Contractor remains Single Point of Authority and remains responsible for all activities and related safety aspects until the unit is handled over to the Airport Authority

2.2 Safety Personnel Certified construction safety personnel are on site during execution of work




DRAFT: 1


(Page 3 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

2.3 Hot Work Permits Hot work permit system in place and managed by Contractor

3.0 Dike Areas

3.1 Dike Liner Repaired and tested

3.2 Liner Cover

3.3 Dike Drain System

3.4 Access Stairs and Platforms

3.5 Valve Installation

3.6 Electrical Installation

3.7 FW Piping Installation

4.0 Fuel Piping

4.1 Pipeline Fill and Test Procedure Fill and test procedure has been issued, reviewed and approved.

4.2 NDE and Turn-over Documentation

Non Destructive Evaluation (NDE) testing documentation is current.

4.3 P&ID and Piping Drawing Verification

A/E/PMC/MWAA/ASIG conducted detailed walk-down of fuel piping systems; installation conforms to latest issue of P&ID's and Piping Drawings

4.4 Pipe Supports, Hangers & Guides

Pipe supports, hangers and guides are installed in accordance with design drawings, specifications and vendor instructions.

4.5 Gasket Installation Verify gasket installation. Refer to piping specification and gasket manufacturer details.

4.6 Valves and Instrument Connections

Manual valves, vents, drains and instrument connections are installed in correct flow sequence and direction of flow.

4.7 Valves Operator access and orientation provides safe operation.

4.8 Valve Hand-wheels and Operators

Valve operators and chain wheels are properly secured.

4.9 Valve Operation All manual valves open and close with ease.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 4 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

4.10 Flange Bolts Each flange bolt installation and torque has been verified. Refer to gasket manufacturer's written instructions.

4.11 Insulating Flanges Installation and testing of insulating flange kits is complete.

4.12 Pneumatic Tests All pneumatic testing of fuel pipe has been completed, signed- off and certificates are in turn-over documents.

4.13 Pipe Cleaning Piping has been blown clean and is dry following pneumatic testing.

4.14 Blinds All temporary and permanent blinds have been recorded on project blind list for fuel system. (include transfer line and hydrant farm)

4.15 Drain Pans Drain pans are placed under flanges and connections not hydrostatically tested before filling and packing the lines.

4.16 Spill Containment Equipment to contain potential spills is available and in position in accordance with test procedure.

4.17 Thermal Relief Valves Valves have been tested and calibrated; correct installation has been verified. (discharge of thermal relief valves must be installed to

4.18 Low Point Drains & High Point Vents

All low point drains and vents valve position has been checked and drains and vents are clear; drain and vent valves are equipped with blinds/ plugs in accordance with design.

4.19 Double Block & Bleed Valves DBB valves are installed correctly and vendor supplied connections are correct. Valves open and close manually with ease.

4.20 Threaded Connections All threaded connections, plugs, and caps are tight. (Provide all threaded connections with specified pipe dope).




DRAFT: 1


(Page 5 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

4.21 Lubricate and Operate Valves Valves are lubricated and operate through full range.

4.22 Spare Filter Elements An adequate number of filter elements are available (ASIG should have spare elements on site for the Hydrant Farm filters).

4.23 Construction Punch list A/E/PMC/MWAA/ASIG reviewed, and approved Master Punch List

5.0 Leak Monitoring Piping

5.1 Leak monitor piping has been grouted and checked.

Leak Monitors are installed and checked.

5.2 Cleaning/Video inspection Video inspections and cleaning is complete

6.0 Fire Water System


Non Destructive Evaluation (NDE) testing documentation is current.


Pipe supports are installed in accordance with design drawings, specifications and vendor instructions.

6.3 Fire Water Piping All new fire water piping is complete as necessary to protect tanks


7.0 Fuel Tank

7.1 Level Floating Suction Arms Arm position indicator is

functioning

7.2 Inspection/Punch-List A/E/PMC/MWAA/ASIG conducted detailed walk-down of tank(s), installation conforms to latest issue of P&ID's and Tank Drawings

7.3 Tank Interior Final inspection for cleanliness and all internal work has been completed. Acceptance and closure sign-off sheets and certificates are in turn-over files.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 6 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

7.4 Tank Exterior All nozzles are fitted with proper gaskets and flange bolt torque is in accordance with gasket vendor specification.


8.0 Electrical Systems

8.1 Building Infrastructure Complete with exceptions

8.2 Grounding All grounding cables are connected and tested. The complete grounding system has undergone testing, acceptance and sign-off. Measure resistance on equipment grounding conductors and equipment grounding connections (pump motor and light poles).

8.3 Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) Lock-Out/Tag-Out Procedures are in place and being adhered to by all personnel on site (all disciplines and outside parties involved in construction, commissioning and operation).

8.4 Tagging & LOTO All equipment used by ASIG is clearly identified and all other equipment is tagged and locked out for safety purposes

8.5 Controls Control panel software modifications are installed and Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is tested and functional.


9.0 Instrumentation

9.1 Local Instrument Devices Calibration checks complete. Devices installed and ready for wiring termination with exception to those devices that can not be installed until fuel hydrostatic test is complete. All instrument devices not installed are confirmed on site.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 7 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

9.2 Control PLC PLC software modifications are installed, powered and Site Acceptance Test (SAT) of PLC has been completed.

9.3 Loop Checks PLC related loop continuity checks have been completed. PLC loop checks are in progress and scheduled completion coincides with completion of fuel pipe testing.

9.4 EFSO All Emergency Fuel Shut-Off (EFSO) stations are operational.

10.0 Filtration Station

10.1 Pipeline Fill and Test Procedure Fill and test procedure has been issued, reviewed and approved.


NDE testing documentation required by ASME B31.4 and 49 CFR 195 to MWAA and A/E is current.

10.3 Construction Punch list A/E/PMC/MWAA/ASIG reviewed, and approved Master Punch List open items.

10.4 P&ID and Piping Drawing Verification

A/E/PMC/MWAA/ASIG conducted detailed walkdown of fuel piping systems; installation conforms to latest issue of P&ID's and Piping Drawings


Pipe supports, hangers and guides are installed in accordance with design drawings, specifications and vendor instructions.

10.6 Gasket Installation Verify gasket installation. Refer to piping specification and gasket manufacturer details.

10.7 Valves and Instrument Connections

Manual valves, vents, drains and instrument connections are installed in correct flow sequence.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 8 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

10.8 Valves Operator access and orientation provides safe operation.

10.9 Valve Hand-wheels and Operators

Valve operators and chain wheels are properly secured

10.10 Valve Operation Manual valves open and close with ease.

10.11 Flange Bolts Each flange bolt installation and torque has been verified. Refer to gasket manufacturer's written instructions.

10.12 Insulating Flanges Installation and testing of insulating flange kits is complete.

10.13 Pneumatic Tests All pneumatic testing of fuel pipe has been completed, signed- off and certificates are available in turn-over documents

10.14 Pipe Cleaning Piping has been blown clean and is dry following pneumatic testing.

10.15 Temporary Piping Jumpers Installation of temporary piping, valves, etc. are installed in accordance with test and flush procedure. Ensure temporary piping can readily be isolated and removed after testing without special draining of fuel system.

10.16 Blinds All temporary and permanent blinds have been recorded on project blind list for fuel system. (include transfer line and hydrant farm).

10.17 Drain Pans Drain pans are placed under flanges and connections not hydrostatically tested before filling and packing the lines.

10.18 Spill Containment Equipment to contain potential spills is available and in position in accordance with test procedure.

10.19 Thermal Relief Valves Valves have been tested and calibrated and correct installation has been verified.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 9 of 9)

Task No.


A/E Initials

ASIG Initials

Description

10.20 Low Point Drains & High Point Vents

All low point drains and vents for valve position and confirm drains and vents are clear. Drain and vent valves are equipped with blinds/ plugs in accordance with design.

10.21 Threaded Connections All threaded connections, plugs, and caps are tight. (Provide all threaded connections with specified pipe dope).

10.22 Lubricate and Operate Valves Valves are lubricated and operate through full range.

10.23 Temporary Pump Strainers Temporary pump strainers are installed in accordance with flushing procedure.

10.24 Flow Metering Devices Flow metering devices are removed; replace with temporary spools for hydrostatic testing and flushing.

11.0 Ground Work

11.1 Dike Liners All dike linings are intact and signed off.

11.2 Rock Rock within dike area has been installed and no further large equipment use is necessary in the dike area(s).

12.0 Colonial Pipeline

12.1 Jet Fuel Availability All preparatory action items are complete and Colonial is ready to transfer jet fuel upon request.




DRAFT: 1

OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE CHECK LIST

(Page 1 of 8)

Instructions:

1. Inspections outlined in this Checklist are required acceptance of the completed FSTF Inbound Particle

Separator Project. 2. Contractor is to notify the proper authorities, COTR or his representative and ASIG that items are ready for

inspection and testing. 3. Twenty-four hours' notice shall be given for all inspection and tests. 4. All tests must be witnessed by the COTR or his representative and ASIG. 5. Test results are to be documented on this Checklist with signatures from the COTR or his representative

and ASIG. 6. Document if the test passed or failed. Any of the three witnesses can deem a test as failing. 7. Categorize the failure(s) as;

a. Category A- Items to be repaired, completed or corrected before the system can receive fuel. b. Category B- Items that can be repaired, completed or corrected at a later date and which allows

fuel to be introduced without jeopardizing the Terminal or personnel. 8. PMC is to submit typed samples of test reports to COTR and ASIG for approval. 9. PMC is remains responsible for the site during the Mechanical Inspection Phase. 10. For each inspection, circle the area being inspected below. Use one Checklist for each area.

Write N/A for those questions that are not applicable. Circle:

Interface with Colonial

Pipeline Tank 22 Leak Monitoring

Jet Fuel Piping

Downstream of Settling

Tanks

Tank 22 Valves Tank 23 Leak Monitoring Hydrant Fuel Farm

Filter Pad

Tank 23 Valves Tank 24 Leak Monitoring 12” Transfer Line

Tank 24 Valves Settling Terminal

Filter Pad




DRAFT: 1

CHECK LIST Operational Acceptance

(Page 2 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments

General:

1. As-built P&IDs provided and verified for accuracy.

2. The fire water system has been tested and accepted by the Fire Marshal; and is in service.

3. The EFSO system has been tested and accepted by the Fire Marshal; and is in service.

4. Construction Master Punch List items are all closed.

5. All operating procedures have been reviewed, approved.

6. Operators & contractors are familiar with operating procedures, potential hazards and emergency procedures.

7. Pipeline receipt procedures have been reviewed with Colonial Pipeline, ASIG operators and contractors.

8. Fuel piping flush procedures have been reviewed, and approved; and sampling criteria has been established.

9. Communication of alarms to Colonial Pipeline, the Fire Department and between tank farms has been tested, verified and documented.

10. Pipeline receipt sampling system is in service and sampling procedures are established.

11. Log sheets are available to record all fuel transfers.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 3 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments

12. All utility systems are in service

13. All storm and sanitary sewers are fully functional.

14. All buildings pass inspection and are ready for occupancy.

15. All personnel safety equipment is in place and procedures have been reviewed with all parties involved.

16. MSDS sheets are available on site for all materials being handled.

17. All environmental equipment is in service and all concerns have been addressed.

18. All temporary spill protection, environmental protection and/or temporary fire protection identified in the fill procedure are in place.

19. Dike liners and rock covering has been installed, inspected and accepted.

20. All painting is complete and accepted with exceptions.

21. All field labels are present and accurate.

22. All painting and cleanup is complete

Piping & Equipment:

23. All test documentation required by ASME B31.4 and 49 CFR 195 to MWAA and A/E is current.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 4 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments 24. Pneumatic testing of fuel

piping is complete and recorded.

25. All fuel pipe hydrostatic testing has been completed and recorded.

26. Hydrostatic testing of all other piping is complete and recorded.

27. Correct bolts are installed, of the correct length, diameter and proper torque.

28. Valves, instruments, branches, vents, and drains are installed in same flow sequence as P&IDs.

29. Check valves, control valves; globe and ball valves in correct flow direction.

30. Control valve action on failure is correct and documented.

31. Flanged valves are orientated correctly for safe operation.

32. Temporary drains and vents are disconnected and seal-welded.

33. All manual valves open and close with ease.

34. Pipe supports and hangers are set properly; allowing for expansion.

35. Drains and vents are proven clear, dewatered and are plugged or capped.

36. All temporary gaskets removed.

37. All temporary and permanent blind isolations recorded; special note at existing hydrant fuel farm.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 5 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments 38. All in-line devices installed,

connected and tested (with exception of those removed for flushing).

39. All relief valves calibrated, tested, verified as installed in proper location and in service.

40. All heat tracing is installed and tested and insulation is complete.

Vessels 41. Vessel interiors have been

inspected in accordance with engineering drawings and specifications.

42. Vessel internals have been cleaned, dried and closed with a vessel closure permit in place.

43. Vessel external attachments conform to engineering drawings and specifications.

44. Vessel name plate is accurate.

45. Vessel nozzle gaskets and seals are of the correct material, installed correctly and with the proper bolting.

46. Grouting of vessels is in accordance with engineering drawings and specifications.

47. Filter media installation is in accordance with design specification and vendor instructions.

Electrical: 48. All termination, continuity

and meggar testing is complete and documented.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 6 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments 49. All insulating flanges are

installed, tested and documented.

50. All ground tests are complete and documented.

51. All cathodic protection systems are functional.

52. All disconnects are installed, tested and functional.

53. All lighting, interior and exterior is installed, tested and functional.

54. All electrical installations have been tested and inspected for safety; all fuses, overload heaters and breakers are the correct size and setting.

55. Lock-out devices, panel covers and panels are in place.

56. Conduit connections meet code and seals have been properly installed.

57. All manholes and openings are closed and properly sealed.

Instruments: 58. All instrument loops checks

and functional tests are complete

59. Control valves and MOV’s have been stroked.

60. Each alarm device has been tested, loop confirmed and set-point verified.




DRAFT: 1


(Page 7 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments 61. Each MOV has been

declutched, manually fully opened and closed then reclutched; and each valve test is documented.

62. All functional tests of MOV’s and MOV sequencing through the PLC has been tested and verified.

63. All signals back from MOV limit switches has been tested and verified.

64. All level alarm devices and alarms have been tested and Cause & Effect verified.

65. Commissioning of PLC monitors, control panels and alarm signals is complete and verified and PLC system completely functional.

66. Verify tank fill line MOV closes when a high-high level switch is activated and a signal is transmitted to Colonial Pipeline.

67. Local gauges and instrument devices are installed, are the correct range and are documented.

68. All level glasses function properly.

69. Commissioning test documentation is current.

70. Pre-Start-up valve positions have been verified.

71. Pre-start-up Safety Reviews are complete




DRAFT: 1


(Page 8 of 8)

Area:________________

DATE

COTR

Initials

A/E

Initials

ASIG

Initials

Test

Pass

Y/N

Priority

A/B

Comments 72. Operator Training is

complete and documented

Tanks: 73. All floating arm suction

tests have been completed and documented.

74. Holiday testing is complete and recorded.

Category A Items to be repaired, completed or corrected before equipment can be operated safely. Category B Items that can be repaired, completed or corrected at a later date and which allows equipment to be operated

without jeopardizing the Terminal or personnel

Page 1 of 5

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT FUEL SETTLING TANK FARM


Start-Up / Commissioning Plan General Requirements Roles and Responsibilities

1. Authority’s Commissioning Agent

The commissioning agent will provide overall management and coordination of start-up and commissioning activities. He will also provide direction and control of specific start-up activities and procedures.

2. Burns & McDonnell –Engineer of Record

Mechanical – Tyler Docking Electrical / Controls – Sharon Gorick Civil / Utilities – Mark Lundquist

3. ASIG – Product Supply Manager

Mr. David Barrett (703-572-8356)

The product supply manager will provide access to the existing fuel settling and hydrant system fuel farms and their resources as required to assist in the start-up and commissioning operations. ASIG will also provide operations criteria for acceptance.

4. Construction Manager The construction manager will assign resources as required for the start-up and commissioning activities and will coordinate construction punch lists and construction schedules.

5. PMC –Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative

The COTR will interface with and coordinate subcontractor activities. He will work alongside Commissioning Agent to verify completion of the pre-start-up activities.

6. Mechanical Subcontractor Site Superintendent The mechanical subcontractor site superintendent will oversee the activities of the mechanical subcontractor personnel. He will make personnel and equipment

Page 2 of 5

available during start-up activities. Personnel will include pipe fitters/welders and helpers.

7. Electrical Subcontractor Site Superintendent

The electrical subcontractor site superintendent will oversee the activities of the electrical subcontractor personnel. He will make personnel and equipment available during start-up activities. Personnel will include electricians.

8. Controls Subcontractor Site Superintendent The controls subcontractor site superintendent will oversee the activities of the controls subcontractor personnel. He will make personnel and equipment available during start-up activities. Personnel will include programmers and start-up.

Assumptions

1. Prior to commencing commissioning activities, the piping modifications and equipment included in this project scope will have been constructed and tested.

2. All valves have been operated and proper instruments operation proven. 3. System flushing will occur prior to commissioning and start-up activities.

4. ASIG has coordinated with Colonial and scheduled receipt of fuel from the

Colonial pipeline.

5. MWAA has obtained Fire Marshal approval to operate the FSTF facility.

6. Constructor will provide QC personnel required to oversee any work required for start-up.

7. All emergency plans have been developed and are in place for start-up, along with

required signage. Personnel involved in start-up have reviewed emergency plans and are familiar with the plans and emergency evacuation procedures.

8. All piping intended for service has been successfully hydrotested prior to startup

activities.

9. Start-Up plan assumes electrical device checkout will begin prior to beginning start-up along with its successful completion prior to start-up.

Safety

1. The Fire Marshal must be notified of the planned start-up activities. Additionally, the fire department should be “on alert” prior to beginning start-up activities.

Page 3 of 5

2. The FSTF facility’s evacuation plans and fire contingency plans shall be made

available to the start-up team two weeks prior to start and the start-up team shall have become familiar with these plans prior to start-up.

3. Mobile fire extinguishers will be available during the start-up activities.

4. A contingency plan will be prepared for spills, “fire” conditions, and personnel

injury. These plans will be distributed during a pre-start-up meeting to the start-up participants.

5. All personnel involved with start-up will meet every morning of start-up to

discuss the day’s planned activities. Everyone involved must understand the procedures, their individual responsibilities, and the appropriate safety procedures associated with their responsibilities.

6. Concurrent activities will be kept at an absolute minimum to maximize safety and

minimize confusion.

7. Fuel will only be moved during daylight hours.

8. Either emergency shower/eye wash units or fresh water wash-down hoses will be made available for start-up participants.

9. Achieve the packing of all lines by venting with grounded vent hoses connected

to vents and the open end of the hoses in suitable containers provided with ground connections, to prevent the accidental spillage of fuel when packing lines and an accidental static discharge. Vent hose ends must be secured throughout vent operations.

Equipment

1. Mechanical and electrical subcontractors will make available all mechanical and electrical tools necessary for leak repair, equipment change-outs, possible wiring changes, and weld repairs.

2. Mechanical subcontractor will provide drain pans for equipment change-outs and

miscellaneous leaks as well as fuel absorbent materials to assist with cleanup in the event of any minor spills.

3. Mechanical subcontractor will make available a digital temperature indicator,

quick disconnect pressure gauge, stethoscope, and miscellaneous hand tools for equipment adjustments.

4. A vac-truck shall be available on-site through start-up activities for collecting

sump fuel and fuel collected from vent and packing piping. Fuel collected with

Page 4 of 5

the vac-truck shall be discharged to the sump separator or directly to the wastewater tank.

5. Spill kits including 55-gallon drums, drip pans, and jet fuel absorbent material

shall be available onsite during all start-up activities. Pre-Start-Up Activities Scope Pre-start-up activities include preparatory tasks which must be accomplished prior to checkout/initial operations of controls and equipment. Schedule All pre-start-up activities shall be complete prior to commissioning. Specific Tasks Refer to the “Pre-Start-Up Activities Checklist” in Attachment A. Refer to the “Instrument Index” in Attachment C, for list of instruments that require conformance testing to confirm proper operation prior to Start-Up. Refer to the “Pre-Start-Up Valve Lineup” in Attachment D, for initial valve lineup prior to the all Start-Up activities discussed in the next section. Start-Up Activities Scope Start-up activities include the initial filling of the piping and tanks, and operation of the fuel transfer pump. CQC personnel shall be on site to oversee work required during start-up. Standard Procedures The following standard procedures will be practiced throughout the start-up activities:

1. Fuel will not be introduced into any equipment or piping segments prior to: Verifying proper grounding of system. Stripping low points of water. Verifying valve positions. Positioning personnel with radio communications to monitor for leaks.

2. Fuel will not be moved by pumping:

After dark. Until flow path is vented with air. Until valve positions are verified. Until personnel with radio communications are stationed at monitoring points. Until all emergency shutdown stations are verified working.

Page 5 of 5

3. Filling and packing of lines will be done by gravity where possible. 4. Fuel velocity during initial fill will be limited to three feet per second at tank

nozzles. 5. Leaks beyond nuisance drip leaks will be repaired as soon as possible. Drip leaks

will be contained in drip pans and repaired at convenient shutdowns.

Specific Tasks 1. Refer to the “Start-Up Activities Tasks” in Attachment B.

* * * * *

IAD FSTF Pre-Start-Up Tasks - Attachment AActvities Completed prior to ??/??/12

Description

1.0 Verify Completion of Construction Punchlist

Burns & McDonnell to complete site visit, review, and approve punch list work.

2.0 Verify Completion of Instrument Index

Refer to Attachment D instruments to be installed and tested. Verification to include both checking point-to-point contol and singal loops to ensure integrity and proper connection and also performing functionality testing for all

3.0 Check Flange Bolt Torques Refer to gasket manufacturer's written instructions.4.0 Valve Motor Actuators Set valve motor operator limit switches and torque switches - refer to valve and actuator manufacturers' written

instructions.5.0 Threaded Connections Confirm that all threaded connections, plugs, and caps are tight. Provide all threaded connections with specified

pipe dope.6.0 NDE and Documentation Complete and submit all Non Destructive Evaluation (NDE) testing documentation required by ASME B31.4 and

49 CFR 195 to MWAA and Burns & McDonnell. 7.0 Check Continuity of Power and

Control CircuitsConfirm continuity and verify no short circuits in power and controls circuits.

8.0 Loop Test Control Circuits See Instrument Index (Attachment C) for project instruments. Check electrical power and control circuits for the entire project for continuity and consistancy with design and specifications.

9.0 Pre-Start-Up Valve Positions Maintain all valves in closed position with exception of thermal relief piping. Lock-out/Tag-out the double block and blead valves at conncetion to Colonial facility and pipeline, along with the isolatoin valves on the TRV piping

10.0 Dry Test Tank High and High-High Level Alarms

Test all tank level switches for proper operation.

11.0 Verify Operation of EFSO (Emergency Fuel Shut-Off) Stations

Test EFSO system to confirm proper operation.

12.0 Verify PLC Operation Test, MOV controls/indication, EFSO control/indication, relief line indication. See Instrument Index (Attachment C). Verify overall PLC operation. Test all alarms (high-level and high-high level) and verify all measured values

13.0 Lubricate and Operate Valves Lubricate and operate valves through full range of operation.

14.0 Confirm Grounding Measure resistance on equipment grounding conductors and equipment grounding connections (pump motor and light poles).

Initial OffTask No. Task Title GC A/E MWAA

3/15/2012 1 of 5

IAD FSTF Start-Up Tasks - Attachment BStart-up Start Date: ??/??/12

Description

1.1 Lock-out/Tag-out (LOTO) LOTO to remain until system or portion of system undergoes start-up.

2.1 Place Drain PansPlace drain pan under flanges and connections not hydrostatically tested before filling and packing the lines.

3.1 Thermal Relief Isolation Valves Confirm that all thermal relief valves are open.

4.1 Align Transfer PumpAlign transfer pump in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, before makeup of piping to pump and after grouting pump.

5.1Sump all Low Point Drain, Vent Piping

Sump low point drains and vent piping again.

Initial OffTask No. Task Title Date

Complete GC A/E MWAA

3/15/2012 2 of 5

IAD FSTF Instrument IndexAttachment C

??/??/12

Service Equipment Description I/O Type P&ID# PlanDwg Alarm Mounted Wired Rung Out Local PLC HMITank Fill Manifold

MOV22 Actuator Controls Tank 22 Fill Valve Open/Close Command DO M-2 E-2, E-3 -MOV22 Actuator Controls Tank 22 Fill Valve Valve Open/Close Status DI M-2 E-2, E-3 -MOV23 Actuator Controls Tank 23 Fill Valve Open/Close Command DO M-2 E-2, E-3 -MOV23 Actuator Controls Tank 23 Fill Valve Valve Open/Close Status DI M-2 E-2, E-3 -MOV24 Actuator Controls Tank 24 Fill Valve Open/Close Command DO M-2 E-2, E-3 -MOV24 Actuator Controls Tank 24 Fill Valve Valve Open/Close Status DI M-2 E-2, E-3 -

Sump SeparatorHS-Local Pump Controls Hand Switch Sump Separator Start/Stop N/A M-3 E-2, E-3 -

Tank 22LSH22 Product Level Level Switch High Tank High Level Switch DO M-3A E-2 LAHLSHH22 Product Level Level Switch High-High Tank High-High Level Switch DI M-3A E-2 LAHH

Tank 23LSH23 Product Level Level Switch High Tank High Level Switch DO M-3 E-2 LAHLSHH23 Product Level Level Switch High-High Tank High-High Level Switch DI M-3 E-2 LAHH

Tank 24LSH24 Product Level Level Switch High Tank High Level Switch DO M-3 E-2 LAHLSHH24 Product Level Level Switch High-High Tank High-High Level Switch DI M-3 E-2 LAHH

PLCHORN Alarm Alarm Horn ESD/High-High Level Alarm DO N/A E-3 -ESD Emergency Shutdown Software ESD Alarm Indication/Software Annunciation N/A N/A E-3 -CHRT RCDR Discharg Pressure Chart Recorder Outbound Pressure Chart Recorder AO M-3 N/A -

Tagname

Page 1 of 1

IAD FSTF Pre-Start-Up Valve Lineup - Attachment DStart-up Start Date:??/??/12

Valve Position & Notes

1.2 V-001; DBB 10" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out

2.2Thermal Relief Ball Valves across V-

0011/2" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out

3.2 V-002; Gate Valve 8" Open


0021/2" Locked-Open

5.2 V-003; Gate Valve 6" Locked-Open

6.2 hermal Relief Ball Valves across V-00 1/2" Locked-Open

7.2 V-004; DBB 10" Closed


0031/2" Locked-Open

9.2V-005, V-007, V-009, V-011, & V-

013; MOV-DBBs10" Closed

10.2V-006, V-008, V-010, V-012, & V-

014; Gate Valves6" Closed

11.2Thermal Relief Ball Valves across V-005, V-007, V-009, V-011, & V-013

1/2" Locked-Open

12.2 V-015; DBB 10" Closed


0151/2" Locked-Open

14.2 V-016; DBB 14" Closed


0161/2" Locked-Open


17.2 V-018; Ball Valve 2" Closed

18.2Thermal Relief Ball Valves across

12" Check Valve on Suction Line of Tank 24+B45

1/2" Locked-Open

Initial OffTask No. Valve No. or Description Date

Positioned GC A/EValve Size

3/15/2012 3 of 5


Valve Position & NotesInitial OffTask

No. Valve No. or Description Date Positioned GC A/EValve Size

19.2 V-019; DBB 10" Closed


0191/2" Locked-Open

21.2 V-020; DBB 12" Closed


0201/2" Locked-Open



25.2 V-023; DBB 10" Closed


0231/2" Locked-Open

27.2 V-024; DBB 14" Closed


0241/2" Locked-Open



31.2V-027, V-028, V-029, V-030, & V-

031; Ball Valves2" Closed

32.2Thermal Relief Ball Valves from 2" Water Draw-off Lines to Tank 24

2" Locked-Open

33.2V-032, V-033, V-034, & V-035; Ball

Valves1" Closed


35.2 V-036; DBB 10" Closed

36.2 V-050; Gate Valve 6" Closed

37.2 V-037; DBB 10" Closed

3/15/2012 4 of 5


Valve Position & NotesInitial OffTask

No. Valve No. or Description Date Positioned GC A/EValve Size

38.2 V-047; DBB 10" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out


0471/2" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out

40.2 V-048; Gate Valve 6" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out

41.2 V-049; Gate Valve 6" Closed, Lock-out/Tag-out

42.2 V-038; DBB 10" Closed


0381/2" Locked-Open

44.2 V-039; DBB 10" Closed


0391/2" Locked-Open

46.2 V-040; DBB 14" Closed


0401/2" Locked-Open



50.2 V-043; DBB 14" Closed


0431/2" Locked-Open



54.2Thermal Relief Ball Valves across

12" Check Valve on Suction Line of Tank 22 & 23

1/2" Locked-Open

3/15/2012 5 of 5


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final payment.

3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing the submission of Project Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submittal of items required before final payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contract CPM Schedule. d. List of products.



e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer at earliest possible date, but no later than 21 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

a. On projects requiring cost-loaded CPM Schedules, the accepted cost loading will satisfy the requirements for the Schedule of Values.

3. Sub schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of COTR. c. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. The Authority’s Project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent of the Contract Price:

a. Testing and commissioning activities. b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. c. Punch list activities. d. Project Record Documents. e. Bonds and warranties. f. Demonstration and training.



4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. At COTR’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract Price.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by the Authority.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule monthly update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between the Authority and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by COTR, for Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Authority will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of construction period covered by application.



E. Transmittal: Submit one original and four copies of Application for Payment to the address indicated in the Section VII - Contract Provision, paragraph 04.B, each one signed and notarized. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to Contracting Officer.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. The Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the Authority.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of pre-construction conference. 11. Performance and payment bonds. 12. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 13. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 14. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE").

H. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following:

1. Subcontractor Payment Form. 2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being

requested. 4. Update of Contract Record Documents.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.



2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable.

3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when the Authority took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings.

a. Pre-award conference. b. Pre-construction conference. c. Pre-installation conference. d. Progress meetings. e. Partnering meetings.


1. Division 01 Section: "Execution" for the coordination of general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned



that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in nature, as with most Electrical and Mechanical Drawings, Contractor shall have sole responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of this Section.

4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Protection of existing and new work.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the Authority's property.

E. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Before start of the Work, prepare Coordination Drawings for areas with limited space availability that necessitate maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, and areas requiring coordination for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements. Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor



dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the Contract.

3. Indicate required installation sequences. 4. Comply with requirements contained in Division 01 Section "Submittals." 5. Prepare coordination drawings of involved trades in a scale of not less than 1/4 inch = 1

foot or larger for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Any Work installed prior to review of coordination drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk and subsequent relocation require to avoid interference shall be made at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited to Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager, Safety Engineer, Quality Control Manager, Project Scheduler, Soil Excavation Engineers, and other personnel in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Contract Name 2. Contract Number 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Resident Engineer 6. Name of Task Manager 7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.



a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 2. RFI must be signed and scanned for electronic transmission. 3. Hard-Copy RFI shall follow Software-Generated RFI for the record.

D. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven calendar days for COTR's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's time for response will start again.

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name of COTR. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date COTR’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.



1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Pre-award Conference:

1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, a pre-award conference with Contractor may be held before actual award of the Contract. The meeting will review Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting.

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. c. Qualifications of key individuals. d. Quality-control experience. e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. h. Financial standing of Contractor. i. Mobilization plan. j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical

constraints associated with work at the Airport. k. Equipment and manpower availability. l. Cost and pricing data.

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be construed as binding to the Contract.

B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. General: COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and



other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Airport security. b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. d. Airport Operations coordination. e. Preliminary construction schedule. f. Phasing. g. Critical work sequencing. h. Designation of key personnel. i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Authority Construction guidelines. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. Safety procedures. u. Quality-control requirements. v. First aid. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. y. Authority Building Code requirements/permits.

4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due at the pre-construction conference.

C. Pre-installation Conferences:

1. General: COTR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: Contractor, Installer, and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have proceeded, or will follow.

3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Contract Modifications. d. Purchases.



e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations and permits. s. Safety. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection of construction and personnel. x. Review material selection. y. Fabrication and installation procedures. z. Coordination of involved trades.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Authority and COTR, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Authority, COTR, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for demonstration and training. f. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. h. Submittal procedures. i. The Authority's partial occupancy requirements.



j. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Weekly Progress Meetings:

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings weekly at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within allowable time frames.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of the Authority and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Safety and Security. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Sequence of operations. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Storage Areas 9) Access. 10) Site utilization. 11) Requests for information. 12) Submittals. 13) Noncompliance notices. 14) Temporary facilities and controls. 15) Work hours. 16) Resource allocation. 17) Hazards and risks. 18) Progress cleaning. 19) Quality and work standards.



20) Contract Modifications. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 22) Preparation of Record Documents.

4. Submit at the weekly progress meeting, a two-week look-ahead schedule. This schedule shall include a three-week period, one week showing actual progress from the previous week and two weeks showing planned work for the two weeks after the meeting date. Include in the schedule all activities in sufficient detail as approved by COTR. A two-week look-ahead schedule form will be distributed at the pre-construction conference. Submit a list of subcontractors identifying dates of when subcontractors will be on-site or off-site. A form for this information will be provided by COTR.

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Schedule Update Meetings:

1. Conduct schedule update meetings before submittal of Contractor's Application for Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. Ensure the incorporation of all changes made to the sequence of work and all change notices issued by the Contracting Officer. Submit the narrative and information specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable.

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project manager or superintendent, the Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and the Authority's representative.

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for Payment.

4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for various CPM schedules and reports required for proper performance of the Work.

B. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement and update the schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are part of this Contract.

C. Schedules required include the following:

1. Contract Construction Progress Schedule in CPM format and related narrative and cash flow projection curves.

2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Schedule of Tests and Inspections.

D. Reports required include the following:

1. Daily Construction Reports. .

2. Field Correction Reports. 3. Special Reports. 4. Monthly Progress Reports. 5. Contractor Quality Control Reports.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Project meeting

minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for test and inspection reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for Product List.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a Project plan and schedule. Each activity has defined geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity codes, and dollar value.



B. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines the construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies.

C. Contract CPM Schedule: A cost-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire Contract Duration from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the Work.

D. Contract Duration/Time: The total time, in calendar days identified in Section III, "Schedule," representing the duration necessary for completion of all physical and administrative requirements under this Contract and any authorized extension thereof.

E. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a CPM network that impacts the completion of the Project.

F. Excusable Delay: An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers.

G. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

H. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

I. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

J. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without delaying the end of Project.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

1.4 PLANNING

A. The total Contract Duration and intermediate milestones if applicable, as indicated in Section III, "Schedule," are the Contract requirements.

B. Contractor shall prepare a practical work plan to complete the Work within the Contract Duration, and complete those portions of work relating to each intermediate milestone date and other Contract requirements. Contractor shall generate a computerized cost-loaded CPM schedule in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) format for the Work.

C. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR approval of the Schedule.

D. Failure of Contractor to comply with requirements of this Section may be considered cause for withholding progress payments or termination for default.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Contractor shall provide all schedule submittals on computer disk media as well as tabular printouts, resource curves and histograms, and 24-by-36-inch time-scaled logic diagrams. The latest version of Primavera P3 or SureTrak scheduling software shall be used. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement, computerize and update the CPM Schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. The number of copies of each submittal shall be as described in this Section or as may be requested by COTR.

B. Contract CPM Schedule: The Contract CPM Schedule and its related narrative as described in this Section shall be submitted along with the projected cash-flow curve as early as practicable after the Notice to Proceed, but in no event later than 30 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Within 15 calendar days, COTR will respond with approval or direction to change and Contractor shall resubmit within 10 calendar days, if required.

C. Daily Progress Report: Submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon on the day following the date of actual progress.

D. Monthly Progress Report: All components of the Monthly Progress Report described in this Section shall be submitted as attachments to Contractor's monthly Application for Payment.

E. Record As-Built CPM Schedule: A Record CPM Schedule accurately reflecting actual progress of Work shall be submitted, as part of this Contract's Record Documents. All activities shall have actual dates that are true and accurate.

F. Qualification Data: For Project Scheduler.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Project Scheduler Qualifications: Minimum of two years experience and not less than one project of similar size and scope, with capability to produce CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of COTR's request. Project Scheduler is classified as one of Contractor's key personnel.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT SCHEDULER

A. Engage a project scheduler, either as Contractor's employee or as Contractor's consultant, to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling, and to prepare required schedules.

1. Project Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.



3.2 CONTRACT CPM SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Requirements: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be a computerized cost-loaded, time-scaled CPM Schedule in PDM format that includes the following:

1. The order, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items including mobilization, demobilization, testing and commissioning, construction, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of critical or special materials and equipment; utility interruption coordination; submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, or other reasonable requirements that may be requested by COTR.

2. Work by the Authority, or utility agencies, and other third parties that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

3. Adequate referencing of all work items to identify subcontractors or other performing parties.

4. Activity Coding may be provided by the COTR to establish minimum requirements for structure and values for the first 5 code fields.

5. Activity durations not in excess of 14 calendar days, except nonconstruction activities such as procurement and fabrication. Activities shall be broken down in the level of detail prescribed by COTR.

6. Activities that are cost loaded to show the direct costs required to perform the Work, including work by subcontractors.

7. A narrative that explains the basis for Contractor's determination of construction logic, estimated durations, cost allocations, estimated quantities and production rates, hours per shift, workdays per week, and types, numbers, and capacities of major construction equipment to be used. A listing of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule shall be provided.

B. Critical Path Activities: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be prepared to include the data for the total Contract and the critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim completion dates. Scheduled start or completion dates imposed on the schedule by Contractor shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Milestone dates shall be the scheduled dates specified in Section III, "Schedule," if applicable, and shall be prominently identified. The Contract CPM Schedule shall accurately show all as-built activities completed from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed up to the submittal of this schedule.

C. Assignment of Costs to Activities for Progress Payments:

1. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the Contract CPM Schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with COTR's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be assigned to testing and commissioning activities, O&M manuals, punchlist activities, and Project Record Documents.

2. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by COTR. 3. The total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Price. 4. Activities shall be cost coded as directed by COTR.

D. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit five copies of each of the following components of the Contract CPM Schedule:

1. A time-scaled plot of the schedule network in PDM format showing logic ties for all activities including submittals and procurement activities.



2. Computer-generated CPM Schedule Reports that contain the following data for each work item: activity identification number, description, resource loading, duration, early start and early finish calendar dates, late start and late finish calendar dates, and total float in calendar days. The reports shall also show the logic ties of successor and predecessor work items. The reports shall be sorted as follows, or other sorts as required by COTR:

a. By activity identification. b. By total float x early start. c. By early start x early finish x total float.

3. The narrative described in Subparagraph 3.2-A-6 above. 4. A cash-flow report showing monthly expenditures projected over the life of the Contract.

A cumulative cash-flow curve based on early and late schedule events shall also be submitted. These reports shall be derived from the Contract CPM Schedule.

3.3 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site, coordinate with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," and submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon of the day following day of actual progress:

1. List of subcontractors (by trade group) at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel (by trade group) at the site. 4. Equipment (by trade group) at the site. 5. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 6. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change Notices/Directives and Contract Modifications received, implemented. 14. Services connected, disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions, occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. 18. Material deliveries.

3.4 MATERIAL LOCATION REPORTS

A. At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of list to COTR at weekly intervals.



3.5 FIELD CORRECTION REPORT

A. When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from the Contract Documents arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed. Submit a copy to COTR immediately.

3.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise COTR in advance when such events are known or predictable.

1. Include tabular CPM reports, time-scaled logic diagrams, resource curves and histograms, and narratives as requested by COTR.

B. Submit special reports directly to COTR within seven calendar days of an occurrence. Submit a copy to other parties affected by the occurrence.

3.7 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTING

A. General: Approval of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update.

B. Monthly Schedule Update Meetings: Monthly schedule updates shall be the product of joint review meetings between Contractor, COTR, and major active subcontractors. The joint review shall focus on actual progress for the preceding month, planned progress for the upcoming month supported by a Contractor-prepared Four-Week Look-Ahead Schedule, impact to schedule if any due to change notices issued, adverse weather, and any effected changes to the Construction CPM Schedule. The agreed on progress, and changes, if any, shall be incorporated into the schedule update to be submitted. The update shall always represent the actual history of accomplishment of all activities, and will form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. Contractor's delay claims shall be presented for discussion and, when possible, resolution.

C. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit two copies in electronic format of the updated CPM schedule and five copies of each of the following components of the Monthly Progress Report:

1. A monthly progress narrative, the content of which shall be prescribed by COTR, but shall include as a minimum a description of overall progress for the preceding month, a critical path analysis, a discussion of problems encountered and proposed solution thereof, delays experienced and proposed recovery measures, a monthly reconciliation of weather impact, the status and impact of contract modifications, documentation of any logic changes, and any other changes made to the schedule since the previous monthly update.



2. CPM schedule reports listing completed activities, activities in progress, and remaining activities in the format requested by COTR. For each activity, Contractor shall provide those details identified in Subparagraph 3.2-D-2.

3. Monthly and cumulative cash-flow curves that show actual vs. planned cash-flow status. 4. Documentation of delivered material in the form of paid invoices or other evidence that

Contractor has clear title for the material delivered.

D. If critical activities of the schedule are delayed and such delay is not excusable as defined in this Section, the remaining sequence of activities and/or duration thereof shall be adjusted by Contractor through such measures as additional manpower, additional shifts, or the implementation of concurrent operations until the schedule produced indicates Work will be completed on schedule. Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract, all costs incurred by Contractor to recover from inexcusable delays shall be borne by Contractor.

E. The monthly schedule update shall form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. The progress payment for an activity shall be based on its agreed on percentage of completion. On unit-priced contracts, the approval of Contractor's monthly requisition is contingent on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update; however, the basis of payment will be the actual measurement of COTR-accepted, in-place units of work.

3.8 DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

A. The determination for an extension of the Contract Time will be made by the Contracting Officer according to the Contract Provision "Default."

B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in activities, irrespective of the party causing the delay, which according to the computer mathematical analysis do not affect any critical activity or milestone dates on the CPM network at the time of the delay, shall not become the basis for an extension of the Contract Time. The only basis for any extension of time will be the demonstrated impact of an excusable delay on the critical path. In demonstrating such impact, Contractor shall provide adequate detail as required by the Contract, and Contractor shall prove that:

1. An event occurred. 2. Contractor was not responsible for the event in that the event was beyond the control of

Contractor, and was without fault or negligence of Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, and the event was unforeseeable.

3. The event was the type for which an excuse is granted according to the "Default" provision of this Contract.

4. Activities on the critical path of the Work were delayed. 5. The event in fact caused the delay of the Work. 6. The requested additional time is an appropriate and reasonable extension of the Contract

Time, given the actual delay encountered.

C. Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather:

1. If unusually severe weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably



anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities of the scheduled construction.

2. The schedule of anticipated adverse weather below will constitute the base line for monthly (or a prorated portion thereof) weather/time evaluation by the Contracting Officer. On issuance of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days will be recorded by Contractor on a calendar day basis (include weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather days set forth below.

a. For purposes of this clause, the term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days that can be demonstrated to have been impacted by adverse weather.

b. Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Days:

1) January - 7. 2) February - 5. 3) March - 6. 4) April - 6. 5) May - 8. 6) June - 6. 7) July - 6. 8) August - 7. 9) September - 5. 10) October - 5. 11) November - 5. 12) December - 6.

c. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for time extension based on adverse weather unless the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather days, and unless such adverse weather days prevent work for 50 percent or more of Contractor's workday. In preparing the Contract Schedule, Contractor shall reflect the above anticipated adverse weather days on all weather-dependent activities. Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to Contractor.

3. On days where adverse weather is encountered, Contractor shall list all critical activities under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather day to COTR or its authorized representative for its review and approval.

4. If Contractor is found eligible for an extension of the Contract Time, the Contracting Officer will issue a modification extending the time for Contract completion. The extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis.

D. Required Submittals:

1. Provide time-impact analysis that illustrates impact during update period in which event occurred, that event has been mitigated to greatest possible extent, and that event still impacts overall completion of Project.

2. Include with request, two copies of submittal of impacted schedule, in electronic format, and photocopies of all relevant documents that support the claim.



3. Submit all required items within the following time periods:

a. 10 calendar days of event occurrence. b. 10 calendar days of Contractor's knowledge of impact. c. 14 calendar days of written request by COTR.

4. Expiration of time periods without submittal shall constitute forfeiture of rights for these specific impacts.

3.9 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. After all Contract work items are complete, and as a condition of final payment, Contractor shall submit three copies of a Record, As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. These schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final Completion construction photographs.

.


1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for submitting construction photographs. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting photographic negatives as Project

Record Documents at Project closeout. 4. Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training” for submitting videotapes of

demonstration of equipment and training of Authority’s personnel. 5. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before

demolition operations commence. 6. Division 02 Section “Selective Structure Demolition” for photographic documentation

before selective demolition operations commence.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Basis for Proposals: Base number of construction photographs on twenty photographs per month over the duration of Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site including a detailed description of each project area with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate



elevation or story of construction. Include the same label information as the corresponding set of photographs.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit four prints of each photographic view within five days of taking photographs.

1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper mounted on card stock to allow a 1-inch-wide margin and enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide a computer generated applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

3. Negatives: Submit a complete set of photographic negatives in protective envelopes with each submittal of prints. Identify date photographs were taken.


A. Photographer Qualifications:

1. Photographer: Individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as a professional construction photographer for not less than three years.

2. Videographer: Individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as a professional construction videographer for not less than three years.

B. Costs: Include photographer's services in the Contract Price.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer. Provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lighted photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.7 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to the Authority for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.



1.8 EXTRA PRINTS

A. Extra Prints: If requested by COTR, photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs. Contractor will not be responsible for the cost of such additional prints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Photographic Film: Manual Single Lens Reflex camera using 35 mm 100, 200 or 400 ISO color film. Do not use point and shoot cameras. Use lenses with focal length of either 50 mm or 55 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PHOTOGRAPHS, GENERAL

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs.

B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.

C. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of progress photographs in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to COTR.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by COTR.

1. Take a minimum of four photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to the project before starting the Work. Photographs for tank valve rotations shall include conditions of tank, valves and leak monitoring ports at the time of turnover to the Contractor by the Fuel System Operator.

2. Take four photographs each of existing tank valves, pump and equipment pads, and buildings either on or adjoining the project to accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction.

B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 10 color photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. The COTR will select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken.

1. Take photographs of each valve and tank connection point prior to installing rotated valve to indicate cleanliness of tank and installed valve.



2. In addition, over all site photographs shall be taken at least monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.

3. Take photographs of each leak detection monitoring port to be inspected, cleaned and

modified prior to work and upon conclusion of work.

4. Take photographs of the equipment pad prior to, during and at the conclusion of construction.

5. Take photographs of each site where work is to be performed at the hydrant tank farm

prior to, during and at the conclusion of construction.

6. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by COTR and Contractor, photographer shall select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not less than two of the required shots from the same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse sequence as follows:

a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade work for leak detection ports.

b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Commencement of the Work and progress of each valve rotation and valve and

equipment installation. d. Interior and Exterior Work, through date of Substantial Completion.

C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take eight color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. COTR will direct photographer for desired vantage points.

D. Additional Photographs: COTR may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Contract Modification and are not included in the Contract Price.

1. Photographer will be given three days notice, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, photographer shall take additional photographs within 24 hours

of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. COTR's request for special publicity photographs.



SUBMITTALS 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those

Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires COTR's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require COTR's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: COTR will provide electronic copies of CADD electronic files of the drawings for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that requires sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Without change to the Contract Duration, COTR reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Contractor's Responsibilities: Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and submission of all submittals. Submit to COTR all required Submittals. The COTR will forward submittals to the appropriate parties for review.

E. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on COTR’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. COTR will advise Contractor when a submittal processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-protection systems.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals to COTR enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Processing of incomplete or unacceptable submissions by COTR shall not reduce the number of calendar days specified above for COTR's review. Resubmissions shall be treated the same as initial submissions relative to review time.

5. Notations on submittals that increase the Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to COTR's attention before proceeding with the Work.

F. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by COTR and Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor, if applicable. f. Name and address of supplier, if applicable. g. Name of manufacturer, if applicable. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000-001 or 070150.19-001). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another dash (e.g., 061000-001-A or 070150.19-001-A).

i. Alphanumeric project Identifier. Identifier is shown on the Project Drawings cover sheet.



j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Transmittal number. n. Allow 15 calendar days for processing each re-submittal.

G. Resubmissions: Re-submittal procedure shall follow the same procedures and same number as the initial submittal with the following exceptions:

1. Transmittal shall contain the same information as the first transmittal and the submission number shall indicate second, third, etc., submission. The drawing number/description shall be identical to the initial submission and the date shall be the revised date for that submission.

2. No new material shall be included on the same transmittal for a resubmission. 3. COTR rejection shall not warrant a claim by Contractor for additional time or cost.

H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Where significant deviations from the Contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for substitutions.

I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless COTR observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for Operations and Maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to COTR using the approved transmittal form provided by COTR. COTR will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use transmittal forms and follow other submittal procedures according to information provided to Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Bear all costs incurred for such reproduction and distribution. Prints of all reviewed Shop Drawings may be made from transparencies that carry the appropriate review stamps.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “approved” by COTR in connection with construction.

1.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. Submit the log at the preconstruction meeting along with Contractor's construction schedule specified in



Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Organize the submittal log by Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for identification and tracking purposes.

1. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for COTR's review. Include the following information:

a. Title of submittal/description. b. Submittal number (sequential). c. Scheduled date for the first submittal. d. Drawing number, if applicable. e. Applicable Section number. f. Name of subcontractor/vendor. g. Scheduled date of COTR's final release or approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. i. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. j. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. k. Application of testing agency labels and seals. l. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit six copies, in addition to the number of copies to be returned

to Contractor. Provide one additional copy for submittals related to fire-protection system.

6. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.



C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

f. Templates and patterns. g. Schedules. h. Design calculations. i. Compliance with specified standards. j. Notation of coordination requirements. k. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. l. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. m. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 22 by 34 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit one reproducible transparency and two black-line prints of each submittal. Provide one additional black-line print for items related to fire-protection systems. COTR will return the marked up reproducible transparency for Contractor’s distribution.

a. Both the reproducible transparency and the prints shall bear Contractor's approval stamp on each sheet.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings are Shop Drawings prepared by Contractor that detail the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source.



d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the

Authority’s property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. COTR will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise

indicated. COTR will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:



1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

K. Contractor Warranty Letter: Comply with requirements in Contract Provision "Warranty of Construction." Provide the dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service.

L. Special Warranty Letters: Provide dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service for special warranties required in Division 02 through 33 Sections.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. COTR will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.



I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence from a model code organization acceptable to the Authority that product complies with USBC. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but are not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates.



2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement on whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

S. Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of the coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any and term of coverage.

T. Manufacturers' warranties.

U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

V. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to COTR.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to COTR.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to COTR.

1. In checking Shop Drawings and Product Data, verify all dimensions and field conditions and check and coordinate Shop Drawings and Product Data of any Section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the Work.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, which shall include dimensions, clearances, compatibility, and coordination with Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted for other work.

C. If Contractor has not checked the submittals carefully, even though stamped as checked and approved, submittals shall be returned to Contractor for proper checking before further processing or review by COTR regardless of any urgency claimed by Contractor. In such a situation, Contractor will be responsible for any resulting delays to the scheduled Contract completion. Furthermore, Contracting Officer may hold Contractor responsible for increased Authority costs resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements set forth herein.

3.2 COTR’S ACTION

A. General: COTR will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. COTR Responsibilities: The review of Shop Drawings and other submittals by COTR will be for general conformance with the Contract only, and the review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions, quantities, or approval of deviations from the Contract Documents. COTR review shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for accuracy of Shop Drawings nor for the furnishing and installation of materials or equipment according to the Contract requirements.

1. Approval of Shop Drawings or other submittals is not to be interpreted as approval of a substitute material. Approval of substitutions will be accomplished according to requirements set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Action Submittals: COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. COTR will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.



1. Approved: Means fabrication/installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

2. Approved as Corrected: Same as "Approved," providing Contractor complies with corrections noted on submittal. Resubmission required only if Contractor is unable to comply with noted corrections.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Make appropriate revisions and resubmit, limiting corrections to items marked.

4. Rejected: Submittal does not comply with requirements. Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Prepare a new submittal according to requirements and submit without delay.

D. Informational Submittals: COTR will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it, if it does not comply with requirements. COTR will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. DIVISION 01 Section "Submittals" for process required to submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan.

2. DIVISION 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

3. DIVISION 01 "Project Management and Coordination" 4. DIVISION 01 Section "Operation And Maintenance Data" 5. DIVISION 01 Section "Project Closeout" 6. DIVISION 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 7. DIVISIONs 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor to provide and maintain an effective Quality-Control Program that complies with this Section and with requirements of the "Contract Provisions," Section VII, "Inspection of Construction and Final Inspection and Acceptance."

2. Establish a QC Program that consists of the following:

a. QC Organization b. QC Plan c. QC Plan Meeting d. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting e. QC meetings f. Phases of Control g. Submittal review and approval h. Operation & Maintenance data and Warranty receipt verification prior to product

delivery i. Material verification at delivery j. Testing, completion inspections, and QC certifications and documentation

necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.



3. Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (USBC). The Authority’s agent shall provide these Special Inspection services. Special Inspections coordination should be discussed at weekly progress meetings and scheduled dates for Special Inspections carried on the two-week look ahead. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of and notification to the Authority for the following Special Inspections.

a. Special inspections are required for, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1) Steel construction. 2) Concrete construction. 3) Foundation systems including concrete footings of buildings three stories or

less in height which are fully supported on earth or rock. 4) Prepared fill requirements.

4. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that require those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

5. Schedule of Values: Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM and establish a Schedule of Values for all quality test and inspection activities; and all required reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by-Section basis. Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for CQC activities and QCM position(s) required by the General Conditions. CQC activities shall be reported per DIVISION 01 Section "Applications for Payment."

6. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

7. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

8. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by the Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM C 1077 - Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation latest edition.

b. ASTM D 3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction latest edition.

c. ASTM E 329 - Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction latest edition. ASTM E 543 Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

d. ASTM E 543 - Agencies performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.



2. Metropolitan Washington Airport Authority:

a. Construction Safety Manual, most current edition

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality: Conformance to the requirements established by the contract specifications and drawings.

B. Control: To guide and have influence over.

C. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The construction contractor’s system to manage, control, and document their own, their supplier’s, and their subcontractor’s activities to comply with the contract requirements.

D. Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). Primary on-site representative of the Contracting Officer for technical matters. Duties and responsibilities of the COTR will be transmitted to the contractor via letter from the Contracting Officer.

E. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed by the Authority before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirement. Additionally, the Authority fulfills its responsibility to be certain that the CQC is functioning and the specified end product is achieved.

F. Definable Feature of Work: A definable feature of work (DFOW) is a task, which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has the same control requirements and work crews.

G. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 10 projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Specific experience requirements enumerated in these Specifications supersede this requirement.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the COTR for a decision before proceeding. This paragraph refers to industry and government standards. In case of a difference between drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall govern.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with DIVISION 01 Section, "Submittals."

1. Action Submittals.



a. Quality Control (QC) Plan.

B. NOTE: Coordinate the submittal requirement dates with the submittal dates in DIVISION 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation".

C. Submit a QC plan within 20 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. The QC Plan shall include a preliminary submittal of the list of definable features of work that shall cover the first 90 calendar days of construction.

1. Submit at this time résumés of key personnel to be assigned to this contract and the limits of their authority. Show how this project management structure fits into the Contractor’s corporate management structure.

D. Any approval by the COTR of the QC Plan shall be treated as "accepted, predicated upon successful implementation." Stop work if the QC Plan becomes disapproved. The exception is the work authorized in the paragraph entitled "Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval," shall stop.

1.7 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

A. Provide a sample copy set of report forms to the Contracting Officer during the Pre-Construction Conference. The report forms shall consist of the Quality Control Daily Report, Preparatory Phase Report, Initial Phase Report, and Project Quality Control Monthly Summary. These forms may be edited to support the project. Other reports referenced below may be in formats customarily used by the Contractor, Testing Laboratories, etc. and shall contain the information required by this Specification.

B. Deliver the following listed items to the COTR at the times specified:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed.

2. Superintendent’s Daily Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

3. Material Receiving Inspection Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

4. Preparatory Phase Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

5. Initial Phase Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

6. Field Test Reports: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, within 2 working days after the test is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

7. Monthly Summary Report of Tests: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

8. Project Quality Control Monthly Summary Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

9. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: one copy, submitted daily within 1 day of the inspection.

10. Testing Plan and Log: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, submitted within 2 working days of the end of the month.



11. Deficiency List: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, submitted to the COTR weekly. 12. Monthly Deficiency Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy within two working days

of the end of the month. 13. QC Meeting Minutes: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, within 2 working days after the

meeting. 14. QC Certifications: As required by paragraph entitled "QC Certifications."

1.8 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish and maintain a QC Program as described in this Section. The QC Program consists of but is not limited to the following:

1. QC Organization. 2. QC Plan. 3. QC Plan Meeting. 4. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting 5. QC meetings. 6. Phases of Control. 7. Submittal review and approval. 8. Operations and Maintenance data. 9. Warranty receipt verification prior to product delivery. 10. Material verification at delivery. 11. Testing. 12. Completion inspections. 13. QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment,

workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

14. The QC Program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence.

15. No work or testing may be performed unless the QCM or a pre-approved alternate is on the work site.

16. The QCM shall report to an officer of the firm and shall not be subordinate to the Project Superintendent or the Project Manager.

17. Quality Control Manager is the primary individual responsible for quality control. The QCM, Project Superintendent and Project Manager shall be responsible for the quality of work on the job. Project Superintendent shall be held responsible for the quality of production.

B. Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval

1. The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.

C. Approval

1. Approval of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of any construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC Plan and operations as necessary, including but not limited to removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications. All QC organization personnel



shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the contract.

D. Notification of Changes

1. Notify the COTR, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

1.9 QC ORGANIZATION

A. Staffing Levels: Provide sufficient qualified quality-control personnel to monitor each work activity at all times. Scheduling and coordinating of all inspections and testing shall match the type and pace of work activity.

1. In cases where multiple trades, disciplines, or subcontractors are on site at same time, each activity shall be tested and inspected by personnel skilled in that portion of the work.

2. In cases where multiple shifts are employed, the quality-control staff shall be increased as required to monitor the work on each shift.

B. The following positions are key personnel as defined by the Authority in this and other DIVISION 01 Specification Sections.

1. Project Manager

a. To enhance the effectiveness of the Quality Control Organization Project Manager shall be intimately involved in Quality Control. To this end, the Project manager shall have successfully completed the Army Corps of Engineers/NAVFAC Contractor Quality Control Course (details in Paragraph "Construction Quality Management Training" below).

2. Quality Control Manager (QCM)

a. Duties

1) Provide a QCM at the work site to implement and manage the QC Program. The only duties and responsibilities of the QCM are to manage and implement the QC Program on this contract. The QCM shall not be designated as the safety competent person as defined by Construction Safety manual. The QCM is required to attend the QC Plan Meeting, attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the Phases Control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and documentation required in this contract. The QCM is responsible for managing and coordinating the Phases Control and documentation performed by Testing Laboratory personnel and any other inspection and testing personnel required by this Contract.



b. Qualifications 1) A graduate of a four year ABET accredited college program in one of the

following disciplines: Engineering, Construction Management with a minimum of 10 years experience as a superintendent, QCM, project manager, project engineer or construction manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual shall be familiar with the requirements of the Authority Construction Safety Manual, and have experience in the areas of hazard identification and safety compliance. The QCM shall be interviewed and approved by COTR.

c. Construction Quality Management Training

1) In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QCM shall have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management for Contractors." If the QCM does not have a current certification, they shall obtain the CQM course certification within 60 - calendar days of award. This short course is periodically offered in alternate months by: (1) the Maryland Chapter, Associated General Contractors (AGC), 410-321-7870; [email protected] and by (2) the Virginia Chapter, Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC), 703-968-6205, [email protected]; [email protected]. The training uses Army Corps of Engineers course content. The course is facilitated by instructors from Army Corps of Engineers, North Atlantic Division, Baltimore District, and by instructors from the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Engineering Field Activity Chesapeake.

3. Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications

a. Designate an alternate for the QCM at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QCM's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year. The qualification requirements for the Alternate QCM shall be the same as for the QCM.

4. Project Engineer/Scheduler

a. Qualifications: Refer to DIVISION 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation".

1.10 QC PLAN MEETING

A. Within 10 calendar days of notice of award and prior to submission of the QC plan, meet with the COTR to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract. The purpose of this meeting is to communicate expectations and facilitate understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission.



1.11 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN

A. Provide, for approval by the COTR, a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes but may not necessarily be limited to the following:

B. A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order:

1. QC ORGANIZATION 2. PERSONNEL MATRIX 3. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS 4. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL 5. APPOINTMENT LETTERS 6. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS INCLUDING BOCA INSPECTION COMPANIES 7. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION AND CERTIFICATIONS 8. TESTING PLAN AND LOG 9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER 10. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES 11. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE PHASES OF CONTROL 12. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 13. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES 14. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS 15. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION 16. FORMS 17. ATTACHMENTS

C. A chart showing the QC organizational structure.

D. A personnel matrix showing for each Section of the Specification who shall review and approve submittals, who shall perform and document the Phases Control, and who shall perform and document the testing.

E. Names and qualifications, in résumé format, for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM course certifications for the QCM and Alternate QCM as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality Management Training" and "Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications".

F. Duties, responsibilities and authority of each person in the QC organization.

G. Letters signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QCM and Alternate QCM and stating that they are responsible for implementing and managing the QC Program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the responsibility of the QCM and Alternate QCM to implement and manage the three phases of quality control, and their authority to stop work that is not in compliance with the contract.

H. A listing of outside organizations such as, architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide.

I. Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation Requirements" or "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.



J. A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required, referenced by the Specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, the desired results and the person responsible for each test and shall be identified as a scheduled (CPM) activity.

K. Procedures for reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval. Provide the initial submittal of the Submittal Register as specified in Section entitled "Submittals."

L. List of definable features of work. The list shall be cross-referenced to the contractor's Construction Schedule and the specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all critical path activities. Include a chart of common deficiencies for the Definable Feature of work. Detail the control procedures that shall be employed to eliminate this common deficiency.

M. Procedures for Performing the Phases of Control. The contractor shall develop a plan for incorporating each of the control phases into the work. The plan shall detail who shall be responsible for scheduling the phases, conducting the phase as well as documenting the phase. The use of project specific forms may be helpful. However, the entire plans and specifications establish the quality and not just the checklists. The Preparatory and Initial Phases and meetings shall be conducted with a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.

N. Include all activities for which this Specification requires Specialty Inspection Personnel, and for any specific definable features of work as identified in the QC Plan.

O. Documentation procedures, including proposed report formats.

P. Procedures to identify, record, track and complete rework items.

Q. Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion Inspection process. Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection, pre-final inspection, and final acceptance inspection.

R. A complete set of report forms to be utilized on this project.

S. All applicable subcontractors and suppliers Quality Control Plans complete with Contactor’s CQC planned involvement.

1.12 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING

A. After submission of the QC Plan, and prior to the start of any physical construction, meet with the COTR to present the QC Program required by this Contract. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details, including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site work, and the coordination of the Contractor's management, production and QC personnel. At the meeting, the Contractor shall be required to explain in detail how Phases Control shall be implemented for each definable feature of work. As a minimum, the Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include an officer of the firm, the project



manager, project superintendent, QCM, Alternate QCM and subcontractor representatives. Each subcontractor who shall be assigned QC responsibilities shall have a principal of the firm at the meeting. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QCM and signed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the signed minutes to all attendees.

1.13 QC MEETINGS

A. After the start of construction, the QCM shall conduct QC meetings weekly at the work site with the project superintendent. The QCM shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the COTR within 2 working days after the meeting. The COTR may attend these meetings. The QCM shall notify the COTR at least 48 hours in advance of each meeting. These meetings shall be scheduled to precede or follow the regular weekly progress meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be accomplished at each meeting:

1. Review the minutes of the previous meeting

2. Review the schedule and the status of work:

a. Work or testing accomplished since last meeting b. Rework items identified since last meeting c. Rework items completed since last meeting;

3. Review the status of submittals, O & M data and Warranty Manuals:

a. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties reviewed and approved since last meeting b. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties required in the near future;

4. Review the work to be accomplished in the next 2week(s) and documentation required:

a. Establish completion dates for rework items b. Update the schedule showing planned and actual dates of the preparatory, initial

and follow-up phases, including testing and any other inspection required by this contract

c. Discuss construction methods and the approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work

d. Discuss status of off-site work or testing e. Documentation required; f. Discuss upcoming Activity Hazard Analyses.

5. Resolve QC and production problems, assist in resolving Request for Information issues; 6. Address items that may require revising the QC plan:

a. Changes in QC organization personnel b. Changes in procedures.

7. Review health and safety plan



1.14 PHASES OF CONTROL

A. The Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable feature of work.

B. Material Receiving Inspection: Contractor shall establish a formal material receiving inspection program to verify material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications.

C. Preparatory Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each preparatory phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the QCM and attended by the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Preparatory Phase Report. As a minimum the following should be covered prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work:

1. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections. 2. Review the project drawings. 3. Verify that appropriate shop drawings, O & M data, Warranties, and submittals for

materials and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required.

4. Establish control to be utilized to assure work complies with the contract plans and specifications.

5. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing.

6. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed. 7. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on

hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data. 8. Discuss construction methods, construction tolerances, workmanship standards, and the

approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.

9. Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.

D. Initial Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work, conduct the initial phase with the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work. Observe the initial segment of the definable feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Initial Phase Report. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met. As a minimum the following should be covered for each definable feature of work:

1. Ensure controls established during Preparatory Phase are adequate to allow work to proceed in compliance with the plans and specifications.

2. Establish the quality of workmanship required. 3. Resolve conflicts. 4. Ensure that testing is performed. 5. Check work procedures for compliance with the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity

hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.



E. Follow-Up Phase: Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Quality Control Daily Report:

1. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements. 2. Maintain the quality of workmanship required. 3. Ensure that testing is performed. 4. Ensure that rework items are being corrected. 5. Perform safety inspections.

F. Code-Required Inspections:

1. Comply with current edition approved by the Commonwealth of Virginia of the USBC, "Special Inspections" or other agencies having jurisdiction. Special Inspections are to be performed by the Authority’s agent. Perform and document all tests, inspections, notifications to the Authority, coordination with the Authority’s agent and other activities listed in the USBC or other agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Notice to COTR: Notify COTR, in writing, at least 48 hours in advance of all code-required inspections. COTR should be apprised in advance of every preparatory and initial inspection. All preparatory, initial, and follow-up inspections shall be made a matter of record in Contractor's quality-control documentation.

G. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases:

1. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases shall be conducted on the same definable features of work if the quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if work on a definable feature is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop as directed by the COTR in writing.

H. Notification of Phases of Control for Off-Site Work:

1. On determination by COTR that an item shall require surveillance by the Authority at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment, Contractor shall be notified, in writing, of such determination. Contractor shall furnish to COTR three copies of all purchase orders or subcontracts, for all tiers of subcontractors or suppliers for each item. In addition, copies of documented quality-control operations, tests, and inspections shall be made available to the Authority's representative at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment. The CQC shall notify the COTR at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases.

1.15 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described in DIVISION 01 Section "Submittals".



1.16 TESTING

A. Except as stated otherwise in the technical specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this Contract.

B. Independent Testing Laboratory: When tests are required by civil, electrical, USBC and other codes in effect, a corporately and financially independent testing organization that can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment, or systems evaluated by the testing organization shall be contracted by the Contractor to perform the contractually required tests. The various types of independent laboratories and their requirements are listed below:

C. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories performing work for Authority construction contracts shall be accredited by one of the laboratory accreditation authorities. The laboratory's scope of accreditation shall include the ASTM standards listed in the paragraph titled "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements" as appropriate to the testing field. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office".

D. Electrical testing of components, equipment and systems: The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five years’ experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing laboratories shall be a current full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.neta.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform duties as required under the terms of this Contract.

E. Structural and Pipe Welding: An independent testing firm shall perform all structural and pipe welding examinations as required by this Contract. The inspectors employed by the firm shall hold current certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) for visual weld examinations and ASNT-TC-1A Certification for nondestructive examination of welds. ASNT-TC-1A certifications shall be by an ASNT-TC-1A ACCP Level III.

F. Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements: Provide an independent construction material testing laboratory accredited by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority to perform sampling and tests required by this Contract. Testing laboratories that have obtained accreditation by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority listed in the paragraph entitled "Laboratory Accreditation Authorities" submit with the Quality Control Plan, a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract. On-site testing facilities shall submit a certified statement by the Supervising Professional Engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as meeting the requirements of the following minimum ASTM standards listed below as appropriate to the testing field.

1. Laboratories engaged in testing of construction materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329.

2. Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077.

3. Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666.

4. Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock, as used in engineering design and construction, shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740.



5. Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing (NDT) shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 543.

6. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA.

G. Laboratory Accreditation Authorities: Laboratory Accreditation Authorities are the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program, ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICBO ES), and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL). Furnish to the COTR, a copy of the current Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract.

H. Capability Check: The COTR retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract.

I. Capability Recheck: If non-conformities are discovered during the capability check or any succeeding recheck, Contractor shall be assessed a charge of $750.00 to reimburse the Authority for each recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. These charges shall be deducted from the total amount due Contractor.

J. Test Results: Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify COTR immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the Specification requirements, whichever is applicable. A testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports shall sign test results. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the COTR via the QCM. Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month

K. Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests:

1. The QCM shall furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field tests at the end of each month to the COTR. All Summary Test Reports shall be reviewed and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

L. Control and Verification Tests: Control tests are those tests made for Contractor under the Quality Control Plan to assist Contractor in maintaining control of his operations. As described above, Contractor shall procure the services of an independent commercial laboratory to perform the required control tests. The Specifications contain the minimum of the following:

1. Testing criteria 2. Frequency of testing 3. Procedures 4. Methods of construction 5. Number of control tests to be made for each phase of the Work. 6. Notify COTR a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the time samples shall be taken by

Contractor for quality control testing. COTR shall then notify its own testing laboratory contractor so that verification test samples may be taken.



M. Check Tests: Contractor shall furnish to COTR the quantities of materials to be used for check testing as required in the Specifications. Check testing shall be performed by the Authority at an independent laboratory at no cost to Contractor. No direct payment shall be made to Contractor for the furnishing of materials used for check testing.

N. Staffing: All laboratory personnel shall work under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

1.17 QC CERTIFICATIONS

A. Quality Control Daily Report Certification:

1. Each Quality Control Daily Report shall contain the following statement:

a. "On behalf of (Name of Contractor), I certify that this report and the Inspector's Daily Reports are complete and correct, and that all materials and equipment used, as well as work performed during this reporting period are in compliance with Drawings, Specifications, and Contract provisions, except as noted in this report or attached reports."

B. Application for Payment Certification

1. Refer to DIVISION 01 Section "Application for Payment" for address to which the Applications shall be sent.

C. Completion Certification:

1. Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QCM shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the Contract."

1.18 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS

A. Punch-Out Inspection: Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the Specifications, the QCM shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items on the "Rework Items List" which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. The punch list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the COTR. The QCM or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the COTR that the facility is ready for the Authority "Pre-Final Inspection."

B. Pre-Final Inspection: The Authority will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. An Authority "Pre-Final Punch List" may be developed as a result of this inspection. The QCM shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Authority that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in timely manner and shall be



accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

C. Final Acceptance Inspection: The QCM, the superintendent or other primary contractor management personnel shall be in attendance at this inspection. The COTR will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Authority personnel may be in attendance. The Contracting Officer based upon results of the "Pre-Final" inspection will formally schedule the final acceptance inspection. Notice shall be given to the COTR at least 14 calendar days prior to the final inspection stating that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor, as being unacceptable, along with all the remaining work performed under the contract, shall be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection shall be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Authority's additional inspection cost in accordance with the clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Inspection of Construction." When the Contracting Officer takes possession of partially completed work, it shall be in accordance with clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Use and Possession Prior to Completion".

1.19 DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall maintain current quality control records, on approved forms, of all control activities, production, tests and inspections performed. These records shall include factual evidence that required tests or inspections have been performed, including type and number of tests or inspections involved; results of tests or inspections; nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective actions taken. These records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features (non-conforming) and shall include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated into the Work are in full compliance with terms of the Contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to COTR daily. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified by Contractor's QCM. Contractor shall document tests and inspections as specified in the technical provisions of the Specifications, and these records shall be available for review by COTR throughout the life of the Contract.

B. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC Program operations and activities. Establish and maintain the following in a series of 3 ring binders. Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Authority's Quality Assurance Team during normal business hours.

1. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Reports, arranged by specification section. 2. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number. 3. A current up-to-date copy of the Testing Plan and Log with supporting field test reports,

arranged by specification section. 4. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include

documentation that modified work was accomplished. 5. A current, up-to-date copy, of the Deficiency List.

C. Report Forms - The contractor shall design all forms to be used in the Quality Control Program. A copy of all forms shall be included with the Quality Control Plan. The forms shall be designed to assist in the control of the quality. The following minimum requirements are listed for specific reports:



1. Quality Control Daily Report: Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no work and on the last day of a no-work period. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Quality Control Daily Reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by the QCM and shall contain the following information:

a. Date of report, report number, Contract Number, and Contract Title. b. Identify Schedule Activity No., Submittal # and list equipment/material received

each day that is incorporated into the job. c. Indicate if Preparatory Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). d. If Preparatory Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site

work), identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index number is a cross reference to the Preparatory Phase Checklist. An example of the Index number is: 0025-P01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "P" indicates Preparatory Phase, and "01" is the Preparatory Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Preparatory Phase Checklist.

e. Indicate if Initial Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). f. If Initial Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site work),

identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index Number is a cross reference to the Initial Phase Checklist. An example of the Index Number is: 0025-I01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "I" indicates Initial Phase, and "01" is the Initial Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Initial Phase Checklist.

g. Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held today (including on-site and off-site work), including Schedule Activity Number, location of definable feature of work, specification sections, etc. Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase, work complies with safety requirements, and that required testing has been performed. Include a list of who performed the tests.

h. List the rework items identified, but not corrected by close of business, along with its associated Schedule Activity Number.

i. List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken and its associated Schedule Activity Number.

j. Include a "remarks" section in this report that shall contain pertinent information including but not limited to:

1) Directions received. 2) Quality control problem areas. 3) Deviations from the QC plan. 4) Construction deficiencies encountered. 5) QC meetings held. 6) Acknowledgement that record drawings, specifications, O & M data, and

Warranty Manuals, have been updated. 7) Corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action

taken by the Contractor. 8) For each remark given, identify the Schedule Activity Number that is

associated with the remark.



k. Quality Control Daily Report certification, signature and date.

2. Preparatory Phase Report: Each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Preparatory Phase shall have this report filled out for it. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be filled out. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry and format shall match entry in the Preparatory Phase Section of the Quality Control Daily Report. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Preparatory Phase Meeting attendees, their position and their company affiliation.

d. Submittals: Indicate if submittals have been approved (Yes/No checkboxes), if no indicate what has not been submitted. Are materials on hand (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what items are missing. Check delivered material/equipment against approved submittals and comment as required.

e. Material Storage: Indicate if materials/equipment is stored properly (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Specifications: Review and comment on Specification Paragraphs that describe the material/equipment, procedure for accomplishing the work and clarify any differences.

g. Preliminary Work & Permits: Ensure preliminary work is in accordance with the contract documents and necessary permits are on file, if not, describe the action taken.

h. Testing: Identify who performs tests, the frequency, and where tests are to occur. Review the testing plan, report abnormalities, and if the test facilities have been approved.

i. Discuss Control Procedures that shall be employed to consistently obtain the required specified quality.

j. Safety: Indicate if the activity hazard analysis has been approved (Yes/No checkboxes) and comment on the review of the applicable portions of the Construction Safety Manual.

k. Meeting Comments: Note comments and remarks during the Preparatory Phase Meeting that was not addressed in previous sections of this checklist.

l. Other Items or Remarks: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Preparatory Phase.

m. QCM shall sign and date the report.

3. Initial Phase Report: Complete this report for each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Initial Phase. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be entered. b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry

and format shall match entry in the Initial Phase Section of the Quality Control Daily Report.



c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Initial Phase Meeting attendees, their position and company/Authority they are with.

d. Control Procedures: Comment on control procedures identified at Preparatory Phase of Control and assurance that work is in accordance with plans, specifications and submittals. Control procedures not producing the required compliance shall be adjusted until the procedures consistently obtain the required quality.

e. Preliminary Work: Ensure preliminary work being placed is in compliance and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Workmanship: Identify where initial work is located; if a sample panel is required (Yes/No checkboxes); is the initial work the sample (Yes/No checkboxes); and if Yes, describe the panel location and precautions taken to preserve the sample.

g. Resolution: Comment on any differences and the resolutions reached. h. Check Safety: Comment on the safety review of the job conditions. i. Other: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Initial Phase. j. QCM shall sign and date the report.

D. Testing Log: As tests are performed, the QCM shall record on the "Testing Log" the date the test was conducted, the date the test results were forwarded to the COTR, remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used. Forward a copy of the updated "Testing Plan and Log" on the last day of each month. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

E. Deficiency Log: The QCM shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered, the date the item shall be corrected by, and the date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered. Provide a copy of the deficiency log to the COTR at the weekly progress meeting. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the COTR.

F. Special Inspection Control Log: Contractor shall maintain a Special Inspection Control Log chronologically recording each Special test and inspection performed under the USBC, or other agencies having jurisdiction on-site, including the nature of the test or inspection, the date performed, the results, causes for rejection, corrective action taken, and dates of subsequent tests and final acceptance.

G. Test Reports: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that shall record all tests results. Information on test designation, location, date of test, specification requirements, results and retest results, causes for rejection and recommended remedial actions shall be documented. A copy of the test results shall be sent directly from the Agency performing the testing services to COTR. A copy of any failing report shall be sent immediately. All test reports shall be reviewed and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

H. Signoff Sheets: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system of signoff sheets certifying that all work required before the construction or startup of critical work elements has been constructed and installed according to the plans and specifications.



I. Monthly Deficiency Report: Contractor shall submit a monthly deficiency report to COTR identifying all substandard tests and inspections taken during the month including the nature of the test or inspection, location and nature of defects, causes for rejection, and remedial actions taken or proposed for any open items on prior deficiency reports including the date scheduled for resolution of the item.

J. Record Drawings: The QCM is required to ensure the record drawings, required by DIVISION 01 Section "Project Record Documents," are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the construction drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation (e.g. CN No., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The QCM shall initial each deviation and each revision. Upon completion of work, the QCM shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the record drawings prior to submission to the COTR.

K. Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Manuals: The QCM shall ensure that the Operation and Maintenance data required by DIVISION 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" and the Warranties specified in DIVISION 01 Section "Project Closeout" are inserted on a daily basis in the appropriate sections of the approved formatted manuals after they have been approved by the COTR.

L. Materials Receiving Inspection Report: Contractor shall establish a formal materials receiving inspection program to verity material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications.

1.20 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The COTR will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of a claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

2. Repair, replace or otherwise remedy the defective work at the Contractor’s expense. Cost incurred by the Authority to correct defective work shall be deducted from the total amount due the Contractor.

3. Withhold an amount from the payment due the Contractor as may be deemed necessary at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

4. Terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

B. In cases where implementation of the Quality Control Program does not comply with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or the contract provisions. Or Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective Quality Control Program, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified Quality Control Personnel or subcontractors.

2. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until acceptable personnel are on site and a new Quality Control Plan is approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall make no part of



the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

3. Take a credit from the contract for Quality Control Activities not performed. 4. Terminate the Contractors right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

C. The Contractor shall maintain a detailed record of every non-compliance and corrective action taken.





REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym.

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology.

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of the Contract Documents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of the Authority Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions.

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

E. Award: The acceptance, by the Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal.

F. Award Date: The date on which the Authority gives notice of acceptance to the successful offeror.

G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security



area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's Permit for the Air Operations Area.

H. Beneficial Use: Use by the Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance.

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein.

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in Section III, "Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto.

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to the Authority for performance of prescribed Work.

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the Contract Documents.

O. Directed: A command or instruction by the Authority. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.



1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is indicated.

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control requirements.

Z. Roadway: General term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way.

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided for in Section VI of the Contract Documents.

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are necessary for the proper performance of the Contract.

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

EE. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: An authorized representative of a manufacturer who is trained and approved by the manufacturer to inspect and approve the installation of manufacturer’s products and that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and who is authorized by the manufacturer to confirm the issuance of appropriate warranties.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information regarding conflicting requirements.



1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355 Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point.

www.dodssp.daps.mil

Available from General Services Administration

www.fss.gsa.gov (202) 501-1021

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences

www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)



ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org MIL See MILSPEC MS MIL See MILSPEC UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials http://www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 http://www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530



www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 http://www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 http://www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437 Http://www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 http://www.apawood.org



APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 http://www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 http://www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 http://www.asphaltroofing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122



http://www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991 www.bicsi.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (773) 761-4100 www.bissc.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472 http://www.asphaltroofing.org (819) 956-0425 CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 http://www.asphaltroofing.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 http://www.asphaltroofing.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772



http://www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 http://www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 http://www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 http://www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 http://www.eima.com/ (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 http://www.asphaltroofing.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772

www.floridaroof.com



FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 www.fscoax.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000



www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150 www.issfa.net ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 www.lma.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling Industry of America (See MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com



MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 http://www.necanet.org/ NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000



NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (See RTI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929



Website Unavalible PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 RTI Roof Tile Institute (312) 670-4177 (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers

Association)

www.ntrma.org SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.sefalabs.com SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacentral.org



SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800



UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261 Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543



C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov FHA Federal Highway Administration (410) 962-0093 www.fhwa.dot.gov GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA)



PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690 7694 phs.os.dhhs.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb TSA Transportation Security Administration 1(866)-289-9673 www.tsa.gov/public/index.jsp USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DCR Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (804) 786-1712 http://www.dcr.state.va.us VDH Virginia Department of Health (540) 829-7340 Culpepper District www.vdh.state.va.us USBC The Virginia Statewide Building Code (USBC)

The Commonwealth of Virginia – Uniform Statewide Building Code

(804) 371- 7160

VDHCD Virginia Department of Housing and Community Development Division of Building and Fire Regulation 501 North 2nd Street Richmond, VA 23219-1321

VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation (703) 383-8368 www.virginiadot.org VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality 1-800-592-5482 www.deq.state.va.us



1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES

A. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work. Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

B. Codes: The contractor shall adhere to all applicable portions of code standards and specifications in the construction of the work. Unless otherwise noted (reference Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”), the Authority will review the Contractor’s submittals and construction of the work for code compliance. The Authority’s acceptance of completed construction does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with all applicable regulations and codes.

1. Definition: The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority has a “building department” recognized by the Commonwealth of Virginia. This department is charged with enforcing the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). Where the words “code official”, “department having jurisdiction” or “agency having jurisdiction” is referenced in any code, including the VUSBC or its adopted model codes (ICC), those terms shall mean the Authority Building Official and/or his designated representative.

2. Standards that influence the construction of the project include, but are not limited to, all applicable federal and Commonwealth laws, all applicable codes, rules, regulations and standards applicable to this project.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, security, and protection facilities for Contractor staging area.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. 7. Telephone and other communication services.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: .

1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2. Waste disposal facilities. 3. Field offices. 4. Storage and fabrication sheds. 5. Lifts and hoists. 6. Temporary stairs. 7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Environmental protection. 2. Storm water control. 3. Pest control. 4. Site enclosure fence. 5. Security enclosure and lockup. 6. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

7. Temporary enclosures. 8. Fire protection.



E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products used in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by COTR, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weather tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Temporary utilities are available from the Authority at no charge unless otherwise noted. Provide necessary labor and materials to connect to the Authority's utilities at points designated by COTR and extend utilities to trailers, offices, sheds, etc.

1. Provide COTR approved meters for water, natural gas, electricity, and each other utility used for Project. Supply utilities to Subcontractors' temporary facilities through Contractor's meters. The requirement to provide meters for utilities does not imply that the Contractor will be charged for these utilities, except under provisions outlined in this and other Sections.

2. Report consumption of each utility to COTR each month. Contractor is expected to consume reasonable amounts of each utility. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion, use excessive amounts of any utility or waste a utility, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

B. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but are not limited to, the following:

1. The Authority’s construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. COTR. 4. Architect/Engineer. 5. Testing agencies. 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to COTR, for the Authority's review and approval, site plans indicating all temporary facilities, support and security; utility connections and traffic flows. Provide detailed drawings of utility connections and special facilities.

B. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities at both staging area and the Project site. Make all



structures weather proof when heated and air-conditioned. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion fail to keep the heated and cooled structures sealed and weather proof, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, that include but are not limited to, the following:

1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police and Fire Department regulations. 4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. ADA Compliance: All temporary facilities shall be ADA compliant.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Coordinate with the Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department for requirements for certifications, permits, and inspections.

1. Obtain permits from the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department for temporary construction and temporary utilities.

D. Fire-retardant and Flame Spread Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, fire – retardant treat all wood and wood composition products utilized in the Project and preservative treat all wood utilized on the exterior of any building. Preservative treat all wood utilized on other items indicated or specified with preservative treatment. Provide lumber and plywood with an Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) stamp certifying a value of 25 or less flame spread and a value of 200 or less smoke development. Fire retardant lumber shall not be ripped or milled.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to COTR, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before the Authority's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.



B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services, permanent services, and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 3. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 4. Do not overload facilities. 5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to

develop or persist on-site.

1.8 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL PARKING

A. The Contractor's personnel will be allowed to park their personal vehicles in staging areas or in areas designated by COTR. Such designated parking areas are not necessarily fenced or otherwise protected, and temporary fencing for such parking areas is a requirement of this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting." and "Interior Painting"

C. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread index of 15 or less.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Temporary Fuel Tanks: Comply with applicable safety and environmental regulations for temporary surface fuel tanks. Location and installation of tanks will be subject to review and approval of COTR and the Authority's Fire Marshal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used.

B. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading, and provided with proper tie-downs.

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.



D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

E. Heating Equipment: Unless COTR authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide temporary heating units with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.

F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 110v or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters with reset button.

G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, overhead, and visible wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

H. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Prior to installation of temporary facilities and utilities, submit to the COTR a site layout providing locations and details of the facilities and utilities.

B. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

C. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 CONTRACTOR STAGING AREA - GENERAL

A. Contractor will be allowed to store and stage his materials in a staging area located on Airport property as indicated or as designated by the COTR for such purposes. Space is limited to area indicated. COTR and Contractor will make a joint site visit to document condition of staging area prior to occupancy. Take photos for the record.



B. Erect and maintain an 8-foot high chain link fence topped with 3-strands of barbed wire around perimeter of staging area when the fence serves as an AOA barrier as required by the FAA/TSA. A 6-foot high fence as described above, including barbed wire will be acceptable for all other applications. Protect all stored equipment from the weather. The Authority accepts no responsibility for items stored in this area.

C. Upon completion of Construction, remove all temporary staging area facilities and return the areas to their original condition.

D. Park construction equipment in the storage site or storage area identified by the COTR when equipment is not engaged in construction activity.

E. Do not stockpile construction materials, spoils, debris or refuse in any area other than that specifically approved for such purpose by the COTR.

F. Constrain stockpiled material in a manner to prevent its movement by wind, jet blast or propeller wash.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide temporary service for each utility required. Comply with requirements of the Authority's Building Codes Manual, the Authority's Construction Safety Manual, and the requirements of all Sections of these specifications.

1. Arrange with COTR for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. For additional information on utility outages see Division 01 Section, "Summary."

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services.

3. Perform work associated with utilities owned by the Authority as approved by the Authority.

4. See additional information in Contract Provisions entitled "Availability and Use of Utility Service."

B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner.

C. When using Authority sewers:

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.

2. Connect temporary sewers to the Authority's system as directed by COTR. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After

heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify

effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



D. Water Service: Provide temporary water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. Provide Badger Record all, Turbo II Utility type water meter to meter all water usage for 2-inch water feed lines and above. Provide Badger Record all bronze disc water meter for to meter all water usage for water feed lines under 2-inches. COTR will approve water meters, in writing prior to installation of water meters. Do not install water meters until written approval has been received from COTR. Provide Watts Model 909, Type RPZ backflow preventers. Do not install backflow preventers until written approval of backflow preventers has been received from the COTR.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units, located as approved by COTR. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Use of the Authority's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled.

a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel.

4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.

a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

5. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than 200 feet horizontally to facilities.

F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation and humidity control required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that would not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. Provide and operate either exhaust or supply fans/blowers, or both, sufficient to ventilate work areas adequately.



H. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. Provide kilowatt-hour meters with demand capability.

1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service is authorized by COTR.

2. Connect temporary service to the Authority's existing power source, as directed by COTR.

3. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage

I. Electrical Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.

Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.

4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power

hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1. Provide and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Provide exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. Provide exterior yard and site lighting aligned as directed by the COTR. Provide lighting so as not to interfere with ground, air traffic and air traffic control.

3. Install lighting for Project identification signs.

K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service for key personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephones on separate lines for each temporary office and first aid station. Where an office has more that two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. Provide telephones with exchanges within the Metropolitan Washington service area. The Authority owns and operates an airport-wide Airport Communication System (ACS). This system accommodates all normal telecommunications service requirements, i.e., local, long distance, fax, data, etc. The Contractor may obtain information about and choose to utilize this service by contacting the ACS Help Desk at (703) 417-8300.

1. At each telephone, post a list of emergency telephone numbers approved by COTR.



2. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 and USBC.

B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 and Division 32 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.

3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated or where directed by COTR to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Provide two Project signs.

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated.

2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.

3. Construct signs of exterior-type, Grade B-B, high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thickness indicated. Support on nominal 4-inch-by-4-inch-by-10-foot-long posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel.

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.

5. The following signs will be allowed on the Project:

a. Identifying captions over offices. b. Other signs as required by the Contract Documents.

6. Take necessary steps to prevent installation of unauthorized signs and, should any appear, remove them immediately. Repair and repaint damage caused thereby at no additional cost to the Authority.

7. No more that two Project Identification Signs will be permitted. Project identification signs are the only signs on which the Contractors name and logo will be permitted.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or



unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

1. If required by COTR, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.

2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.

E. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.

F. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or, if permitted by COTR, fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site subject to approval of COTR.

1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.

2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.

3. Submit the design of storage structures of more than 150 sq. ft. to COTR for review and approval by the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department.

G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of the Authority's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to COTR. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours of 11:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m., unless directed otherwise by the COTR, which will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Storm water Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and sub grade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.

C. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control



procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for the Authority. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Security Fencing:

1. Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 3 galvanized barbed-wire top strands, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, provide portable chain-link site enclosure fence. Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. Contractor is responsible for providing support to protect against wind damage and meeting safety requirements.

1. Entrance into the site: Only through the lockable entrance gates. 2. Set fence posts in concrete bases. 3. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and

other construction operations. 4. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide COTR with three set of keys.

F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. See the Authority's Construction Safety Manual for additional requirements.

H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with

load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. 5. Use fire-retardant-treated wood and plywood for temporary enclosures. Use fire-

retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.



I. Storage: Where materials and equipment are stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and release of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism.

3.6 UTILITY PROVISIONS AT SOUTH STAGING AREA

A. EXISTING CONDITIONS

1. The Authority will provide at each lot in the South Staging area the following:

a. Two 2” conduits from the utility sheds, to the limits of the lot, one electrical and one telecommunications. The conduits will be capped below grade and signified by a 4” x 4” x 4’ wood stake at the limits of the lot.

b. Each lot will be allocated 100 A, 480 v 3 phase, 3 wire power. c. The power is available at the utility shed. Provide necessary conductors as

indicated in the “TELECOMMUNICATIONS” and “ELECTRICAL POWER” paragraphs below.

d. Domestic water service will be available at the limit of the lot, identified with a blue painted stake.

B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Contractor is responsible for subdividing telecommunications, electrical and water within their assigned lot in a coordinated fashion upon mobilization. Provide a site plan for COTR review and approval. Maintain site plan up-to-date throughout the Project. Indicate on site plan trailer locations, proposed conduit runs, proposed telecom and electrical backboards, proposed water distribution and any other pertinent information. Locate and indicate existing utilities on site plan.

2. Install fence around Contractors allotted area and remove fence upon completion of Contractor’s Work. Refer to other paragraphs of this section for fencing requirements.

3. Contractor employee parking will be limited to within the allotted staging area. Provide transportation for Contractor’s employees between the work site and the staging area.

4. Water tank fill station is located on the south side of the entrance road to the Staging Area. Do not use the fire hydrants along the main staging area road for obtaining water.

5. Restore lot to its original condition upon contract conclusion.

C. TELECOMMUNICATIONS

1. The Airport Communications System (ACS) vendor will provide a pedestal or telecom backboard at the limits of the Contractor’s lot. The pedestal or telecom backboard is supplied via a communications cable installed by the ACS from the nearest utility shed to the limits of the Contractor’s lot. As the electrical and telecommunications are adjacent, excavation at the lot limits for both utilities should be completed at the same time. Determining the routing of all conduits from the telecom pedestal at the lot limits to each subcontractor trailer to avoid future cut cables. Originate all feeds within a lot at the pedestal location. Contractor’s attention is called to the fact that all telecommunications work between the utility sheds and the lot limits is the responsibility of the ACS. Should the Contractor perform any telecommunications work between the utility sheds and the lot limits, the ACS will remove work and the ACS will charge the Contractor for any cost associated with this removal of the work.



2. Provide all conduit installations either above or below ground in accordance with the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code and the applicable Division 26 Sections of the specification.

a. Communications cable:

1) Cable must be 24 gauge with solid, annealed, bare copper conductors 2) Conductors shall have polyolefin insulation, color coded to telephone

industry standards 3) Cable must have a black polyethylene outer jacket 4) Cable must have an aluminum or copper shield. 5) Cable must be Gel filled 6) Install in schedule 40 PVC conduits a minimum of 2” in diameter. 7) Advise the COTR of the total number of required telecom cable pairs,

including his subcontractor’s requirements, prior to any communications cable work within the lot.

3. Special telecom provisions - T1 service is available in the South Contractors lot at Contractor's expense. Telecom services can be ordered through the Airport Communications System vender. Please call Louise Epps at 703/417-8605 to order these services.

D. ELECTRICAL POWER

1. Conduit is provided from one of four sheds, to a location just inside each contractor lot. Extend the conduit, as required, to serve all facilities on Contractor’s site and provide cable back to shed. If power requirements greater than 100 ampere, at 480v, three phase, three – wire are required; requests for additional power will be considered on a case-by-case basis.

a. Transformers:

1) Suitable for outdoor use 2) Pad mounted with fused safety switches on the primary and secondary sides

of the transformer.

2. The Contractor is required to advise the COTR of the estimated electrical consumption including that of his subcontractors prior to provision of cable.

E. PLUMBING

1. Provide a Watts Model 909, Type RPZ backflow prevention device at each trailer. Remove plumbing work in place upon contract completion. There are no sanitary sewer provisions, use above ground tanks specifically designed for sewage holding. The Contractor at his option may use chemical or electrical toilets. Clean, pump and haul sanitary waste. Maintain a clean and odor free lot.

F. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS STAGING AREA

1. Unauthorized soil and concrete stockpiles are prohibited.



2. Cover all containers and drums of any size that are stored on site and their required secondary containment to prevent rainwater from coming in contact with the containers. Earthen berms are not permitted. Clearly label all drums and containers used to hold trash and debris “Trash”. Empty drums and containers when full. Remove all unused empty drums and containers from the site.

3. Include Contractor’s lot in the South Staging Area in the SPPP.

4. Store all fuel, petroleum based products and products potentially detrimental to the environment in aboveground tanks.

5. Aboveground storage tanks:

a. Double walled and approved for the use intended. b. Submit manufacturer’s literature to COTR for approval in writing for each such

storage tank intended for use by Contractor.

6. Store all trash, construction debris, and other debris in metal containers specifically designed for such use. Do not keep trash containers on the site for more than 90 calendar days.

7. Storage of used tires and batteries is prohibited. 8. Storage of waste oil is prohibited. 9. Only routine light equipment maintenance shall be permitted. Should Contractor require

more than routine maintenance to be performed on site, submit a work execution plan to COTR, for written approval, describing the type of maintenance and the procedures that will be implemented to protect the environment.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Unless Contractor is able to utilize permanent fire protection, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.



1. Properly recondition and restore those portions of the site occupied by temporary facilities and controls to condition acceptable to COTR, at least equal to condition at time of start of Work, unless otherwise authorized in writing by COTR.

2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. The Authority reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

3. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace roadway paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1. This Section includes substitutions made for "or as approved by the Authority" items.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products

and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility , except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.



C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form acceptable to COTR, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date. i. Item Tag Number or similar ID if identified in the drawings j. Serial Number (once available)

3. Initial Submittal: Within 90 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

4. COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 calendar days of receipt of initial product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. COTR's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.

5. Updated submittal: Submit updated product list every 90 days following initial submittal. The updated list shall be submitted in approved electronic spread sheet format with additional fields as required by COTR.

6. Completed List: Submit 10 hard copies and one electronic copy of completed product list 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for substantial completion. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for Contract Modification proposals supplied to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting or as directed by COTR. Do not submit requests for substitutions as "Requests for Information" (RFIs).

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Authority and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

m. Failure by Contractor to include the above requirements in the submittal may cause rejection of the submittal in its entirety.

3. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 15 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or two weeks of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change notice. b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.



C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. COTR’s Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a comparable product request. COTR will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals." b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittals." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.



5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

6. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 7. Protect stored products from damage. 8. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no

additional cost to the Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, mold, mildew, warping, and rust.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Authority.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Authority.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.



4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

COTR's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. "Or as approved by the Authority": Note that products submitted under an "or as

approved by the Authority” provision are considered to be substitutions. Substitutions shall follow the requirements of Paragraph VII-42 of Contract Provisions and provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches COTR's sample. COTR's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.



a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer.

B. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Contractor's submittal and COTR's review or approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples that relate to a substitute does not by itself constitute a final approval of the requested substitution, nor does it relieve Contractor from fulfilling existing Contract requirements.

D. If a substitution offers a substantial advantage to the Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Authority may be required to bear, the substitution shall be submitted as a Value Engineering Change Proposal.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:



1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, it is consistent with the Contract Documents, it will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products.

. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data for land surveyors.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed and sealed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed and sealed by land surveyor.

D. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections, acceptance tests, etc.) and record survey data as required under provisions in Division 01 Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout."


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in the Commonwealth of Virginia and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work, including all site utility systems.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical and communication services.

2. For additional requirements for locating and marking existing utilities, see Division 01 Section "Summary."

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to COTR that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to COTR. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify COTR promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to layout the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify COTR when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than one inch in 10,000 feet.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by COTR.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Existing control points and property line corner stakes are as identified on the Contract Documents.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.



1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of COTR. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to COTR before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly with the approval of COTR. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with the Authority for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of major site improvements and other work requiring field-engineering services, including utilities, prepare a certified survey showing coordinates, dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. Coordinates shall be NAD 83 Virginia State Planes North Zone and elevations shall be NAVD 88 survey feet.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to COTR. Coordinate this requirement with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. 5. Roughing-in of utilities in areas with vaulted or domed roofs shall follow contour of roof

lines.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

D. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.



F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. For additional requirements see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by COTR.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints as directed by COTR. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 3. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-airport property will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

L. Grass Mowing: Mow grass areas contained in Project site, or made inaccessible to the Authority's mowing contractors.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Follow equipment manufacturer's startup procedures, unless otherwise directed by COTR.

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the facility for alterations.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal, requesting approval from COTR to proceed, describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in facility appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List utilities that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. Before cutting/core drilling the slab, structural members, concrete walls, etc. X-ray the slab, beam, wall, etc. to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and



reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/core drilling will cut any conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for utility outage requirements.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. When cutting and patching involves welding or open flame cutting, obtain the approval of the Authority's Fire Marshal for such work prior to its start. Before cutting or drilling a structural element, X-ray the element to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/drilling will cut any rebar or conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

7. COTR's Approval: Obtain COTR’s approval in writing of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive COTR’s right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain COTR's written approval of the cutting and patching of the following operating elements or safety related items:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. 7. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 8. Security systems including CCTV and duress alarms.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.



6. Insulating systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in COTR's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. Processed concrete finishes. 2. Preformed metal panels. 3. Roofing. 4. Fire stopping.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned; bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Should excavating and backfilling be required by cutting

and patching operations comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Remove conductors back to source of supply.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.



1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition.



PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty Manual.

2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Acceptance construction photographs and negatives.

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Definition: "Substantial Completion" is the stage in the progress of the work when COTR determines that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and functional according to the Contract Documents so that the Authority can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The only remaining physical work shall be the completion of punch list work prior to Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, reasons why the Work is not complete, and a schedule for completing punch list work according to Section III of the Contract.

2. Ensure previously outstanding technical submittals and Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.



3. Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit warranties required by Contract Documents, workmanship bonds, maintenance

service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

a. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 days before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s Warranty Letter to include that date as start of Warranty period.

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents except Record Contract CPM Schedule; also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

7. Prepare and submit proof that specified testing and code inspections have been completed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, structural work, sprinkler piping systems, fire alarm and FPS systems, bacteriological testing of domestic lines, back-flow prevention, and electrical system testingDeliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise the Authority of changeover in utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to the Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Instruct the Authority's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems, as required by Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 15. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, "Schedule." Failure to complete the punch list work within the duration specified may result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost to Contractor.

3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance.



1.4 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including administrative obligations. The date of Final Acceptance is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

2. Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have been approved.

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore areas to previously existing condition, if applicable.

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 6. Return all AOA badging and all Authority Ids. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 9. Submit warranty book.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories equipment,

and systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date.



c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Architect/Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below within 90 days of Notice to Proceed. COTR will return comments to the Contractor no later than 30 calendar days after receipt.

1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to the Authority, and statement of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved warranties have been received.

2. Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by the Authority during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Warranty Manual: Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and major subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position locking mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3-inch binder thickness. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "PROJECT

WARRANTIES," Contract number and name, and subject matter of contents. If identification cannot be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, (, or as approved by the Authority) for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tabbed section on the front and back of tabs. Tabs shall indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the warranty or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers. Provide an index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. The index shall be generated using a word processor and printed on a laser printer. Include a matching master table of contents for



each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty that shall be included in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to facility. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including trenches, manholes, and similar spaces.

h. Remove labels that are not permanent.



i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

k. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. m. Clean blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Authority's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Authority's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed by COTR.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and formatting. 2. Manuals, General and formatting 3. Emergency Information Manuals and formatting. 4. Operation Information Manuals and formatting for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 5. Maintenance Information Manuals and formatting for the care and maintenance of

products, materials, finishes, systems, and equipment.


1. DIVISION 01, Section "Application for Payment" for values assigned to Operation and Maintenance Manuals

2. DIVISION 01, Section "Quality Requirements" for ensuring the development and continuing update of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. DIVISION 01, Section "Submittals" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. DIVISION 01, Section "Project Closeout" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

5. DIVISION 01, Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

6. DIVISIONS 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

C. For purposes of payment, O & M and Material and Finishes Manuals are to be valued at 3% of Contract.

D. Payment for materials and equipment will be withheld if complete O & M manual material is not received from the contractor at time of material or equipment delivery. Namely, instruction sheets, operation manuals, installation instructions, and other documents received from the manufacturer at the time of delivery.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

C. Equipment: An instrument or appliance designed for a specific operation.

D. Product: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

E. Location: A defined area such as roof, room, hallway, ceiling, pavement, wall, or floor that has special maintenance requirements that are documented in the Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Format: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manual Format. Format shall include a table of contents and be as specified in Part 2 of this Section. COTR will return comments regarding the Operation and Maintenance Manual Format and planned contents of the completed manual within 30 calendar days of receipt. Throughout the construction period of the project, Operation and Maintenance data shall be continually inserted in the appropriate sections/parts of the Manual as it is approved.

B. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory. Format shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section. COTR will return comments regarding the Directory and planned contents of the completed manual set within 30 calendar days of receipt of submittal. Throughout the construction period of the project, the Directory shall be updated to reflect changes resulting from other submittal approvals.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Initial Submittal: Submit four draft copies of each Manual in the approved format at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete Operations and Maintenance Directory. COTR will return a copy of draft within 30 calendar days of receipt, and mark whether general scope and content of Manuals are acceptable.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Revised Submittals: Submit 4 revised copies of each manual in final form, including one CD containing electronic O & M documentation, at least 45 calendar days before substantial completion or training, whichever occurs first. COTR will return a copy with comments within 15 calendar days after receipt.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Final Submittal: Correct or modify each manual to comply with COTR’s comments. Submit 6 copies of the Document Directory and each corrected manual at least 15 calendar days before substantial completion or training whichever occurs first.



1. Provide four copies of all Operation and Maintenance Data in electronic format on CD-ROM consistent with the organization and format in the "Manuals, General" section. All electronic files shall be in Adobe PDF format and limited to 10 megabytes in size per file.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, the General Contractor shall assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Provide the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory in separate binder from operation and maintenance information. Binders, dividers and all portions of the Directory shall comply with requirements of "Manuals, General" as applicable. Size of binder for directory shall be appropriate for quantity of contents. Information in O & M Directory shall be in alphabetical order with references to contract Division and Specification Section.

B. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. General Information. 2. List of systems and subsystems. 3. List of equipment. 4. List of Products 5. Table of contents.

C. General Information: Include documents that are pertinent to the project, including, but not limited to, a detailed description of the facility or project, general safety information and a users guide to the project operation and maintenance manuals.

D. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

E. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

F. List of Products: List products alphabetically to include all products not part of a system, subsystem, or component of equipment. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each product.

G. Tables of Contents: Include a complete table of contents for each volume of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

H. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment and products with the same



designation used by the Authority. If no designation is provided for equipment, systems, sub-systems, or equipment assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

I. Provide a draft of the proposed "Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory" at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit draft to COTR for approval in writing.

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize information by Division and then into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information on the title page:

1. Specific subject matter included in manual such as Division number and title, Specification Section number and title, equipment, systems and subsystems.

2. Name and number of the Contract. 3. Date of submittal. 4. Name, address, telephone number, and contact person of Contractor, Subcontractor, and

supplier. 5. Name and address of the COTR and Architect/Engineer. 6. Cross-reference to related systems in other portions of the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.

C. Table of Contents: Include a printed, printed by a laser printer, table of contents for each volume, arranged according to the specification format. List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in the Contract Documents.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents by Division then by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position Dublock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on



top and bottom of binders. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3 inch binder thickness. Smaller binders are acceptable as long as 75 percent rated binder capacity is not exceeded.

b. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data for a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

c. Identify each binder on front (If Identification cannot be placed on the front provide as the first page) and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Contract number and name, and specific subject matter of contents, such as "DIVISION 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning," to include Specification Section. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tab section (front and back of tabs), to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the product or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers.

3. Provide a typed index describing each product, equipment, and subject addressed in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between major topics and each different device within a tabbed section.

4. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Provide protective transparent plastic sheet protectors to enclose the Title Page, all Table of Content pages, and photographs.

a. For CD-ROMs, provide transparent plastic three-ring sleeves designed to accommodate CD-ROMs.

5. Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. Copies of faxed materials may be rejected. Two-sided text shall be provided on 24-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper to eliminate "bleed through" of text with a minimum brightness of 96.

6. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in transparent envelopes and bind envelopes with text. Insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, in the transparent envelopes along with drawings. Drawings shall cross-reference the appropriate manual volume and Specification Section. Drawing holding envelopes are not acceptable.

c. Provide operation and maintenance material on CD-ROM.

E. Transfer Cases: Manuals shall be submitted in durable, multiple thickness fiberboard transfer boxes (legal-size boxes, 15 inches wide by 24 inches long by 10 inches high) with plastic tote handles string and button closures, reinforced poly edge, and a large labeling area that accurately describes the contents. Banker box, Fast Hold Liberty Plus P-12112 or as approved by the Authority.



F. Within 30 days of turnover of each project phase of work, modify existing Fuel System Operator’s Operating Procedures Task Breakdown Sheets to include changes caused by this project. Assume 15 procedures will require modification. Procedures typically consist of 3 to 5 pages of written procedures and 3to 5 pages of control system “screen shots” and photographs. Efforts to include:

1. Meet with the Fuel System Operator to obtain a copy of the current written procedures, re-view existing procedures and determine changes that impact these procedures.

2. Modify the written procedures as determined in 1. above. 3. Submit modified procedures for review and approval. 4. Incorporate review comments. 5. Resubmit revised procedures.

2.3 EMERGENCY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: Organize information by Division into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Water leak. 4. Fuel leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. 9. Weather related events, thunderstorms, hurricanes, tornados, etc.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of the Authority’s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Emergency Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.



2.4 OPERATION INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information. Organize manuals into separate and distinct volumes by Division.

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Safety instruction and related issues. 3. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 4. Operating standards. 5. Operating procedures. 6. Operating logs. 7. Wiring diagrams, including color-coding and terminal designations. Include all factory

preset or field-set dip switch and jumper settings for all electronic equipment. 8. Control diagrams. 9. Piped system diagrams. 10. Precautions against improper use. 11. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 12. Material Safety Data Sheets.

B. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 10. Procedures or operations that may void warranty. 11. Copies of equipment warranties.

C. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

D. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and color-coding shall be used where required for identification.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Operation Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. This Section shall contain information for all products with the exception of Systems and Equipment, which shall be provided as indicated elsewhere in this Section.



B. Content: Organize information into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Provide one section for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, schedule of products, location of products and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 6. Fire/flame-spread test certificates. 7. Material Safety Data Sheets.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings, in the materials and finishes manual on all products specified in DIVISIONS 02 through 33.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Provide copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

I. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, preventative maintenance



program, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Organize information into separate and distinct sections by Division, and further divided by system (for example, Fuel systems and electrical systems).

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name, model number, and location. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. Circuit directories of panelboards for electric and electronic systems, including the

following:

a. Electric service. b. Controls. c. Telecommunications. d. Security.

D. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Safety information. 2. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 3. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 4. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 5. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Preventative Maintenance Plan: Provide an annual preventative maintenance plan indicating when maintenance tasks should be performed, such that work is spread evenly as possible throughout the year. Preventative Maintenance should not be misconstrued as reconditioning, or major repairs or replacement of components, but designed to reveal through certain procedures and inspection the need for such actions in time to prevent malfunctions during operation.

F. Preventative Maintenance and Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential preventative maintenance and maintenance and repair procedures:



1. Preventative Maintenance:

a. Provide instructions and location diagrams for the following:

1) Checking general condition of System and Components. 2) Inspecting for accumulation of dust, dirt or any foreign matter, and clean as

needed. 3) Cleaning or replacing all filters and screens and adjust packing for pumps,

valves, etc. 4) Examining indicating lamps, gauges, thermometers, etc., and replace as

required. 5) Checking electrical primary, secondary, terminal blocks and contacts, for

loose connections. 6) Checking Operation of strainers, valves, instruments and control switches,

including their contacts. 7) Checking instrument transformers for proper condition and replace burned

out fuses. 8) Removing dust from all electrical insulators and insulation and inspecting

bus bars and connections for proper condition, loose connection, and overheating or overloads.

9) Examining safety interlocks, automatic shutters, dampers, valves, etc, and their operating mechanisms for proper operation.

10) Checking space heaters, thermostats, and all controls for proper operation 11) Lubricating mechanisms, contacts, and other moving component parts. 12) Specific procedures applicable to specialized equipment and systems.

2. Maintenance and Repairs:

a. Include information and detailed diagnostic testing and inspection instructions, and procedures that detail essential system and equipment maintenance procedures including but not limited to:

1) Examination of shaft seal for excessive leakage. 2) Monitoring of systems for excessive bearing noise. 3) Checking equipment motor housing for excessive heat buildup. 4) Measuring and recording suction and discharge pressures. 5) Verifying lubrication requirements. 6) Realignment of shaft coupling. 7) Checking motor amperes drawn at full load. 8) Checking motor shaft run-out 9) Performing thermographic scanning of motor starters, motors, pumps and all

mechanical and electrical equipment that requires a connection. 10) Proper cleaning and corrosion control of drip pan and drainage lines. 11) Inspection of internal equipment components for unusual wear of failure. 12) Procedures for maintenance including precautions against improper

maintenance.

b. Include the following information and items that detail essential system and equipment repair procedures:

1) Complete troubleshooting guide.



2) Complete repair instructions including equipment and component removal, disassembly, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

3) Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions including noise, vibration and efficiency adjustments.

4) Demonstration and training videotape, if such videotape, CD or DVD is provided by the manufacturer.

G. Maintenance Service Schedules

1. Provide recommended frequencies, inspections, service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

a. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

b. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers’ forms for recording maintenance.

H. Spare Parts List, Recommended Inventory Requirements and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

I. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings if necessary, in the Equipment and Systems manual on all products specified in DIVISIONS 02 through 33.

J. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

K. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.7 WARRANTY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and Major Subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

B. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position DublLock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.



C. Identify each binder on front (If identification can not be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual) and spine, with printed title "PROJECT WARRANTIES," Contract number and name. The use of business labels is prohibited.

D. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description front and back of tabs, to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a typed index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for the manual using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Provide a draft of the proposed Warranty Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Compile all required information, as it is approved, grouped first by specification Division and then by Section in accordance with the information requirements outlined in Part 2 of this specification section and the approved Operation and Maintenance Manual Format.

B. Emergency Information: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by the Authority’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating manufacturer’s product information, part numbers, description and care and maintenance instructions for each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance and repair data providing complete information for each system, subsystem and piece of equipment. Include complete operation, preventative maintenance, maintenance and repair instructions, and parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer’s and Installer’s maintenance personnel.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Authority’s operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers’ Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet with black arrows to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract



Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Provide supplementary text if manufacturers’ standard printed data are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide supplementary text where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams and their relation to the structure or facility. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in DIVISION 01, Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with DIVISION 01 Section "Project Closeout" for a schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


Task Breakdown Sheet

© Air BP Limited Page 1 of 13 Issued : April 2008

2. Transferring fuel to the hydrant fuel farm PURPOSE After the fuel in a settling tank has been tested and certified, it will be sent to the hydrant fuel farm. This is the primary transfer procedure, and uses the filtration equipment located at the settling tank farm. FREQUENCY As required. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (The trainer should describe the PPE required for this task, why it is needed and its correct use and maintenance) Gloves, safety boots, safety glasses, protective uniform.

STAGES Go through the task or subject. Select suitable portions for the learner to master.

KEY POINTS Anything in a stage which might: • Affect the results of the task or test • Cause personal injury or affect safety • Result in a product spillage • Make performance of the task easier or more efficient

HSE TIPS

These tips are provided for the help of trainers and trainees.

This should not preclude the trainer from using his own key tips commensurate with his experience at the specific work-site.

1. PRE-TRANSFER PROCEDURES

1. Determine which settling tank is full and has been certified acceptable.

2. Check that laboratory certification number for the tank has been received from the lab.

3. Determine which hdrant fuel farm tank (1 through 6) will receive the fuel. Since the settling tanks are much larger than the hydrant fuel farm tanks, it will be necessary to transfer the fuel to several hydrant fuel farm tanks. Only one hydrant fuel farm tank should be filled at a time, however.

Painted metal surfaces do not provide electrical continuity. Without electrical continuity static could build up and result in an explosion. Always bond, even with buckets.

2. LINE UP TANK VALVES 1. Place the desired tank into “Issue” mode. A screen will pop up on the display. Input the Lab Certification Number for the fuel in the settling tank.

2. Verify the pump suction valve on the issue tank moves to

SAMPLE



the “Open” position. The valve number for each tank is as follows:

a. Tank T-22: DBB-13

b. Tank T-23: DBB-17

c. Tank T-24: DBB-21

Verify all other Issue tank valves move to the “Closed” position.

3. Place the desired hydrant fuel farm tank into “Receive” mode. Verify its tank inlet valve moves to the “Open” position, and all other valves are in the “Closed” position.

4. NOTE: As soon as an open flowpath is created, fuel will flow to the hydrant tanks by means of gravity alone. Observe the flow meter. Pumps may be left off to conserve electricity as long as the flowrate is acceptable.

3. SELECT TRANSFER PUMP 1. The Transfer Pumps P-22 through P-24 are arranged to pump from their respective tanks. For instance, Pump P-22 is designed to be the primary pump for Tank T-22, Pump P-23 is the primary pump for Tank T-23, and Pump P-24 is the primary pump for Tank T-24.

2. However, any transfer pump can be used to pump out of any tank by opening and closing valves on the suction header to create a flowpath form the desired tank to the desired pump.

3. Open isolation valves between the pumps and the hydrant fuel farm tank as needed to create a flow path. For this example, Tank T-22 is the desired tank and P-22 is the desired pump.

4. SELECT FILTRATION TRAIN 1. There are two separate filter trains which may be used during fuel transfer. Each train consists of a pre-filter (PF) and a filter/separator (F/S). This document describes the procedure for using the primary filter train located at the settling tank farm, and consists of PF-21 and F/S-21. The

SAMPLE



clay treaters CT-1 and CT-2 may also be used for the transfer process.

2. Open and close the manual valves as required to create the desired flowpath through the filter train. The valves should be positioned as follows:

a. Open valves DBB-6, G-9, G-11, G-12, G-13, G-14 DBB-23, G-15 and G-18.

b. Close valves DBB-5, G-16 and G-28.

3. NOTE: As soon as an open flowpath is created, fuel will flow to the hydrant tanks by means of gravity alone. Observe the flow meter. Pumps may be left off to conserve electricity as long as the flowrate is acceptable.

5. OPERATOR TASKS DURING FUEL TRANSFER

1. Start transfer pump P-22. Obeserve the transfer flow rate. Within 20 seconds of starting the pump, the rate should be very close to 2,400 gpm. The rate should stay at 2,400 gpm during the entire delivery.

2. Observe the DP gauge readings for the prefilter and filter/separator. DP readings should not exceed 15 psi per vessel.

3. Periodically sump the prefilter PF-21 and filter/separator F/S-21 during the transfer.

1. Upon activation of a fuel settling tank farm EFS station, the Siemens MXL system notifies the fire department. All fuel settling tank farm pumps will stop and all fuel settling tank valves will close immediately except the tank inlet valves.

2. A critical alarm shall be activated and sounded at both fuel farms. The fuel farm control system PLC will stop all processes including receive, transfer, recirculate, and truck load.

6. CHANGE RECEIVING TANK 1. When the receiving tank reaches high level, select another tank to receive fuel. Verify the selected tank has sufficient ullage. Place it into “Receive” mode.

2. After the new tank’s inlet valve has moved to the “Open” position, move the first recieiving tank into “Settle” mode. Verify the tank’s inlet valve moves to the “Closed” position.

3. Repeat this process until the fuel level in the Settling Tank reaches the “Low” level. Then stop the transfer pump.

Make sure at least one hydrant fuel farm tank is in “Receive” mode at all times when a transfer pump is operating.

7. PERFORM QUALITY CONTROL 1. After settling, sump the receiving tanks in accordance

SAMPLE



with AirBP procedures.

8. PRODUCT RELEASE AND DOCUMENTATION

1. For each hydrant fuel farm tank filled, complete Section 1 of Release Certificates with the following information:

• Batch density at 15°C/20°C • Quantity • Date • Signed by designated product quality inspector.

2. Complete products stock transfer advice note.

SAMPLE



SAMPLE



SAMPLE



SAMPLE



SAMPLE


© Air BP Limited Page 9 of 13 Issued : April 2008 SAMPLE



16” FROM T-23

P-24

DBB-1

G-1

16” FROM T-24

16” FROM T-22

P-22

DBB-4

G-3

P-23

DBB-3 DBB-2

SAMPLE



DBB-8

DBB-6

DBB-9

DBB-7

DBB-10

DBB-5

P-23 SAMPLE



G-2

P-22

CK-8

P-24

P-23

SAMPLE



CT-21

CT-22

F/S-

PF-21SAMPLE


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions and other DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Samples. 5. Record Schedule. 6. Miscellaneous Record Submittals.


1. DIVISION 01, Section “Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedules as basis for Record Schedule.

2. DIVISION 01, Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the record drawings and specifications are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the original Contract documents

3. DIVISION 01, Section "Project Closeout " for general closeout procedures 4. DIVISION 01, Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 5. DIVISIONS 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record

Documents of products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

B. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal at the direction of the COTR.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.



C. Record Samples: Submit Record Samples as specified.

D. Record Schedule: Submit three copies of Record Schedule.

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Submit miscellaneous Record Submittals as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one complete, full sized, set of blue- or black-line prints of the Drawings, applicable shop drawings, and coordination drawings for record purposes. These drawings shall be updated periodically, by the contractor, in CADD to replace the hand mark-ups. The mark-ups shall be preserved for the record.

1. Maintenance of Drawings: Maintain the drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition. Keep drawings available during normal working hours for inspection by the COTR.

2. Preparation: Routinely mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the mark-ups on the record set.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later especially underground structures.

b. Record information in an understandable drawing technique. Ensure mark-ups are legible and reproducible.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check markups before enclosing concealed installations.

3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Notice and RFI. k. Changes made following COTR's written orders. l. Details not on the original Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

4. Mark the Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, insert them into drawing set and assign an appropriate sheet number (one that follows the



number sequence of the contract drawings). Show cross-references to the new sheets on the Drawings. Update drawing index as needed to reflect new sheets.

5. Mark record drawings with red pen that will reproduce clearly. Use different colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or not indicated on the original Drawings.

7. Note applicable Construction Change Notices, Requests for Information, Technical Support Requests, and similar identification numbers, where applicable. Copies of change documentation shall be inserted into the set for clarification but are not a substitute for mark-ups. If identification numbers for documentation are marked on the drawing when no change resulted, indicate "No Change".

B. Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: The contractor may add new sheets with supporting sketches and change documentation instead of marking original sheets when neither the original Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation or if the new sheets can show the changes more clearly or additional space is required for markup information.

1. Assign a number to each new sheet and cross-reference on the appropriate related sheets. 2. Consult with COTR for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to

record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. 3. Integrate newly prepared sheets into Record Drawing sets and update drawing index to

reflect new sheets.

C. Format:

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing. Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location on each sheet.

2. Cover Sheet shall have the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”, Date, Name of Contractor, and signature.

3. Include the following identification on newly prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING." d. Name of COTR and Architect/Engineer (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Initials of person incorporating the change. g. Drawing identification number. (Ixx/Dxx)

4. Organization of Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Prints: Organize newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Include any contract required coordination drawings and applicable shop drawings. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

D. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD DRAWINGS

1. When there are multiple copies of the same sheet with different mark-ups on each copy, the General Contractor is responsible for consolidating all mark-ups onto a single copy of each individual sheet.



2. The information from all RFI's, Change Notices, Design Clarifications, field adjustments, or any other changes, must be noted on the appropriate drawing. These mark-ups must include enough information to clearly show the actual constructed conditions resulting from the change. The information may be drawn onto the drawing, copied onto the drawing or copied onto a new full size sheet. Every change in construction must have RFI’s, Change Orders or similar supplementary documents; therefore they must be copied in original size and attached to the back of the preceding drawing or at the end of the drawing set, as an appendix, as a full size sheet, same in size as the drawing set. Multiple RFI’s, CN’s and other supplemental documents may be copied in each single sheet.

3. All changes made on the drawings shall reference the appropriate RFI, Change Notices, Design Clarification, or details from the contractor prepared shop drawings. If the mark-up is due to a field adjustment, it shall be indicated as such.

4. Additional Sheets such as shop drawings and sheets showing copies of applicable change documentation must be inserted into the set as necessary. Such sheets shall have a title block.

5. Notes and sketches printed by hand are acceptable but shall be neat, legible, and reproducible. Hand lettering shall be 3/8" high minimum.

6. All shop drawings showing information not on the construction drawings (with the exception of concrete embedded steel reinforcement bending drawings and steel reaction and fabrication drawings) shall be marked up and included in the record drawing set. They shall be the same size (changes in scale noted) as all other drawings, include a title block, and clearly indicate that they are record shop drawings. When the shop drawings more accurately show locations and conditions, they may be marked in lieu of referenced on the original drawings. This does not relieve the contractor from the shop drawing inclusion requirements in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are a separate item

7. Include contract required coordination drawings in the record drawing set.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Print marked specifications, addenda, and contract modifications on paper any color but white and ensure that black font is clearly legible on the color chosen. Use the same paper color throughout the project. Use black font for these changes.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the brand name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.



2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. 4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to COTR for

the Authority's records. 5. Where Record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit

marked-up product data as an insert in the manual.

2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet the Authority's personnel at the site to determine which of the samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Authority for record purposes. Comply with the COTR's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Authority's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.

2.5 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. Record Schedule Submittal: Immediately prior to date of inspection for Final Acceptance, submit a copy of the As-built Contract CPM Schedule (if applicable) to the COTR.

B. Mark the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to show actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. This Record Schedule shall be in same format as Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This Record Schedule shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to COTR.

1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Field records on excavations and foundations. b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work. c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. d. Invert elevations of drainage piping. e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.



f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. g. Records of plant treatment. h. Ambient and substrate condition tests. i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. j. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records. k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. l. Documented qualification of installation firms. m. Load and performance testing. n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. o. Leakage and water-penetration tests. p. Fire resistance and flame spread test results. q. Final inspection and correction procedures. r. Summary letter from Special Inspector indicating structural work was completed in

accordance with applicable standards. s. Report of potable water testing. t. Backflow prevention certificates. u. Final inspections of all trades. v. Certificates for piping for fire protection systems and FPS supervisory systems. w. Approvals of Health Department or FDA as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Repair or reproduce torn or dirty sheets. Provide access to Project Record Documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing the Authority's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. DIVISION 01, Section “Application for Payment for cost values assigned to Demonstration and Training requirements.

2. DIVISION 01, Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for pre-instruction conferences.

3. DIVISION 01, Section “Operation and Maintenance Data for preparing and submitting demonstration and training agenda and course of study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit, 90 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection, two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Provide two separate sessions per module. One session per module shall be conducted after normal working hours.

2. At completion of training, submit six (6) complete set(s) of training manual(s) for the Authority's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article provide credentials to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Provide credentials to demonstrate the capabilities and experience of firms required by this Section.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.



D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Submit two copies at end of each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project. Provide 4 references for the Facilitator’s firm that will be used to determine if their training and education has indicated a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in DIVISION 01, Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A videographer who is a trained professional with a

minimum of five years experience in video taping training sessions.

D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in DIVISION 01, Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. Review weather, forecasted weather conditions, and procedures to follow if conditions

are unfavorable for instruction that must occur outside.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with the Authority's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting the Authority's operations. Coordinate with COTR.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training agenda with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by COTR.

D. Ensure that approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals are available prior to conducting any training.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training agenda for each system, sub system, and equipment. Develop an instruction program for equipment that is not part of a system or a subsystem, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Fire-protection systems, including emergency fuel shutoff, fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.

2. Conveying systems, including cranes. 3. Fueling equipment, including fueling equipment and piping. 4. Electrical service and distribution, including panelboards and controls.

B. Training Agenda: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each agenda. Submit to COTR 45 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Hazards/Material Safety Data Sheets. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.



4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training agenda into a combined training manual.

B. Provide conditioned space with tables and chairs for conducting the classroom portion of all training.

C. Provide instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training agenda, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and COTR for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct the Authority's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Furnish an instructor, approved by COTR, to describe basis of each system designed for this project, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. COTR will furnish Contractor with names of training participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with COTR with at least 15 calendar days’ advance notice. 2. Submit a daily training agenda (module) to COTR for review and approval for each

system/equipment no later than 15calendar days prior to the scheduled system equipment startup. After granting the agenda approval, COTR shall provide a listing of dates, times, and places of the training programs for Contractor coordination.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Record instruction of the Authority's personnel in the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. Edit videotape to remove non-instructional conversation. Videographer shall select vantage points to best show equipment, systems, and procedures demonstrated. Provide movie file of each unique training session in its entirety. Record videotapes at the highest recording quality, namely “SP”.

1. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

2. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.



F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to the Authority. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Provisions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. All cast-in-place concrete, incidental construction, and miscellaneous structural concrete items, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Providing services of testing laboratory to design concrete mixes. 3. Furnishing, erecting, and removing forms, falsework, shoring, and bracing required for work

under this Section. 4. Furnishing, fabricating, and placing reinforcing bars and wire mesh reinforcing. 5. Furnishing and placing joint materials and waterstops. 6. Furnishing and placing steel sleeves and inserts required to be installed under this

Specification Section and other Specification Sections. 7. Installation of anchor bolts. 8. Finishing, saw cutting, and concrete repairs. 9. Curing concrete. 10. Cleaning concrete. 11. Concrete equipment pads and concrete curbs. 12. Furnishing, placing, and curing of concrete working mat. 13. Exposed concrete finished surfaces where noted on plans. 14. Concrete Repairs 15. Field Inspection and testing

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. SECTION 312300 - EXCAVATION AND FILL. 2. SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL. 3. SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Part 4 "Contractor's Quality Control Requirements" for additional submittal requirements.

B. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Provisions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections:

1. Product Data: Submit product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement, forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by the COTR. Include descriptive data,



catalog cuts, laboratory test reports, and any other information necessary to show acceptable materials and confirm Contract compliance. Annotate data to show specific products to be used.

a. As a minimum, submit product data for the following:

(1) Concrete Admixtures. (2) Materials for curing concrete. (3) Vapor barrier. (4) Joint sealant. (5) Joint filler. (6) Grouts. (7) Concrete inserts, dovetail slots, steel sleeves, PVC sleeves, and other embedded

items. (8) Adhesive anchors/expansion anchors (9) Liquid sealer.

2. Shop Drawings for Reinforcement: Submit original shop drawings for fabrications, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

a. Shop drawings for reinforcement shall be prepared under the supervision of a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Professional Engineer engaged for this work shall regularly perform such design services, in this discipline, on projects of similar complexity.

b. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". c. Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete

reinforcement.

3. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings and templates showing the location of all anchorage items that are to be cast into concrete.

a. Layout Drawings for Inserts: Provide layout shop drawings for all concrete inserts. These shop drawings shall be at least scale of 1/8-inch= 1'-0", unless otherwise approved by the COTR.

b. Sleeve Coordination Drawings: Provide sleeve coordination drawings in conjunction with coordination drawings per DIVISION 01.

4. Certificates of Compliance: Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance for the following materials showing that the named material conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The manufacturer's certifications shall name the appropriate materials, the publication or publications specified as controlling the quality of that item, and shall state that the item conforms to the requirements specified. Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and shall be signed by the manufacturer's official authorized to sign certificate of compliance, and having legal authority to bind the manufacturer. Furnishing certificates of compliance shall not provide relief of responsibility for providing materials that conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

a. Aggregates. b. Admixtures. c. Reinforcement, including epoxy coating certification.



d. Cement.

5. Concrete Mix Design Data: Not less than four weeks prior to beginning the work, submit concrete mix design data for each proposed mix to the COTR for review and approval. Mix designs shall be calculated and certified by the testing laboratory, and shall indicate the weight of each ingredient of the mixture, aggregate gradation, slump, air content, water-cement ratio and 7-day and 28-day compressive strength test results. Include a complete list of materials, including admixtures and applicable reference specifications. Include statements from concrete supplier(s) that the mix designs will achieve the specified concrete quality as noted in Sections 2.6.

6. Samples of Materials: Submit samples of materials as requested by COTR, including names, sources, and descriptions.

a. At least 30 days prior to production, submit samples from all the sources of the components of the concrete mix to the testing laboratory for testing.

b. Submit samples of cast-in gaskets, reglets, anchorages, and other attachments and accessories as requested by the COTR.

7. Test and Inspection Reports: Provide reports as necessary to ensure that the tests and inspections specified in Paragraphs 4.1.C, 4.1.D, and 4.1.E have been executed.


A. Testing Service and Quality Control Testing During Construction: Except as specifically approved otherwise by the COTR, obtain the services of recognized, independent, commercial materials' testing laboratories and testing services to provide all mix design testing, plant testing, field sampling, in-place testing, and quality control testing required under the Contract Documents and assume all responsibility for the results obtained. The testing services shall be both on and off site as required.

B. Materials' Laboratory: All mix designs, material evaluation tests, field sampling, in-place testing, and quality control testing during construction of the work specified in this Section shall be performed by independent, commercial testing laboratories employed under this Section and accepted by the COTR. The basis of acceptance includes the following:

1. Laboratories performing work in connection with concrete materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM E699.

2. Proof that the laboratory satisfies the requirements of the American Council of Independent Testing Laboratories' Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification.

C. Applicable Publications: The following publications (listed below) form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Publications:

a. M 182 - Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf. b. T 103 - Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing.



2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications:

a. 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy Weight, and Mass Concrete. c. 214 - Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. d. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. e. 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. f. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. g. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. h. 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. i. 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. j. 315 - Manual of Standard Practices for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. k. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. l. 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. A 36 - Structural Steel. b. A185 - Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. c. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. d. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. e. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. A884 - Epoxy Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement. g. B633 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. h. C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. i. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. j. C39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. k. C42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. l. C88 - Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate. m. C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. n. C143 - Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. o. C150 - Portland Cement. p. C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. q. C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. r. C173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. s. C192 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimen in the Laboratory. t. C227 - Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations. u. C231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. v. C260 -Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. w. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. x. C881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. y. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural

Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). z. D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction. aa. D3963 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. bb. E154 - Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapor Barriers Under Concrete Slabs

and as Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces. cc. E329 - Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in

Construction.



dd. E699 - Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance and Evaluation Building Components in Accordance with the Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6.

ee. E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

4. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:

a. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Publication:

a. Placing Reinforcing Bars.

6. The International Building Code/2009.

D. Modification of Applicable Publications: In the ACI and other publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to mandatory, as though the word "shall" was substituted for "should" wherever it appears; references to the "authority having jurisdiction", "Building Official ", the "Structural Engineer", and the "Architect/ Engineer" shall be interpreted to mean the COTR.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver packaged materials to Project Site in original unopened and undamaged containers plainly labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, expiration period for use, mixing instructions for multicomponent materials, and other pertinent data. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, and other causes.

B. Product handling shall comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 301, Chapter 2, Paragraph 25. Reinforcing bars and accessories shall be stored above the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Other materials shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid contamination and deterioration.

C. Damaged or non-conforming materials shall be removed from the Project site and replaced with new materials satisfactory to the COTR at no additional cost to the Authority.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 306R.

B. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305R.

C. Inclement Weather: Under conditions of rain, the placing of concrete shall not commence unless adequate protection is provided to prevent damage to the surface mortar or damaging flow or wash of the concrete surface. During inclement weather conditions concrete shall be provided with adequate protection to prevent damage.




A. Protection Against Freezing: Cover completed work with sufficient temporary or permanent cover as required to protect against possibility of freezing and maintain cover for time period as necessary.

B. Protection Against Splatter: Protect adjacent work, construction, and materials against splatter during concrete placement.

C. Provide lean concrete as may be required during excavations. Refer to SECTION 312300 - EXCAVATION AND FILL for required conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish all forms required or necessary to ensure that completed work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Responsibility for selection of proper form materials, for acceptable construction, alignment, and support of forms, and for proper wetting and precoating of forms, shall rest with the Contractor.

2. Forms shall be furnished in the largest practicable sizes to minimize the number of joints and to conform to the joint system shown on the Contract Drawings or accepted on the approved shop drawings.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: Epoxy coated reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A775.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/l that shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

1. Fabrication tolerances shall conform to ACI 315, Paragraph 4.3.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, for interior, and ASTM A884, Class A for exterior concrete.

C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices required for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.

1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 2. Provide epoxy-coated supports for epoxy coated reinforcing. Epoxy coated supports and tie

wire shall conform to ASTM A884. 3. Provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel

protected (CRSI, Class 2), for exposed to view concrete surfaces, where legs of support are in contact with forms.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I/II.

1. Use one brand of cement through Project, unless otherwise acceptable to the COTR. The alkali content shall not exceed 0.6% unless the manufacturer certifies that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed combination of materials when tested in accordance with ASTM C227.

2. Cement shall be of a well-known brand which has been in successful use for large engineering projects in the United States of America for at least 10 years, and which has an established reputation for uniform character, and which, by the manufacturer's records, show a tendency to maintain high strength of mortar with increased age.

3. Cement shall be set aside in reserve bins or storage to be used exclusively for this Project.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C or F; fly ash shall not exceed 25% of cement content by weight. Blast furnace slag products, if proposed in a concrete mix, shall not exceed 25% of the cement content by weight. The combination of these two products, if proposed in a submitted mix design, shall not exceed 25% of the mix cement content by weight.

C. Class of Concrete

1. All concrete shall be Class B, except where exposed as noted on the drawings.

D. Normal Weight Aggregates: Unprocessed pit-run or naturally mixed aggregates will not be permitted. Naturally mixed aggregates must in every case be screened and washed, and all fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored and handled as specified herein. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8% - 18% for large top size aggregates (1-1/2 inches) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size aggregates (1 or 3/4 inCH) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100.

1. Fine Aggregate shall be natural sand or stone screenings, or a combination thereof. All fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33.

a. Blending of manufactured sand fractions, manufactured sand and natural sand, or of two natural sands, when required to meet the gradation requirements or to obtain workable mix.

2. Coarse Aggregate for concrete shall be crushed stone conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33 and graded #57 stone.

E. Water: Natural, drinkable, with no pronounced taste, odor, impurities, suspended particles, or dissolved natural salts in quantities detrimental to reinforcing or concrete.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Provide one of the following:

1. "Air Mix" or "AEA 92" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "DARAVAIR" (W.R. Grace & Company). 3. "MB-VR" (Master Builders Company). 4. "Sika-AER" (Sika Chemical Corporation).



G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. Structural concrete shall contain a water reducing (plasticizing) admixture. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:

1. "Eucon WR-75" "Eucon WR-91" or "Eucon MR" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Pozzolith 200N" or "Polyheed 997" (Master Builders Co.). 3. "Plastocrete 161" (Sika Chemical Corp.).

H. Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year's duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures. Provide the following:

1. "Accelguard 80" "Accelguard 90" or "NCA" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Daraset" (W.R. Grace). 3. "Pozzutech" (Master Builders).

I. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D, and containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:

1. "Daratard-17" (W.R. Grace). 2. "Eucon Retarder 75" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 3. "Plastiment" (Sika Chemical Co.). 4. "Pozzolith 100XR" (Master Builders).

J. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizers): Comply with ASTM C494, Type F. Use only with prior approval of the COTR. Provide one of the following:

1. "Eucon 37", "Eucon 1037" or "Plastol 5000" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Rheobuild 1000" or "Rheobuild FC100" (Master Builders Co.). 3. "Sikament FF" or "Sikament 300" (Sika Chemical Corp.). 4. "WRDA 19" (W.R. Grace & Co.).

K. High Range Water Reducing Retarding Admixture (Superplasticizers): Comply with ASTM C494, Type G. Use only with prior approval of the COTR. Provide one of the following:

1. "Eucon 537" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Rheobuild 716" (Master Builders). 3. "Daracem 100" (W.R. Grace & Co.).

L. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted.

M. Certification: Written conformance to the above-mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of admixtures will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the COTR.



2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171.

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

C. Vapor Barrier: A flexible, preformed polyethylene sheet membrane having a water-vapor permeance rate no greater than 0.036 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E154, Section 7 and otherwise conforming to ASTM E1745, Class B or higher. Vapor barrier shall be no less than 10 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

D. Epoxy Anchor bolts shall be manufactured by:

1. "Ceramic 6"; Ramset/ Redhead. 2. "Hit Systems"/Hilti. 3. "HSE Systems"; Hilti. 4. Or as acceptable to the Authority.

E. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A563.

1. Nut heads shall be hexagonal.

F. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: The non-shrink grout shall be a factory pre-mixed grout and shall conform to ASTM C1107, "Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)". In addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95% bearing under a 4- by 4-foot base plate. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. "Euco-NS" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Five Star Grout" (U.S. Grout Corp.). 3. "Horngrout" (A.C. Horn, Inc.). 4. "Set Grout" (Master Builders). 5. "Sonogrout" (Sonnenborn-Rexnord). 6. "Supreme" (Gifford-Hill/ American Admixtures).

G. Liquid Sealer/ Densifier: High performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier, odorless, colorless, VOC - compliant, non-yellowing siliconate based solution designed to harden, dustproof and protect concrete floors subjected to heavy vehicular traffic and to resist black rubber tire marks on concrete surfaces. The compound must contain a minimum solids content of 20% of which 50% is siliconate. Provide products from one of the following or alternate as acceptable to the Authority:

1. "Euco Diamond Hard" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Seal Hard" (L & M Construction Co.).



H. Adhesive Anchors: Provide epoxy adhesive anchor cartridges for all locations where drilled-in anchors, rebars or dowels are indicated. Cartridges shall be as the type indicated on the drawings and manufactured by Hilti or as acceptable to the Authority.

I. Epoxy Bonding Compound: ASTM C881, Type V for load bearing applications, Grade 1, Class A (if placement temperature is below 40ºF); Class B (if placement temperature is between 40 and 60ºF); or Class C (if placement temperature is above 60ºF). Provide Grade 1 or 2 for horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical surfaces. Products listed below or alternate as acceptable to the Authority:

1. "Euco 452 Series" (Euclid Chemical Co.). 2. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod Series" (Sika Chemical Corp.).

J. Curing Compounds: Verify that products listed below meet regulations of jurisdiction for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) emissions. Notify COTR if listed products do not comply and submit information about equivalent products that do comply.

1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use a clear acrylic type conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, Class B. Use one of the following as acceptable to the Authority. where concrete surfaces will remain exposed.

a. "Masterkure"; Master Builders. b. "Super Rez Seal"; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Dress & Seal #30"; L & M. d. "Intex"; W.R. Meadows.

K. Steel Plates shall conform to ASTM A36.

L. Concrete Inserts: Provide concrete inserts as shown on the drawings. All concrete inserts shall be galvanized, unless otherwise noted.

1. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face openings of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2. Steel sleeves. 3. PVC sleeves

M. Epoxy Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615 Grade 60, plain steel bars, ASTM A775 epoxy coated.

N. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM D3963.

O. Gravel for infill between foundation slab and platform for use as permanent form shall be crushed stone conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33 and graded #57 stone.



2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Preparation of Design Mixes: Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 211.1. and ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.

B. Mix Design Report: Submit written reports to the COTR of each proposed mix of concrete at least 28 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by the COTR. Review by the COTR shall not be deemed to relieve any obligation to provide cast-in-place concrete in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Design of Mixes: Design mixes to produce concrete of proper workability, durability, strength, maximum density, minimum shrinkage, and permeability. Assume full responsibility for the strength, consistency, water-cement ratio, and handling of concrete.

1. Design mixes to have minimum water content per cubic yard of concrete, cement content corresponding to appropriate water-cement ratio, largest permissible maximum size specified of coarse aggregate available, and optimum percentage of fine aggregate.

2. Use water-cement ratio in accordance with ACI 211.1 and ACI 211.2 as determined by type of structure and exposure condition, or 0.48 and 0.5 by weight, see contract drawings, as approved and supplemented or modified as specified herein.

a. Trial mixtures shall be made based on at least three different water-cement ratios. Trial mixes shall be proportioned to produce concrete strengths specified below. Trial mixtures shall be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. The temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C192. They shall be tested at 7 and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39. From these test results a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength. For each strength of concrete the maximum allowable water-cement ratio shall be that shown by these curves to produce the strength specified.

b. The concrete used in the work shall be produced using a water-cement ratio corresponding to a point on the strength vs. water-cement ratio curve representing a strength, at the design slump, in accordance with ACI 211.1 table 6.3.1 and ACI 318 or at least 25 percent higher than that indicated or specified, whichever is greater. When the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the COTR that his quality control warrants a change in the 25% factor, a change will be permitted. However, in no case shall the concrete strength used in construction be less than 15% higher than that specified or indicated.

c. The approved laboratory prepared mix design proportions shall govern during the progress of the work. If concrete having the required consistency cannot be produced without exceeding the maximum allowable water-cement ratio, the water content shall be decreased so the maximum allowable water-cement ratio is not exceeded.

3. Use approved chemical admixtures, air-entraining admixtures or suitable combinations thereof to improve workability, as well as to reduce water and cement content or minimize shrinkage and permeability of concrete, provided such admixtures do not adversely affect other specified properties of concrete.

a. Admixtures shall be added within a limit of accuracy of ±3% and dispensed to the mixing water by means of an approved, graduated, transparent measuring device before they are



introduced into the mixer. If more than one admixture is to be used, they shall be released into the mixing water in sequence rather than at the same instant. Once established, the sequence of dispensing admixtures shall not be altered. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. However, when the amount of admixture required to give the specified results deviates appreciably from the manufacturer's recommended dosage, use of the material shall be discontinued.

4. Adjust the consistency of concrete mixes to allow for specific placing conditions. Measure materials for concrete by weighing. Separately weigh cement and each size of aggregate, each accurate within 1%. Cement in sacks of ninety-four pounds need not be weighed. Weigh bulk cement and fractional packages. Measure mixing water by volume, and within 1% of quantity required.

5. Air entrain all concrete exposed to weathering in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.4, determined by volume, as per ASTM C173 or ASTM C231.

D. Design Mixes:

1. Design mixes to provide:

a. 2,000 psi normal weight concrete (for working slabs placed at the Contractor's discretion where required by field conditions)

b. 4,000 psi normal weight concrete (for all footings, walls, slabs on grade, and other below grade construction.

2. Provide air-entrainment for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw action in accordance with the following for freshly mixed normal weight concrete. When a high-range water reducer is used, the target air content shall be increased 1%. Interior protected concrete may be air entrained for improved workability.

Size of Maximum Aggregate (inches) Minimum Air Content Percentage 1-1/2 to 2-2/1 5+ or -1.5

3/4 to 1 6+ or -1.5

3. Water-Cement Ratio: All 4,000 psi concrete shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.45. All 5,000 psi concrete shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.40.

E. Normal weight concrete shall have an air dry weight not exceeding 150 pounds per cubic foot.

1. Design 28-day strengths as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted, all walls, footings and slabs on grade, shall be 4000 psi.

2. Splitting tensile strength determined in accordance with ASTM C330 and C496 shall equal or exceed 6.7 by square root of f'c, psi.

3. Design 28 day compressive strength for light weight concrete shall be 4,000 psi, unless otherwise noted.

F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant and at no additional cost to Authority and as accepted by the COTR.

1. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results shall be submitted to and accepted by the COTR before using in work.



G. Admixtures:

1. Use non-chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50ºF.

2. Use air-entraining admixture in all exposed concrete above grade. 3. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit, add a sufficient quantity of

admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified limits. 4. Uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the batch.

H. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Slabs and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. 3. Other Concrete: Not less than 1 inch nor more than 4 inches. 4. Superplasticizers: All concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump of 8 inches, unless otherwise approved by the COTR. The concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 2 to 3 inches, (3 to 4 inches for concrete receiving a "shake-on" hardener), be verified, then the high-range water-reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, supplemented and amended as specified herein.

1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required. Discharge the concrete completely at the site within 1-1/2 hours after the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Do not use concrete with a temperature greater than 85ºF. Begin the mixing operation immediately after the cement has been intermingled with the aggregates and continue without interruption until the concrete is discharged.

2. Ready-Mix Concrete Delivery Tickets: Before unloading at the site, provide a delivery ticket from concrete supplier with each batch delivered to the site bearing the following information:

a. Name of supplier. b. Name of batching plant and location. c. Serial number of ticket. d. Date. e. Truck number. f. Specific job designation, location, complete Washington Dulles International Airport

Project Name, and Project Number. g. Volume of concrete in cubic yards. h. Class and type of concrete. i. Time loaded. j. Type and brand of cement. k. Weight of cement. l. Maximum size of aggregates. m. Source of aggregates.



n. Type of aggregate. o. Weight of coarse aggregate. p. Weight of fine aggregate. q. Maximum amount of water, and amount, if any, which has been withheld at the plant. r. Kind and amount of admixtures. s. Mix design designation. t. Signature of a certified plant batcher, or a certified plant concrete technician, or a

responsible officer or other authorized employee of the concrete supplier. u. Time discharged.

B. Batch Mixing at Site: Comply with ACI 301, Section 4.3.1.1, supplemented and amended as specified herein.

1. Excessive mixing, requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency shall not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency that can be readily placed without segregation. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and dispensing the admixture.

2. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, amount of water introduced, revolution counter readings, aggregate dial settings, the class of concrete delivered, and mixer operator's signature.

3. Delivery tickets shall also indicate the strength of the concrete being delivered, the type of coarse aggregate (i.e., lightweight or stone) and, the exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the delivery truck, and list of admixtures.

C. Hand-Mixed Concrete: Hand-mixed concrete is not allowed.

D. Retempering: Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not be permitted except when concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing. Water may be added only to the extent of the amount which may have been withheld at the plant as shown on the truck batch ticket. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Such water addition shall be contingent upon approval by the COTR, and shall be performed under the supervision and sanction of the Testing Laboratory. If no water has been withheld and slump is too low for proper handling of concrete, HRWR shall be used to bring the slump within the specified range.

1. Concrete that becomes non-plastic, unworkable, or outside the limits of the slump specified shall not be used. Concrete that has set shall be discarded and shall not be retempered.

2. No water shall be added after mixing to concrete containing HRWR (superplasticizer). If loss of slump occurs, HRWR may be redosed at the site as long as a "flash set" has not occurred. Redosage procedures must be discussed and approved by the COTR and the manufacturer at the Pre-Installation/Pre-Pour Meeting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. A pre-installation and a pre-pour meeting shall be held as required in Part 4, "CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL".



3.2 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Vapor barrier shall be placed over gravel drainage layer prior to casting working slab for waterproofing membrane. Place vapor barrier following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade. Place vapor barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturer's recommended mastic and pressure-sensitive tape. Seal vapor barrier at penetrations associated with plumbing and underslab drainage piping.

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. CRSI Requirements: Comply with Concrete Reinforcement Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

1. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Placing tolerances shall comply with ACI 301, Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.6. When splices not shown on the Drawings are approved by the COTR, such splicing shall conform to ACI 318.

2. Place reinforcing bars having assigned positions so that they agree with those given on the shop drawings relating to or calling for the bars.

3. Secure reinforcing bars in place with high-density plastic supporting and spacing devices and metal tying devices. Reinforcement in concrete members that have one or more surfaces exposed, whether painted or unpainted finish, shall be tied with 14-gage soft annealed galvanized wire. Uncoated tie wire in exposed members shall not be accepted.

4. Restore damaged bars to full capacity in accordance with CRSI requirements and in a manner acceptable to the COTR.

B. Cleaning Reinforcement: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Position, Supporting, and Securing Reinforcement: Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required and approved by the COTR. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Comply with ACI 301, Paragraph 5.

D. Installation of Welded Wire Fabric: Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Epoxy Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D3963. Use epoxy coated steel wires to fasten epoxy coated reinforcement.

3.4 FULL TENSILE STRENGTH BAR SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT

A. Location: Provide where indicated on drawings or as shown on approved shop drawings.



B. Preparation of Bars: Bars shall be cleaned of all oil, grease, dirt and other foreign substances and shall be flame dried prior to splicing. Bars may be sawed, sheared or flame cut providing that ends of sheared bars are straightened after shearing and the ends of flame cut bars shall have all slag removed by chipping and wire brushing prior to splicing.

C. Splicing: Except as otherwise noted, splicing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and as approved by the COTR. Testing of splices shall be as specified under Part 4 of this section. Coupler splices shall be secured in forms utilizing nail holes in the integral flange. On metal forms, use screws to set coupler firmly in position.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Contraction Joints: Provide horizontal contraction joints in slabs on grade, and walls by formed or hand tooling to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished. Protect joints from intrusion of foreign matter.

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

2. Hand Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

B. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as to not impair strength or appearance of the structure, and as approved by the COTR. Joints shall be provided by placing concrete in alternate pours not sooner than 72 hours of the placing of contiguous members. Waterstops shall be provided where indicated.

1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep, unless otherwise shown, in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Bonding Construction Joints: Bonding of construction joints shall conform to the requirement specified. In joining fresh concrete to set concrete, the work already in place shall have its surface roughened thoroughly. All loose and foreign material shall be removed. The surface shall be washed and scrubbed with wire brooms when necessary to remove substances that will interfere with bonding. Concrete of the preceding placement shall be thoroughly dampened prior to placement of the next unit of fresh concrete. The surface shall be saturated surface dry and free of moisture.

D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one half of dowel length to prevent bonding to one side of joint.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Setting Anchorage Devices: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use



setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

C. Reglets: Position reglets at proper location, as shown on drawings. Support reglets with formwork as required to ensure that reglets shall be plumb, level and in alignment throughout.

D. Embedded Steel Items and Steel Sleeves: Insure that all required steel members required to be cast into concrete are properly placed and secured. In particular, coordinate the work with SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS and drawing details. All embedded steel items shall be hot dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted.

E. Conform to requirements of ACI-318, paragraph 6.3, "Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete", and as specified below.

F. Install anchor bolts of column baseplates in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice, Paragraph 7.5 and the following: Use setting plate templates. Maintain elevations and plan locations of bolt groups within 1/4 inch of the locations shown on the drawings. Place individual bolts in a bolt group within 1/8 inch of center-to-center dimensions shown on the drawing.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete", supplemented and amended as specified herein.

1. Do not place concrete when sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities shall prevent finishing and curing.

2. Sequence of Placing: Unless otherwise permitted by the COTR, no concrete or structure steel member shall be placed in the superstructure until substructure forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the supporting substructure concrete.

3. Deposit concrete as closely as possible to its final position to avoid rehandling. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete shall be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

4. Force the concrete under and around the reinforcement without displacement. Avoid jarring the forms or placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcement after the concrete has taken its initial set.

5. Do not place concrete which has attained initial set. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates



if the air temperature is greater than 85ºF. Retempering of concrete that has partially set is prohibited.

6. Cast-in-place concrete shall not be mixed, placed, or finished without sufficient natural light or an adequate and accepted artificial lighting system. Do not place concrete when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of finished work.

7. When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 5 feet, the concrete shall be dropped through a tube fitted with a hopper head, or through other approved devices, as necessary to prevent segregation of the mix and splattering of mortar on forms above the elevation of the lift being placed. Concrete containing the HRWR admixture may be dropped 10 feet.

B. Preparation Before Placing: Conform to ACI 301, Section 5.3.1, and as specified

1. Apply temporary protective covering to lower 24 inches of finished work and guard against splattering during placement.

2. Clean mixer thoroughly prior to batching all concrete. Load truck mixers at only the capacity that will ensure a uniform batch at the slump specified. In the event that mixing in any truck mixer is not uniform, the truck load will be rejected and shall not be used on the Project.

3. Handle concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods that prevent separation or loss of the ingredients.

4. Clean transporting and handling equipment at frequent intervals and flush thoroughly with water before and after each day's run.

C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309, supplemented and amended as specified herein.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. Limit duration of vibration at each insertion to time necessary to consolidate concrete and to complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

D. Cold-Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 supplemented and amended as specified herein.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40ºF, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50ºF, and not more than 80ºF, at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Use only the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted.

4. When the ambient temperature is below 35ºF, concrete shall not be placed, unless otherwise directed by the COTR.



E. Hot-Weather Placing: Place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified when hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality or strength of concrete.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at a time of placement below 85ºF. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided; when ice is used it shall be added with the water and counted as part of the water-cement ratio.

2. Concrete shall not have a temperature of more than 85ºF when being placed, unless otherwise directed by the COTR.

3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature shall not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.

4. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 5. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, humidity, or

other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to the COTR.

F. Conveying

1. Comply with ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.2 and ACI 304R. 2. Provide a spout or down pipe and elephant trunk or other appropriate method to prevent

concrete from falling freely through a height greater than 5 feet. Free fall in walls and columns shall not exceed 15 feet.

3. Pumping: ACI 304R and ACI 304 2R. Pumping shall not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping equipment shall not exceed 2 inches. Concrete shall not be conveyed through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Minimum size of pipe diameter shall be 5 inches. Rapid changes in pipe sizes shall be avoided. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be limited to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Maximum size of well-rounded aggregate shall be limited to 40 percent of the pipe diameter. Samples for testing shall be taken at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end.

a. Placing concrete by pumping will be permitted only when authorized by the COTR. Equipment shall be arranged such that no vibrations that might damage freshly placed concrete will occur. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is delivered. If concrete remaining in the pipe line is to be used, it shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of concrete or separation of ingredients.

G. Vibration: Conform to ACI 309. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during and immediately following placement. Consolidation shall be accomplished by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions:

1. Vibration shall be internal to the concrete but not applied directly to reinforcement or framework.

2. Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the COTR.

a. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete containing epoxy-coated bar reinforcement shall have a resilient covering to prevent damage to such reinforcement.

3. The intensity of vibration shall visibly affect a mass of concrete over a radius of at least 18 inches.



4. Provide a sufficient number of vibrators to consolidate each batch immediately after it is placed in forms.

5. Vibrators shall be manipulated to work concrete thoroughly around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners and angles of forms. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of the freshly placed concrete. Vibrators shall not be pulled through concrete and shall be inserted, withdrawn slowly and maintained nearly vertical at all times. Vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to consolidate concrete thoroughly but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that localized area of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not further apart than 1-1/2 times the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.

6. Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations inaccessible to vibrators.

7. External vibrators shall be used on the exterior surface of the forms when internal vibrators do not provide adequate consolidation of the concrete.

8. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. 9. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 10. Limit duration of vibration at each intersection to time necessary to consolidate concrete and

to complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

3.8 EPOXY APPLICATIONS

A. Epoxy Grouting of Bars or Dowels: Where indicated, drill and epoxy grout bars or dowels into the existing structures. Immediately prior to placing the bar, clean hole of dust and other deleterious material with a high pressure air hose.

1. Insert the appropriate size cartridges in bore hole to the full depth. 2. Prepare the end of rebar or dowel which is to be inserted in hole with a 45-degree cut or

90-degree chisel point. Place pointed end of rebar or dowel against epoxy cartridges and drive into bottom of borehole using an electrically or pneumatically operated drill.

3. When bar or dowel reaches the bottom of hole stop drill and release rebar or dowel. Care shall be taken not to disturb the rebar or dowel after installation.

B. Application of Epoxy Bonding Compound: Apply a thin coat of compound to dry, clean surfaces. Scrub compound into the surface with a stiff-bristle brush. Place concrete while epoxy is still tacky. Do not permit compound to harden prior to concrete placement.

3.9 SURFACE FINISHES

A. Surface Finishes Except Floor, Slabs, and Pavement Finishes: Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than one square inch surface area or 0.25-inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective areas, as determined by the COTR. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with extensive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects) that affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval on corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the



allowable tolerances of ACI 347. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified.

1. Not Against Forms (Top of Walls): Surfaces not otherwise specified, shall be finished with wood floats to even surfaces.

2. Formed Surfaces:

a. As-Cast Rough Form (for Surfaces Not Exposed to Public View): Remove fins and other projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height; level abrupt irregularities.

b. As-Cast Smooth Form (for Surfaces Exposed to Public View): Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Remove fins and other projections.

3. Finish of Cast-In-Place Concrete with Specific Tolerances and Surface Requirements: The exposed surfaces of concrete ceilings and soffits where designated shall be made carefully true, smooth, and even. Such surfaces shall be clean and finished without any loose particles remaining thereon so as to present a proper surface in conformance with indicated surface tolerance requirements. Use every precaution and care in placing of such concrete so as to prevent projections or voids occurring on these surfaces. Should projections or voids occur after all precautions have been taken, remove these projections and fill such voids so as to leave the surfaces in the condition above described.

a. In order to secure a satisfactory "true and even surface", the surface of the concrete shall, where required, be rubbed down in an approved manner to the extent necessary, until the desired result is obtained.

b. Washing these surfaces with cement grout will not be permitted. c. The quality of casting and the finished members shall be subject to inspection and

approval by the COTR. Individual members may be rejected because of any of the following:

(1) Variations in the exposed face that substantially deviate from designated standards.

(2) Dimensions not conforming to designated tolerances. (3) Defects that would affect the structural integrity, physical characteristics, or

architectural appearance of the member. (4) Defects that indicate imperfect casting or forming. (5) Defects indicating honeycombed concrete, cracks, casting fractures, exposed

reinforcing steel, or insufficient concrete compressive strength.

d. The COTR will determine whether defective concrete shall be repaired or rejected. Repair of concrete, if allowed, shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the COTR and at no cost of the Authority. Repair to concrete surfaces that will be exposed to view after completion of construction shall be subject to approval by the COTR.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation in alignment, grade, and dimensions of structure from established alignment, grade, and dimensions shown on the Drawings shall be within the tolerances specified in ACI 117-90 in the following table. Tolerances shall be measured from camber lines specified under paragraph



"Camber Computation for Forms", unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Refer to drawings for select dimensions at the APM platform.

1. Variation from plumb: 1/4 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. 2. Local deviation of surfaces: 1/8 inch in 10 feet 3. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in horizontal direction: 1/4 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch

in 40 feet or more. 4. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in thickness, members 4 inches or less: 1/8 inch, -

1/8 inch. 5. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in thickness, members 4 inches to 12 inches:

+ 1/4 inch, - ¼ inch 6. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in thickness: + 1/2 inch, - 1/4 inch

3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protection of concrete shall begin immediately following concrete placement in the formwork and shall continue without interruption during the curing period. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

B. Curing: Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete immediately after removal of forms by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by application of curing compounds, or by combination thereof as herein specified.

D. Moisture Curing: All material, equipment, and labor necessary to promptly apply the moist curing shall be on Project Site before any concrete is placed. Provide moisture curing in accordance with ACI 308 and by the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water,

and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

4. The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept damp by applying water with a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not spray is formed. The moisture from the nozzle shall not be applied under pressure directly upon the concrete and shall not be allowed to accumulate on the concrete in a quantity sufficient to cause a flow or wash the surface.

5. The rate of water application shall be controlled to the maximum rate that can be applied without causing excessive runoff, splattering, splashing, or other water damage. Steps shall be taken to properly protect surrounding work and construction from damage by water or water runoff. The nozzle size, water pressure, sprinkling or wetting equipment, etc., shall be adjusted and regulated so that the optimum quantity of water is applied to the curing area. Care shall be taken to insure that the overlay absorptive cover is clean, thoroughly saturated over its entire area, drained of excess water, and remains flat at all times.



6. Curing shall be done so that the concrete is always moist. Improperly cured concrete will be considered defective. Failure to use, or lack of water to adequately provide for curing requirements shall be cause for immediate suspension of concrete placing operations. Placing operations shall not be resumed until proper procedures are used.

7. Failure to completely cover concrete surfaces with saturated absorptive covers immediately after the concrete has been placed shall be cause for rejection as determined by the COTR,

8. After moisture curing has been properly completed, sprinkling equipment, wetting lines, connections, and appurtenances shall be removed in a manner acceptable to the COTR and the work left in a first class and satisfactory condition. Any damage shall be repaired or the damaged work replaced to the satisfaction of the COTR at no additional cost to the Authority.

9. Cured concrete shall be uniform in color, texture, and finish, with no objectionable form marks or irregularities. Concrete containing plastic shrinkage cracks will be considered defective and shall be repaired or removed and replaced as directed by the COTR at no additional cost to the Authority.

10. Continuous sprinkling coverage shall be complete, shall prevent loss of moisture from the entire concrete surface, and shall prevent early drying shrinkage.

11. Continuous wetting shall be replaced by wetting at regular intervals if, in the opinion of the COTR, expected ambient air temperature could result in freezing of run-off water.

12. Concrete shall not be left exposed for more than 30 minutes during the curing period.

E. Moisture Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practical width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using material and waterproof tape.

F. Provide curing compound as follows:

1. Apply specified curing compound to exterior and exposed interior concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours) and to formed surfaces immediately after forms are removed.

2. Apply uniformly in two continuous operations at right angles to each other by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3. Use dissipating resin type curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with finish or coating material applied directly to concrete, such as liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials. If curing compound is not compatible with coating materials, moisture or moisture-cover curing shall be used.

G. Condition of Cured Concrete: Cured concrete shall be uniform in color, texture, and finish, with no objectionable form marks or irregularities.

3.12 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material shall not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.



B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to the COTR.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete fill in shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment bases, Pads and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases, pads and foundations, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

1. The concrete to be provided beneath the various pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be at locations shown, however, the extent shall be governed by the configuration of the equipment finally selected and approved by the COTR.

D. Non-Shrink Grout: Grout base plates and foundations as indicated using specified non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Where high fluidity and/ or increased placing time is required, use the specified high flow grout. This grout shall be used for all base plates larger than 10 square feet.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to the COTR. Comply with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7, supplemented and amended as specified herein.

1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried.

2. Remove and replace concrete that, in the COTR's opinion, does not satisfy the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar shall match surrounding color.

4. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the COTR. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.



1. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing defects affecting durability of concrete. 3. Correct high areas in surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing

operations by use of the specified underlayment or specified repair topping. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.

6. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with underlayment or repair topping. These compounds shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer.

7. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete.

8. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. 9. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

C. Repair of Concrete Surfaces to Receive Protective Coatings: For concrete surfaces to receive protective coatings, all cracks, bugholes, and other visual defects according to the coating manufacturer's written instructions. Fill with patching mortar, and rub to finish smooth and flush with adjoining concrete surfaces. Patching mortar should be latex-modified, to resist dislodging be abrasive or water blasting.

D. Additional Repair Methods: Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the COTR.

3.15 PROTECTION FROM AND REMOVAL OF STAINS

A. Protect concrete structure from rust staining by structural steel members and from other substances during the work.

B. If staining should occur, remove stains and restore concrete to its original color.

1. Use approved methods, to the satisfaction of the COTR.

C. Remove all dust, dirt, mortar, and other foreign matter that would mar appearance of exposed concrete or prevent bond of applied materials.

1. Use approved methods, to the satisfaction of the COTR.

3.16 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE AND CORRECTIVE WORK

A. Concrete shall be considered defective unless it is structurally sound, properly finished, and within specified tolerances.

B. Replace, strengthen, or correct defective concrete as directed. This work shall be provided at no additional cost to the Authority. The COTR will have the sole authority to decide whether concrete shall be removed and replaced or repaired.

C. Before final acceptance of the work, neatly repair damaged surfaces, corners of concrete and concrete finish.



D. Where surface repairs are permitted, finish damaged areas to smooth, dense, water-tight condition.

E. Where corrective work is unsatisfactory, completely remove such work and replace with new work conforming to specified requirements.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Conform to all applicable provision of DIVISION 01 Section, "Quality Requirements".

B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Plan and Program for the work of this section and is for CQC only. The implementation of the Contractor Quality Control Program does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide the work in accordance with the contract documents, applicable codes, regulations and governing authorities. The CQC plan and program shall include, but not be limited to, the following testing and inspection elements. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the contractor to use to generate his complete CQC Program. The contractor shall engage an independent testing agency to perform the sampling, testing, and inspection specified herein, meeting requirements specified below.

C. Preparation of Design Mixes:

1. Prepare design mixes in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, in a design laboratory acceptable to the COTR. Furnish the designated laboratory with all Contract Documents. Bear all costs in connection with the design of concrete mixes. Separate design mixes are required for each anticipated and/or actual change in mix materials. Each design mix shall be fully identified as to its proposed use.

2. Whenever a change of brand or source of any of the concrete ingredients occurs, additional "preliminary tests" shall be required, at no additional cost to the Authority.

3. Proposed mix designs, prepared on the basis of trial mixes or previous field experience, shall be submitted for review by the COTR. Proposed mix designs, preliminary testing procedures and results shall be subject to the review and approval of a Testing Laboratory and will be of the same type and manufacture to be used on the Project.

4. Mix design reports for concrete specified to be air-entrained shall include air meter test results in accordance with ASTM C173 or ASTM C231.

D. Sampling and Testing:

1. Sampling: ASTM C172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C31 for making test specimens.

2. Testing:

a. Slump Tests: ASTM C143. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture, provided that the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for every truck load or 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.



b. Temperature Tests: Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions (below 50ºF and above 80ºF) at commencement of concrete placement and after every truck load or 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.

c. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39. Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C31. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Provide concrete cylinders for compressive tests not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 10 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 500 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. Double the cylinder collection frequency and number of batches sampled when pumping concrete. If the average strength of the 28-day test cylinders is less than the specified f'c, and a maximum of one single cylinder is less than the specified f'c minus 300 psi, take three ASTM C42 core samples and test. If the average strength of the 28-day cylinders is less than the specified f'c, and two more cylinders are less than the specified f'c minus 300 psi, take six core samples and test. The COTR will determine if concrete represented by core tests is considered structurally adequate. The location(s) represented by erratic core strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and provide new, acceptable concrete. Repair core holes by cleaning holes, applying bonding agent at perimeter of holes and filling completely with nonshrink grout.

d. Air Content: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.

e. Verification of Material Suitability: Prior to manufacture, establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, prepare design mixes that will produce concrete of specified compressive strengths, make preliminary tests in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.8, Method 1 or Method 2, and submit data certifying that proposed concrete ingredients and proportions will result in concrete mixes meeting specified requirements.

f. Concrete Mix Tests: Separate design mixes are required for each anticipated and/or actual change in mix materials.

g. Identification of Design Mixes: Each design mix shall be fully identified as to its proposed use.

h. Review of Proposed Mix Designs: Proposed mix designs, preliminary testing procedures, and results will be subject to review and approval by the COTR.

i. Additional "Preliminary Tests": Whenever either a change of brand or a change of source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs, additional "preliminary tests" will be required and the cost of these tests shall be at no additional cost to the Authority.

3. Load Test: In the event that laboratory tests taken from any part of the structure indicate an apparent failure to develop the ultimate strengths required at 45 days, the COTR may, at his discretion, order load tests or other tests to be made on the portion of the structure affected to determine the adequacy of such portion to sustain the loads for which its members were designed.

a. These tests, if required, will be made at no additional expense to the Authority, and shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318.

b. If the structure, or any part of the structure, cannot pass the load tests, it shall be removed and replaced at no additional expense to the Authority.

4. Standard Deviation: The Testing Laboratory will establish an initial standard deviation for the statistical evaluation of concrete for the Project. The standard deviation will be



established for the Project on the basis of not less than 5 test results from any one class of concrete. Be fully acquainted with all provisions relative to standard deviation and fully comply with the applicable requirements.

a. The Testing Laboratory will maintain a moving average for compressive strength based on the 3 latest 28-day test results to check compliance with specification requirements. The figures for the standard deviation and moving average for strength will be kept continuously up-to-date by the Testing Laboratory on the Project Site, and reported without delay to the COTR.

b. The Testing Laboratory will maintain a continuous up-to-date log in both graphical and tabulated form for each class of concrete.

c. The Testing Laboratory will maintain a moving average for range of test results for quality control purposes as described in ACI 214, Chapter 4, Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5, respectively.

d. The standard deviation shall be assumed to be greater than 600 psi unless another value has been determined from current similar tests, or until it may be calculated from the results of 30 or more job tests. The computation is described in ACI 214.

5. Strength Requirements: Concrete will be considered to meet strength requirements of the Specifications when in compliance with ACI 301, Section 1.7.4, supplemented and amended as specified herein.

E. Inspection:

1. Plant and Field Inspection: Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection at the plant and in the field.

a. Do not allow placement of concrete until the following is inspected and all deficiencies have been corrected:

(1) Placement and alignment of forms. (2) Spacing of reinforcement. (3) Placement of embedded items such as angles, sleeves, PVC weep holes,

waterstops and other structural or nonstructural embedments. (4) Placement of granular base and vapor barrier.

b. Verify that concrete placement procedures are followed. c. Verify that cold-weather or hot-weather placing procedures of concrete are strictly

followed. d. Verify that concrete curing procedures are strictly followed. e. Verify that forms are not removed before time specified. f. Verify that the delivery ticket shall contain the following information:

(1) Name of supplier. (2) Name of batching plant and location. (3) Serial number of ticket. (4) Date. (5) Truck number and batch number. (6) Specific job designation (contract number and location), complete Washington

Dulles International Airport Project Name, and Project Number. (7) Volume of concrete in cubic yards. (8) Strength and type of concrete.



(9) Type and brand of cement. (10) Weight of cement. (11) Maximum size of aggregates. (12) Source of aggregates. (13) Type of aggregate. (14) Weight of coarse aggregate. (15) Weight of fine aggregate. (16) Amount of water added. (17) Maximum amount of water to be added at the site, if any. (18) Kind and amount of admixtures. (19) Mix design designation. (20) Signature of a certified plant batcher, or a certified plant concrete technician, or a

responsible officer or other authorized employee of the concrete supplier. (21) Exact time the cement and aggregate discharged into delivery truck.

g. If upon reaching the job, ready-mix concrete cannot be placed within the time limit stated, or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, the inspector will reject the load for use, and it shall be removed from the Project Site at no additional expense to the Authority.

h. A record of each such inspection shall be submitted to the COTR, covering the quality and quantity of concrete materials, mixing and placing of concrete, concrete formwork, placing of reinforcing steel, and the general progress of the work.

i. Take prompt action to correct assignable conditions that have resulted in or could result in submission of materials, products, or completed construction that do not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Batch Plant Inspection: At the start of the Project and at least once each month until the completion of concrete work, observe and evaluate the following for compliance with the Contract Documents.

a. Condition of batching equipment. b. Condition of materials. c. Type of materials used. d. Mixing time. e. Delivery time. f. Additional pertinent controls: depending on weather, job conditions, and other factors

affecting the work. g. Inspect aggregate stockpile and storage practices. Check for unacceptable material

handling which may cause segregation of contamination within the stockpiles. h. All trucks proposed for use on this project must meet the requirements of Virginia DOT

and NRMCA Quality Control Manual. Inspect trucks used to transport concrete to assure that they are clean and in condition to mix and deliver a uniform mix.

3. Preparation Inspection: Preparatory inspection shall be performed before beginning work and, in addition, before beginning each segment of work. Preparatory inspection shall include a review of the Contract Document requirements, a review and approval of drawings and other submittal data, a check to assure that required control testing has been provided, a physical examination to assure that all materials conform to specified requirements, and a check to assure all required preliminary work has been completed.



a. Check materials upon delivery at job site to determine that they are the material referenced in the report of test results or certificates of compliance.

b. Check materials for proper storage to assure adequate protection against damage and deterioration.

c. Check to assure that required inspections and observations are being performed. d. Review Contract Document requirements with each person involved in performing the

work.

4. Initial Inspection: Initial inspections shall be performed as soon as practical after representative segments of the particular item of work have been accomplished in order to provide visual evidence that the concrete mix and the hydraulic cement concrete operations are producing the desired results.

a. Check for workmanship. Initial inspection for workmanship: Initial inspection for workmanship shall include installation of forms, location and fastening of the reinforcement, composition of concrete vibration, and concrete finishing.

b. Check for defective or damaged materials. c. Assure that damaged and/or defective materials are removed from the site and replaced. d. Batching and Mixing Operations:

(1) Check mixing time. (2) Continually check for assurance of complete control over batching and mixing. (3) Check volumes of material used in mix, mixing time, and other controlling

features. (4) Check moisture content of aggregates frequently. Adjust batch weights in

accordance with variations in moisture content. (5) Check gradations of aggregates frequently. (6) Check the freshly mixed concrete to see that uniformity is maintained. Any

marked change from normal consistency or appearance indicates something wrong with the batching or the mixing, and the concrete shall not be accepted for placement.

(7) Record rejected batches with reasons for rejection. (8) Check slump and entrained air content as often as necessary to confirm visual

checks.

e. Preplacement Inspection: Check all of the following prior to each placement. Do not permit placing to start until all are satisfactory.

(1) Verify that sufficient quantities of all materials are on hand to permit continuous placement and completion.

(2) Verify location, dimensions, alignment and grade. (3) Verify that fill has been compacted. (4) Verify that excavations are free from frost, ice, mud, and standing or running

water. Moisten as required. (5) Check form materials. (6) Check to see that re-used form materials have been reconditioned as required. (7) Verify that construction is mortar-tight, smooth, and free from offsets and

blemishes. (8) Verify that ties and bracing are adequate to maintain position, shape, and

alignment of form.



(9) Verify that temporary spreaders are arranged so as to be easily removable as the concrete rises in the form.

(10) Verify that ties are installed where permitted so that they may be withdrawn or broken off to leave no metal closer than the specified minimum distance from the concrete surface.

(11) Verify that forms have been oiled, wetted, or sealed. Check to see that surplus oil has been removed from forms and that there is no oil on steel reinforcement, on construction joints, or on other surfaces where bonding is required. Verify that forms are clean prior to placing concrete.

(12) Check forms for movement that may occur during placing operations. Verify that measuring devices or reference lines have been set up.

(13) Verify that necessary clean-outs have been provided for in the bottom of the forms.

f. Joints:

(1) Verify that all joints (expansion, contraction, construction) are located as shown on Contract Drawings or otherwise approved by COTR.

(2) Verify that construction joints have been prepared as required. Check requirements for air-water cutting, wet sand-blasting, roughening, wetting, etc.

(3) Verify that filler has been installed and securely fastened in expansion joints. (4) Verify that expansion joints are free from irregularities or debris that would

interfere with free movement. (5) Verify that all arrangements are in place for sawcutting of joints in the slabs

(where specified) within the time indicated in this Specification. If this requires night time work, verify that all arrangements for lighting the work area are in place.

(6) Check all joints that are intended to allow for expansion or contraction. Reinforcement or other fixed metal shall not be continuous through the joint except as noted otherwise on the Drawings or approved shop drawings.

g. Reinforcement:

(1) Verify that all reinforcement is in place in accordance with accepted shop drawings. Check bar diameters, bar lengths, lengths of splices, bar-to-bar spacing and clearances.

(2) Verify that reinforcement has been cleaned of all loose, flaky, rust and scale, dried concrete, oil, grease or other foreign material that would reduce or prevent bond.

(3) Verify that reinforcement is tied and supported securely so that displacement will not occur during concrete placement.

(4) Verify that reinforcement spacers, ties, plastic covered chairs, and supports are as specified or approved.

(5) Verify that epoxy coating on rebars is in good condition.

h. Miscellaneous Preparation:

(1) Verify that satisfactory arrangements have been made to get concrete into all parts of the placement without segregation, loss of ingredients, formation of air pockets or cold joints, vertical drops in excess of permissible limit, "running" of



concrete by means of vibrator, and within the maximum time allowable after mixing.

(2) Verify that conveying equipment (i.e., crane, buggies, truck mixers, pumpcrete pipe, etc.) is capable of reaching all parts of the placement.

(3) Verify that temporary form opening, tremies, chutes, conveyors or other special equipment have been provided as necessary and approved.

(4) Verify that arrangements have been made, and all necessary equipment is on hand and in working order to provide curing and protection (including cold weather protection if needed).

(5) Verify that safe access and footing have been provided by means of ladders, platforms, walkways, and stagings.

i. Assure that damaged or defective work is corrected. j. Note and discuss any deficiencies observed and corrective action to be taken. If

corrective action is to be taken, conduct an additional initial inspection to verify that proper adjustments, corrections, or revisions have been made.

k. Assure that accomplishment of corrective action is in accordance with requirements.

5. Follow-Up Inspections: Follow-up inspections shall be performed daily and more frequently as necessary, and shall include continued testing and examinations to assure continued conformance with Contract Document requirements.

a. Conveying and Placing Operations:

(1) Check requirements pertaining to placing fresh concrete on concrete that has set. (2) Verify that the time between completion of mixing and placement in final

position in the form is within the maximum allowed by the Specifications. (3) Check method of placement in handling of concrete to prevent segregation.

Check height concrete is allowed to drop freely and method used to guide concrete into place.

(4) Verify that concrete is placed rapidly enough to avoid formation of cold joints. (5) Verify that layers are maintained approximately horizontal and not exceeding

specified thickness. (6) Verify that form ties are supports are checked frequently and are adjusted as

necessary to prevent or correct movements of the form. (7) Verify that the rate of placement is within safe limits, such that forms will not be

overstressed by too-rapid rise of fluid concrete. (8) Verify that each layer of concrete is vibrated until fully consolidated. (9) Do not allow vibration to be overdone to the extent of promoting segregation.

Do not allow vibrators to be used to transport concrete in the forms. (10) Check use of hand compaction tools insofar as practical to assist in obtaining

smooth, dense surfaces. (11) Do not allow excessive working of the concrete surface in completing a lift.

b. Removal of Forms:

(1) Verify that care is being taken to assure that concrete is sufficiently hard and strong before removal of forms.

(2) Check to see that forms used for curing are left in place until expiration of required curing period. Forms shall be tightened and maintained "snug" against concrete surfaces at all times while curing.



(3) Verify that spalling, chipping, and gouging of concrete is avoided during the form removal operation.

(4) Verify that safety practices are being completely exercised during the form removal.

c. Finishing:

(1) Check the type of finish required. (2) Verify that defective areas have been repaired and that fins, form marks and

holes are completely removed immediately upon removal of forms. (3) Check the cleaning of areas to be patched. Have honeycomb and rock pockets

been cut back to solid material? Has loose material been removed? (4) Check the requirements for the treatment of areas containing defective concrete. (5) Check surfaces for specified smoothness tolerances. Require rough areas and

high spots to be ground smooth.

d. Check that all work is properly and continuously moist cured for the minimum number of days specified.

e. Correct deficiencies in cast-in-place concrete work that inspections have indicated as non-conforming.

f. Perform additional inspections as necessary to reconfirm any non-conformance of original work and to show conformance of corrected work.

g. Do not allow any addition to, or building upon, non-conforming work unless correction can be made without disturbing the continuing work.

h. Verify that damaged or defective work is corrected properly and approved by the COTR. i. Reinspect replaced materials to determine conformance with Contract Document

requirements. j. Work accomplished shall be considered satisfactory only when inspections show that all

variances have been corrected in an acceptable manner and the completed work is in conformance with the Contract Documents.

k. If, following submission of inspection results, the COTR finds that such inspection reveals a failure of the work to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the deficiencies shall be corrected in a manner approved by the COTR.

l. Although CQC Representative inspection may be considered evidence of conformance, the COTR will determine whether any work deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

m. The final and governing determination of conformance or non-conformance with the Contract Documents will be made by the COTR based on CQC Representative inspection results and COTR inspection after all work of this Section has been fully completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

n. The CQC Representative shall certify inspection results. This certification shall attest that, to the best of his knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of observations and inspections, all cast-in-place concrete work is complete, is free of mistakes and errors, and is in close conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Special Inspections:

1. Authority's agent shall perform the required "Special Inspections" as defined by Section 1704 of IBC 2009.



2. The required "Special Inspections" shall be provided by others. The Contractor shall provide the Special Inspector free access to the work area.

PART 5 - PRE-INSTALLATION AND PRE-POUR MEETING

A. Prior to the commencement of any work under this Section, and when directed by the COTR, meet at the Project Site to review installation and coordination procedures. Among other topics, the coordination meeting shall address scheduling, method and sequence of concrete construction, standard of workmanship, material selection, testing and quality control requirements, detailed requirements of design mixes, placement procedures, off-site batching requirements, coordination of the Work with other trades, preparation of surfaces contiguous with this work adjacent construction, and interferences if any. This meeting shall be attended by any and all trades, manufacturer's representatives, and other interested parties whose work will be affected by the execution of the work under this Section, including the following:

1. COTR. 2. Appropriate Design Consultant(s). 3. Contractor. 4. Concrete Subcontractor. 5. Testing Laboratories. 6. Ready-mix Concrete Supplier. 7. Formwork Manufacturer/Supplier. 8. Admixture Supplier. 9. Any other subcontractor and/or material supplier or manufacturer required.

B. Submittals:

1. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, and printed by the contractor and distributed by him to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.

a. The minutes shall include a statement by the concrete supplier(s) that the mix designs will be able to achieve the specified concrete quality.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Provisions, and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete structural steel work shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. Structural steel work is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice" plus steel work listed below and shown on the structural drawings.

a. Furnishing and erection (bolted and/or welded connection) of all connections to maintain rigid 3D framing of the building system indicated on the project drawings.

b. Furnishing and application of shop paint, and field touch-up paint for designated structural steel items.

c. Furnishing of structural steel items shown in structural drawings required to be built into or form part of work specified under other Sections, to appropriate trade at proper time with complete instructions and templates to facilitate installation of masonry and cold form walls and parapets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Provisions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections:

1. Product Data: Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).

a. Structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties.

b. Structural steel primer paint.

2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be prepared to include the following information:

a. Complete details, schedules, procedures, diagrams, for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members.

b. Details of cuts, connections, and other pertinent data. c. Indicate welds by standard ASW symbols and show size, length, and type of weld. d. Cleaning and painting schedule.



e. Welding requirements.

3. Test Reports, Inspection Reports and Certificates: Provide reports as necessary to ensure that the tests and inspections specified in Paragraphs 4.1.C and 4.1.D have been executed. Submit the manufacturer's certified mill reports that clearly show compliance with the applicable AISC mechanical and physical requirements.

4. Reports:

a. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for all steel furnished. Perform mechanical and chemical tests for all material regardless of thickness or use. No part of the ASTM specifications will be waived without written consent of the COTR.

b. Submit copies of prequalified and other welding procedures in form prescribed in "Structural Welding Code".


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient projection capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.

1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an AISC-Certified Plant as follows:

a. Category: Category, Standard steel building structures. b. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Design of Members and Connections:

1. Verify dimensions at Project Site without causing a delay in the work.

D. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: Comply with the pertinent provisions of the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

E. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.

1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactory passed AWS qualification tests.

2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Applicable Publications: The following publications listed below form a part of the Specification to the extent referenced.

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications: (13th Edition).



a. Manual of Steel Construction ASD (Ninth Edition). b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges - 2005.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A500B - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing. c. A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium

Structural Steel. d. A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building

Framing. e. D1457 - PTFE Molding and Extrusion Materials. f. E164 - Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments.

3. American Welding Society (AWS) Publication:

a. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Publications:

a. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. b. SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.

5. International Building Code 2009.

G. In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the Authority.


A. Deliver materials to Project Site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports.

1. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 Grade 36, ASTM A572/ASTM A992 Grade 50, A500B, or A53.

B. Electrodes for Welding: E 70 XX, Low Hydrogen, Comply with AWS D1.1 Code.



C. Primer for all Structural Steel: Structural steel primer paint shall be one of the following:

1. Carboline Company "Carbocoat GP-818 or 115SG"; 2.0 mils dry film thickness. 2. Ameron Protective Coatings "Ameron 5105"; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. 3. Tnemec Co., Inc. "4-55 Versare"; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

D. Grating:

1. 1. Main Bars: Conform to ASTM A569. 2. 2. Cross Bars: Conform to ASTM A569.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Physical Qualities: Use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.

B. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Workmanship, finish, and fabrication tolerances shall conform to AISC standards except as modified in this Section and with additions as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Fabrication, welding, workmanship, and finish shall be equal to the best practice in modern structural and bridge shops.

1. Where AISC standards allow alternate methods of fabrication, the method used shall be that which produces the higher quality of workmanship.

C. Manual Oxygen Cutting: Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch.

D. Connections: Weld connections, as indicated.

E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Markings: Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark. Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field connection shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not locate erection markings on areas to be welded or on surfaces of steel that will be exposed in the completed structure.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. After inspection and before shipping, clean all steelwork to be painted.

1. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, spatter, slag, and flux deposits.

B. Clean exterior exposed structural steel to be shop painted in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specification No.6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.



C. Clean all surfaces not otherwise specified in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specification No.3 Power Tool Cleaning.

D. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint to a minimum dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer's instructions. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. No painting shall be done when the surface temperature of the steel is below the temperature at which condensation will occur. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to any surface in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. A pre-installation meeting shall be held as required in PART 4, "CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL".

3.2 ERECTION

A. Surveys:

1. Examine the conditions under which the work is to be erected. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Consider all conditions that will affect the satisfactory erection of the indicated structural steel systems. Field verify existing construction requirements, existing conditions, restrictions, and clearances that affect structural steel reinforcing erection. Assume responsibility for all errors of detailing and fabrication and for the correct fitting and erection of the structural systems.

3. Visit the premises and advise the COTR of any discrepancy or conflicts. If any conflicts occur, necessitating departures from the Contract Drawings, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the COTR for written approval before performing any work where conflicts exist. Departures shall not be made without the prior written approval of the COTR. Approved departures shall be executed at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to safely complete work.

C. Field Assembly: Set steel reinforcing accurately with existing frame member that needs reinforcing. Align and adjust reinforcing before permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. All work shall be installed in correct location, alignment, and plumb to true planes. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances, supplemented and amended as specified in 3.3 "ERECTION TOLERANCES".

D. Connections: Connections not detailed shall be designed in accordance with AISC.



E. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing.

F. Openings in structural steel required in field:

1. Make no openings without the specific written approval of the COTR. 2. Openings in structural steel shall be cut and/or reinforced only by structural steel Contractor,

and only with specific prior written approval of the COTR.

G. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1/5 mils.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Individual pieces shall be plumbed, leveled and aligned in accordance with the requirements of the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS


A. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Plan and Program for the work of this section and is for CQC only. The implementation of the Contractor Quality Control Program does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide the work in accordance with the contract documents, applicable codes, regulations and governing authorities. The CQC plan and program shall include, but not be limited to, the following testing and inspection elements. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the contractor to use to generate his complete CQC Program. The contractor shall engage an independent testing agency to perform the sampling, testing, and inspection specified herein, meeting requirements specified below.

B. Testing:

1. Field Tests: Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing.

2. Certified Test Reports: Certified copies of all mill test reports required by indicated ASTM specifications. Mill test reports shall prove that structural steel materials have been tested in accordance with required procedures and that the materials comply with all applicable requirements.

a. Provide certified mill analysis covering all structural steel materials delivered to the work.

3. Correction of Deficiencies Indicated by Test Reports as Not in Compliance with Requirements: Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Additional tests shall be performed, at no expense to



the Authority, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work.

4. Weld Testing:

a. Nondestructive Testing: AWS D1.1. Test locations shall be as selected by the COTR. If more than 20% of welds made by a welder contain defects identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested by Radiographic or Ultrasonic testing, as approved by the COTR, and at no expense to the Authority. When all welds made by an individual welder are required to be tested, Magnetic Particle testing shall only be used in areas inaccessible to either Radiographic or Ultrasonic testing. Retest defective areas after repair.

b. Testing Frequency: Provide the following types and number of tests.

(1) Fillet Welds: 25% of all fillet welds shall be inspected for 100% of their length using Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant methods. Those welds that are to be inspected shall be indicated on the shop drawings, and are subject to the COTR's approval.

C. Inspection:

1. Visual Inspection of Welds: AWS D1.1. Section 6. Provide AWS-certified welding inspectors for fabrication/erection inspection, testing and verification inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds, including fillet weld end returns.

2. Correction of Weld Deficiencies: Correct weld deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Check that unacceptable welds are removed, rewelded, and refinished.

3. Additional Inspections: Perform additional inspections as necessary to confirm any non-compliance of original work, to show conformance of corrected work, to show that all variances have been corrected in an acceptable manner, and to verify that completed structural steelwork, including materials, installation, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, and testing, meet the Contract Documents' requirements.

D. Special Inspections:

1. Authority's agent shall perform the required "Special Inspections" as defined by Section 1704 of IBC 2006.

2. The required "Special Inspections" shall be provided by others. The Contractor shall provide the Special Inspector free access to the work area.

4.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Prior to the commencement of any work under this Section, and when directed by the COTR, meet at the Project site to review installation and coordination procedures. Among other topics, the coordination meeting shall address scheduling, preparation of surfaces contiguous with this work, adjacent construction, and interferences, if any. This meeting shall be attended by any and all trades, manufacturer's representatives, and other interested parties whose work will be affected by the evolution of the work under this Section.



B. Submittals:

1. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, and printed by the contractor and distributed by him to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.



ALUMINUM 054500 - 1

SECTION 054500 - ALUMINUM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following aluminum-fabricated items:

1. Structural shapes and plate. 2. Pipe handrail and guardrails. 3. Grating and treads. 4. Tread plates. 5. Ladders. 6. Nuts and bolts.


1. Steel Grating: SECTION 051200. 2. Steel Floor Plates: SECTION 051200.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards:

1. Aluminum Association (AA):

a. Aluminum Design Manual.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A14.3 - Fixed Ladders - Safety Requirements.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. c. B308 - Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. d. B429 – Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. e. B632 - Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. f. F467 - Nonferrous Nuts for General Use. g. F468 - Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use.

4. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.


ALUMINUM 054500 - 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Handrails: A single pipe supported on a guardrail or brackets from a wall, as on a stairway or ramp, to furnish persons with a handhold in case of tripping.

B. Guardrails and railings: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening, ramp, platform, runway, or stairway to prevent falls of persons. The top member of a guardrail serves as a handrail. The terms handrails, guardrails, and railings may be used interchangeably.

C. Toeboards: A vertical barrier at floor level erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening, platform, runway, or ramp to prevent falls of materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 01.

B. Include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Specifications. 2. Fabrication and erection drawings including sizes, connections, anchorage, size and type of

fasteners, and accessories. 3. Catalog cuts. 4. Structural computations and metal properties. 5. Manufacturer’s assembly and installation instructions. 6. Manufacturer’s maintenance manual.


A. Guardrails and handrails shall be the product of a company normally engaged in the manufacture of pipe railings.

B. Inspection: Material and workmanship will be subject to inspection in the shop and field.

C. Welder Qualifications:

1. Welders shall be previously qualified by passing the tests prescribed in the AWS D1.2 Qualification Section and the AA Qualification Standard for Structural Welding of Aluminum, or by passing such other tests as COTR may accept.

2. Welders shall have been tested within the past 12 months, and their qualification will be considered as remaining in effect unless the welder has not engaged in a given process of welding for a period exceeding 6 months.

3. Submit two certified copies of the qualification records as evidence of qualification to the above-mentioned codes.


A. Protect aluminum Work from abuse, staining, or damage during shipment, storage, erection, and installation.


ALUMINUM 054500 - 3

B. Store in a manner to prevent warping of materials.

C. Materials shall be properly packaged to prevent scratching and denting during shipment, storage, and erection. Maintain protective wrapping until Project is completed.

1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Guardrails, handrails, and ladders shall be designed and fabricated in strict compliance with the requirements of the IBC 2009.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate all aluminum to conform to AA specifications, codes, and standards.

B. Standard tolerances of all aluminum members shall conform to AA Aluminum Design Manual.

C. Fabricate all materials free of blemishes, tool marks, burrs, and other defects.

D. Shop-fabricate insofar as possible.

E. Welding:

1. Conform to AA Aluminum Design Manual, and AWS D1.2. 2. All welding shall be performed using inert-gas, shielded arc, or resistance welding processes.

Welding processes that require welding flux shall not be used. 3. All welding shall be accomplished using filler Alloy 4043. 4. Contractor shall perform fabrication inspection of welds in accordance with AWS D1.2 to

determine the acceptability of welds. Inspection shall be performed by an AWS Certified Welding Inspector qualified in accordance with AWS Standard for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors.

5. Joints found to be defective shall be repaired by rewelding.

2.2 STRUCTURAL SHAPES AND PLATE

A. Conform to ASTM B209 and ASTM B308.

B. Conform to AA Aluminum Standards and Data.

C. Shall be aluminum Alloy 6061-T6, unless otherwise specified.

2.3 NUTS AND BOLTS

A. Conform to ASTM F467 and F468.

B. Bolts shall be aluminum Alloy 6061-T6.


ALUMINUM 054500 - 4

C. Nuts shall be aluminum Alloy 6061-T6 or 6262-T9.

D. Washers shall be aluminum-clad steel Alclad 2024-T4 or approved equal.

2.4 HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS

A. Acceptable Products/Manufacturers:

1. "TUFrail" by Thompson Fabricating, Birmingham, AL. 2. "Interna-Rail" by The Wagner Companies, Milwaukee, WI. 3. "Wesrail II" by Moultrie Manufacturing Co., Moultrie, GA.

B. Rails and Posts:

1. Conform to ASTM B221 or B429. 2. 1-1/2-inch nominal diameter (1.9-inch o.d.), aluminum Alloy 6105-T5 with clear anodized

finish Aluminum Association designation M32-C22-A41 (215-R1). Pipe schedule shall be as required by design but shall be not less than Schedule 40.

C. Fittings and Accessories:

1. Floor flanges where indicated. 2. Wall brackets with 3-inch minimum clearance between handrail and finish wall surface and

as indicated for ladder rails. 3. Fasteners and anchors of stainless steel and of type as required by substrate.

D. Toeboard (Kick Plate):

1. Toeboard shall conform to OSHA standards. Toeboard shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and shall be an extrusion that attaches to the posts with clamps that will allow for expansion and contraction between posts. Toeboards shall be set 1/4 inch above the walking surface. Toeboards shall be provided on handrails where shown on Drawings. Toeboards shall be shipped in stock lengths for field installation. Toeboard on all exposed sides (except at the entrance to the opening), with passage through railing provided with a self-closing swinging gate. Self-closing gates shall be as manufactured by FabEnCo, Inc., Houston, TX or approved equal. All hardware shall be stainless steel.

a. Two-rail systems - Model A82-24. b. Three-rail systems - Model XL82-24.

2.5 GRATINGS AND TREADS

A. Grating:

1. Conform to ASTM B221, aluminum Alloy 6061 or Alloy 6063, mill finish. 2. Standard rectangular-type, pressure-locked. (Swage-locked crossbar construction is not

acceptable.) 3. Main Bars: 3/16 inch thick (unless otherwise noted) and spaced not more than 1-3/16 inches

o.c. Depth as indicated, dovetail slotted to receive cross bars.


ALUMINUM 054500 - 5

4. Cross Bars: Of depth as required by main bars, spaced not more than 4 inches o.c. Top surface shall be flush with top of main bars.

5. Configuration of top surface of main bars unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exterior - Exposed to Weather: Serrated.

6. Provide with aluminum "saddle clip"-type fasteners and stainless steel bolts.

B. Treads:

1. Manufacturer’s standard rectangular, pressure-locked type with corrugated nosing, aluminum Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.

2. Main Bars: Depth as indicated by 3/16-inch thickness, spaced not more than 1-3/16 inches o.c.

3. Crossbars: Spaced not more than 4 inches oc. 4. Top Surface of Grating Tread: Serrated. 5. Provide with stainless steel bolts.

C. Fabrication:

1. Main bars shall be vertical within a tolerance of 0.10 inch per inch of depth. 2. Longitudinal bow (before fastening to supports) shall be less than 1/200 of the length. 3. Transverse bow before fastening to supports shall be less than 3/8 inch in 3 feet. 4. Crossbars shall not deviate from a straight line perpendicular to the main bars by more than

3/16 inch in 3 feet. 5. Crossbars shall match crossbars of adjacent sections to form a continuous pattern of straight

lines. 6. Panel width and length tolerances shall be +1/4 inch. 7. Provide all openings in grating indicated and as required for installation of all piping, wiring,

and equipment installed under this Contract. 8. Band all openings 4 inches and larger with a bar same size as main bearing bar. Weld to each

bearing bar with a 3/16-inch fillet weld, 3/4 inch long. Tack weld to all crossbars. 9. Trim-band all locations as follows:

a. Open end of grating at head of a ladder. b. Grating edges that are not perpendicular or parallel to the main bars. c. Grating panels with four crossbars or less. d. Other locations as indicated.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Gratings and treads shall be as manufactured by one of the following:

a. Alabama Meals Industries Corporation, Birmingham, AL. b. BarnettBates Corporation, Joliet, IL. c. Ohio Grating, Canton, OH. d. Grating Pacific, Los Alamitos, CA e. IKG Industries, Aberdeen, NJ.

2.6 TREAD PLATES


ALUMINUM 054500 - 6

A. Conform to ASTM B632, Alloy 6061-T6, mill finish.

B. Thickness as indicated with surface deformations of the 4-way type.

C. Fasten in place with 1/4-inch countersunk stainless steel screws spaced 24 inches o.c. with a

minimum of one screw located at each corner of a panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Conform to applicable standards of AA.

B. Protect aluminum at contact with other metals, grout, and concrete by a heavy brush coat of alkali-resistant bituminous coating, or a nonporous tape or gasket. Coating is not required for aluminum in contact with stainless steel bolts. Apply bituminous coating at 15-mil minimum dry film thickness and which shall be one of the following:

1. Carboline - Bitumastic No. 50. 2. Tnemec - H.B. Tnemecol 46-465.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Aluminum Handrail and Guardrail:

1. Space posts a maximum of 6 feet-0 inches o.c., except where otherwise indicated. 2. Install posts as indicated. 3. Install toeboards (kick plates) and anchor to each post with clamps and bolts. Allow 1/4-inch

space between bottom of toeboard and top of floor surface. 4. Install handrail to walls with brackets spaced not greater than 6 feet-0 inches o.c., except

where otherwise indicated.

a. For concrete, use anchors as indicated. b. For hollow masonry walls, use toggle bolts having square heads.

5. Protect aluminum after cleaning with a clear methacrylate lacquer coating.

B. Grating and Treads:

1. Space fasteners as required to overcome irregularities and maintain grating contact with supports. Minimum anchorage of each panel will be two fasteners at each end and one fastener at each intermediate support.

2. Unless indicated as fixed, fasten grating with clips using (stainless steel bolts) (welding studs).

3. Bolt stair treads to stringers with a minimum of two 3/8-inch stainless steel bolts at each end of tread.

4. All grating shall be removable unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ladders: Install as indicated. Ladder shall be securely fastened to wall or substrate.


ALUMINUM 054500 - 7

D. Tread Plates: Install as indicated and as specified in PART 2, this Section.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean all aluminum surfaces after installation free of smudges, stains, or other deleterious substances.



SHIPPING CONTAINERS 133423.26 - 1

SECTION 133423.26 - SHIPPING CONTAINERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract and Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes providing and installing a fabricated shipping container on pad, and all related items necessary to complete the Work indicated or specified.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

a. 668 - Series 1 Freight Containers - Classification, Dimensions, & Rating

b. 830 - Terminology in relation to freight container (1984)

c. 1161 - Series 1 freight containers - Corner fittings Specification (4th edition -1984)

d. 1496-1 - Series 1 freight containers - Specification and testing. Part 1: General cargo containers for general purposes (5th edition - 1990)

e. 1894 - General purpose series 1 freight containers - Minimum internal dimensions (2nd edition - 1979)

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Certification: Provide certification that the shipping container meets the requirements of the applicable ISO standards.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications and catalog cuts including overhead coiling doors and hardware.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Intercon Modular, LLC 2. ConGlobe Industries 3. Williams Scotsman, Inc. 4. Or as acceptable to the Authority.

2.2 40' ISO SHIPPING CONTAINER

A. The shipping container shall be a 40' x 8' x 8'-6" ISO-1AA type steel dry container with ventilation.

B. The container shall be constructed to be capable of being handled without any permanent deformation under the following conditions:

1. Lifting, full or empty, at top corner fittings vertically by means of spreaders fitted with hooks, shackles or twistlocks.

2. Lifting, full or empty, at bottom corner fittings using slings with terminal fittings at any angles between vertical and 30 degrees to the horizontal.

C. Materials:

1. General: The following materials shall be used in the construction of containers: 2. Part Specification:

Parts Materials a. Side panels

Roof panels Door panels (if provided) Front panels Top side rails Cross members Gooseneck tunnel

Anti-Corrosive Steel: CORTEN A, SPA-H, B480 or equivalent Y.P.: 35 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 49 kg/sq. mm

b. Door header (upper and lower) Front top end rail (upper) Front bottom end rail (lower) Door horizontal frames Floor center rail Roof top corner protection plate Floor guide rails

Structural Steel SS400 Y.P.: 25 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 41 kg/sq. mm



Parts Materials c. Bottom side rails

Rear corner posts (outer and inner) Front corner posts Door sill

Rolled high tensile steel SM490A Y.P.: 33 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 50 kg/sq. mm

d. Front top end rail (lower) Front bottom end rail (upper) Door vertical frames

Structural steel rectangular pipe. STKR400 Y.P.: 25 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 41 kg/ sq. mm

e. Door locking bars (if provided) Structural steel round pipe. STK41 Y.P.: 24 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 41 kg/sq. mm

f. Corner fittings Casted weldable steel. SCW49 Y.P.: 28 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 49 kg/sq. mm

g. Locking gear cams and keepers Forged weldable steel. S20C Y.P.: 23 kg/sq. mm T.S.: 45 kg/sq. mm

h. Door gasket

EPDM

i. Floor board

Hardwood plywood, 19-ply

j. Ventilator ABS resin labyrinth type

*Note: Y.P. - Yielding Point T.S. - Tensile Strength

D. Ventilator:

1. Each container shall have two labyrinth type small plastic ventilators. 2. Each ventilator shall be fixed to the right hand upper part of each side wall by three 5.0 mm

dia. steel huck bolts in accordance with TIR requirements after drying of top coating, and caulked with silicone sealant around the entire periphery except underside to prevent the leakage of water.

E. Construction:

1. The container shall be constructed with steel frames, fully vertical-corrugated steel sides and front wall, vertical roll-up steel door at rear end, die-stamped steel roof and corner fittings.

2. All welds of exterior including the base frames shall be continuous welding using CO2 gas, but inner part of each bottom side rail will be fastened by staggered stitch welding.

3. Interior welds - when needed - shall be stitched with a minimum length of 15 mm. 4. Gaps between adjacent components to be welded shall not exceed 3 mm or the thickness of

the parts being welded. 5. Chloroprene sealant shall be applied at periphery of floor surface and inside unwelded seams,

butyl sealant shall be used to caulk at invisible seam of floor joint area and between door gasket and frame.



6. The wooden floor shall be fixed to the base frames by zinc plated self-tapping screws.

F. Surface Preservation:

1. Surface preparation:

a. All steel surfaces - prior to forming or after - shall be fully abrasive shot blasted conforming to Swedish Standard SA21/2 with near white metal surface, and anchor profiles of 25 to 30 microns to remove all rust, dirt, mill scale and all other foreign materials.

b. All door hardware shall be hot-dipping zinc galvanized with approximately 75 microns thickness.

c. All fasteners such as self-tapping screws, hinges, cam keepers, and lashing fittings shall be electro-galvanized with approximately 13 microns thickness.

2. Primer coating:

a. Prior to assembly:

(1) All steel surfaces shall be coated with 10-15 microns thick two-pack polyamide cured zinc rich epoxy primer immediately after shot blasting, and then dried in drying room.

b. After assembly:

(1) All weldments shall be shot blasted to remove all welding fluxes, spatters, burnt primer coatings caused by welding heat, and other foreign materials. All blasted weldments shall be coated with zinc rich epoxy primer.

(2) Exterior of assembled container shall be coated again 110-15 microns with zinc rich epoxy primer and again 40 microns epoxy primer prior to top coating.

(3) Interior and base of assembled container shall be coated again 110-15 microns with zinc rich epoxy primer.

3. Top coating:

a. After drying of primer, exterior of container shall be coated again with high build chlorinated rubber paint and interior will be coated again with polyamide cured epoxy resin based high build coating.

b. The dry film thickness of top coating shall be 40-50 microns for the exterior and 45 microns for the interior.

4. Under coating: After completion of flooring, all the understructures and floor shall be coated with minimum 190 microns dry film thickness underseal coating.

5. The total dry film shall be (Microns):

EXT. INT. BASE Zinc rich primer 10-15 10-15 10-15 Epoxy primer 40 Epoxy high build coating 50 Chlorinated rubber coating 40-50 Underseal 190



Total (Min.) 100 70 200 Roof 100

6. Paint: Paint shall meet ISO requirements and shall be the standard paint used for shipping containers manufactured by the supplier. Color of the top coat shall be Dulles Grey.

7. Guarantee:

a. Structure: All the containers shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to be free from defects in materials, workmanship and structure for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance of the container by the buyer.

b. Painting:

(1) The paint system coated on the container surface shall be guaranteed to be free from corrosion and failure for a period of three (3) years from the date of acceptance of the container by the buyer.

(2) Corrosion is defined as rusting which exceeds RE3 (European Scale of degree of Rusting) on at least ten (10) percent of the total container surface, excluding that resulting from impact or abrasion damage, contact with solvents or corrosive chemicals and abnormal use.

(3) If the corrosion exceeds RE3 as defined above within the guarantee period, inspection of the corrosion shall be carried out by the buyer, container manufacturer, and paint manufacturer to detect the cause. As the result of the inspection, if it is mutually agreed and accepted that the corrosion has been caused by the defective paint quality and/or poor workmanship, container manufacturer and/or paint manufacturer shall correct the defect on their accounts.

2.3 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR

A. Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and

outward.

B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: 1. Design overhead coiling door components and operator to operate for not less than 10,000

cycles.

C. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying

with ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating. 2. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat and as follows:

a. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 0.028 inch.

D. Endlocks: 1. Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment

and resistance against lateral movement.



E. Windlocks: Malleable-iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon, as required to comply with wind load.

F. Bottom Bar: 1. Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, either stainless-steel or

aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats. a. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible

vinyl, rubber, or neoprene, between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion bumper for interior door.

G. Curtain Jamb Guides: 1. Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or channels and angles of material and finish to

match curtain slats, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

H. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 1. Fabricate steel hoods, for steel doors, of not less than 0.028-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized

steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A653. 2. Exterior Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying joint

sealant.

I. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Provide welded assemblies of the following sheet metal: 1. Fabricate of not less than 0.064-inch-thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc

coating, complying with ASTM A653.

J. Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal, but not less than 0.078 inch thick.

K. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and at top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. 1. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of

flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

L. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door. 1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches high.

M. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

N. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Locking Bars:

a. Single-jamb side, operable from outside only.



O. Provide manual operators, unless electric door operators are indicated. When not shown, provide chain-hoist operator unit.

P. Push-up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.

Q. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

R. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.

S. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

T. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

U. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain.

V. Factory Primer for Field Finish: Apply primer, compatible with field-applied finish according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Apply to ferrous surfaces except zinc-coated metal.

W. Thermoset Finish: Apply baked finish consisting of primer and thermosetting topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.

X. Powder-Coat-Applied Finish: Apply powder-coat-applied finish consisting of primer and topcoat(s) according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.

Y. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and anchor shipping container at the location shown on the plans. Level unit for proper operation of doors.

END OF SECTION 133423.26


FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 211000 - 1

SECTION 211000 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping:

1. Manual dry-type, fuel tank cooling water spray system.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards (Latest Edition, Except as Noted):


a. A53/A53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. b. A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. c. A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. d. A536 - Ductile Iron Castings. e. A733 - Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples. f. A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe for Fire Protection Use.

2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. b. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. c. C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. through 48 In. (75 mm through 1200

mm), for Water and Other Liquids. d. C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. e. C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. f. C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 In. through 24 In. (75 mm through 610 mm) and

54 In. through 64 In. (1,400 mm through 1,600 mm), for Water Service. g. C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. h. C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. i. C652 - Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.

3. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. A5.8 - Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

4. ASME International (ASME):

a. B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).



b. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. c. B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. d. B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. e. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

5. FM Global:

a. Fire Protection Approval Guide.

6. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSSSP):

a. 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. b. 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder-Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 1999. b. 15 - Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, 1996.

8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a. 199 - Automatic Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service. b. 213 - Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire Protection Service. c. 486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors. d. Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Manual Dry-Type, Fuel Tank Cooling Water System: Has permanent water supply. Piping is dry. Water must be pumped into spray piping to satisfy demand.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article in accordance with DIVISION 1 requirements.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialty fittings.

2. Pipe hangers and supports.

C. Record Drawings:

1. Fire Suppression Submittal Drawing Requirement: Project record (as-built) fire suppression system drawings shall be produced using CADD systems. Detailed project record drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Authority per the requirements of DIVISION 1. The drawings shall show the system as installed.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test reports.




A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing modifications to existing fire-suppression systems.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 15.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Threaded-End, Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.

1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106,

Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated. Include ends matching joining method.

B. Grooved-End, Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved ends.

1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:

a. Manufacturers:

(1) Central Sprinkler Corp. (2) Ductilic, Inc. (3) National Fittings, Inc.



(4) Victaulic Co. of America.

b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping system.

B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180ºF (82ºC). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products and Systems, Inc. b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225ºF (107ºC).

1. Manufacturers:

a. Lochinvar Corp.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225ºF (107ºC).



1. Manufacturers:

a. Victaulic Co. of America.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLIES

A. During the course of construction the Contractor shall take proper steps to protect the potable water supply facilities from contamination within the limits of construction. Piping inside Fire Water Pump House upstream of backflow preventers is potable.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 FUEL TANK COOLING SPRAY SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Type System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working Pressure:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, Schedule 40 steel pipe; galvanized, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved-end, galvanized, Schedule 40 steel pipe with square-cut- or roll-grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to SECTION 210500 for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.

1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping materials.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges. 3. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.



3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with COTR before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

C. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections.

E. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

F. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install spray system piping according to NFPA 15.

G. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.

H. Drain dry-type fuel tank cooling spray system piping.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

1. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 2. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, and accessories.



A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 1 SECTION – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Flush, test, and inspect spray systems according to NFPA 15, "System Acceptance" Chapter. 3. Report test results promptly and in writing to COTR and authorities having jurisdiction.



4.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of fire-suppression water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 211000


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 MINERAL INSULATED CABLE

A. Manufacturers: As required to match existing cables and splices, and subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Pyrotenax.

B. Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI with ground wire.

C. Provide mineral insulated (MI) cable with two hour fire rating at 1,850ºF.

2.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI as indicated.

B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



A. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

B. Prior to energizing, check all installed feeders and building service wires and cables with insu-lation megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are ful-filled. Record and submit all field test data. Megger 300V cables with 500Vdc megohm meter between each conductor and ground. Megger 600V cables with 1,000Vdc megger between each conductor and ground. Also, megger between adjacent conductors. Megger cables after installation (not on cable reel) with cables disconnected at both ends. The values must be ap-proximately as follows:



Conductor Size Resistance (AWG or MCM) (Megohms-1,000 ft.) 14-8 200 6-2/0 100 3/0-500 50

C. Do not test wires or cables with an AC test set.

4.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01, SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IL1102 FSTF INBOUND FILTRATION FINAL SUBMITTAL 4 MAY 2012

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Control-circuit conductors. 2. Identification products.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS


1. Encore Wire Corporation. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Southwire Company.



B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway complying with UL 83.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway complying with UL 83.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems". 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.



8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

9. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 10. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

3.3 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 14 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and labeling of all components.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



A. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

B. Do not test wires or cables with an ac test set.

4.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01, Section "Quality Requirements."



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.



3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;

1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Flexible raceway runs.



C. Heat-Tracing Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



A. Test ground resistance at each rod (before interconnection to other rods), the entire ground rod-ground cable counterpoise system before it is bonded to building steel and the equipment listed below. Test shall be witnessed by the COTR. Test with a D.C. three-point earth ground resistance tester in accordance with IEEE 81. Measure ground resistance without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over values in Table 1 below, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to the values in Table 1 by driving additional ground rods and extending ground cables to the new rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. Record and submit results.

Table 1

Equipment to Earth Ground Resistance Equipment (Ohms) Transformers less than 500 kVA 5 Pad Mounted Transformers 5 Manhole Grounds 5 Other Secondary neutrals and other grounds 5 Lightning protection grounds 1

B. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01, Section "Quality Requirements."



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.


A. Welding certificates.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA 4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:



1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for steel shapes and plates.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing's less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25% in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components +200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

2. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 3. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

4. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.



3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUAILTY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

3.4 For Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.



7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

E. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.



D. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed: GRC. 2. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.



F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

K. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

M. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

O. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

P. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Q. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

R. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.



1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

S. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure or electrical rack. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to maintain the existing fire rating.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUAILTY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 For Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.



UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260543 - 1

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks, and in single duct runs.

2. Handholes and boxes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and

solvent cement. 3. Accessories handholes and boxes. 4. Warning tape. 5. Warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details.



260543 - 2

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.



A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by the Authority or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify COTR no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without COTR’s written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by COTR.



260543 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing's indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS."

3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches (300 by 600 by 76 mm) in size, manufactured from 6,000-psi (41-MPa) concrete.

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)

deep letters.

2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES




260543 - 4

1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products. 3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Frame and Cover: Cast-iron with cast-in legend: "M.W.A.A." For electrical handholes and manholes the designation "ELEC" shall be added. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELEC". 4. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of

approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

5. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

6. Handholes shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.4 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES


1. Bilco Company (The). 2. Campbell Foundry Company. 3. Carder Concrete Products.



260543 - 5

4. Christy Concrete Products. 5. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. 6. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 7. McKinley Iron Works, Inc. 8. Neenah Foundry Company. 9. NewBasis. 10. Oldcastle Precast Group. 11. Osburn Associates, Inc. 12. Pennsylvania Insert Corporation. 13. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc.. 14. Strongwell Corporation; Lenoir City Division. 15. Underground Devices, Inc. 16. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 17. Utility Vault Co. 18. Wausau Tile, Inc.

B. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- (50-mm) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt.

1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000 lbf (58-kN) minimum tension.

C. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening.

1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf (180-kN) shear and 60,000-lbf (270-kN) tension.

D. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2 inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum at base.

1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf (53 kN) minimum.

E. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch (13-mm) bolt, 5300-lbf (24-kN) rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf (30-kN) rated shear strength.

F. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35ºF (2ºC). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300ºF (150ºC) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C1037.



260543 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

1. Handholes and Boxes for 600V and Less - Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING."

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1,220 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.



260543 - 7

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

F. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

G. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 12 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured PVC coated, RGS conduit elbows for stub. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow.

9. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.



260543 - 8

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations: 1. Install handholes with bottom below the frost line. 2. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 3. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

D. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING." After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

E. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

F. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.



260543 - 9

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of handholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



A. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

B. Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections. Measure ground resistance at each ground rod and report results. Use an instrument specifically designed for ground-resistance measurements.

C. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with a mandrel 1/4 inch (6 mm) smaller in diameter than ID of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove obstructions and retest.

D. Watertightness: Make internal inspection of manholes 3 months after completing construction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water and seal leak sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining leak sources. Repeat process at 2-month intervals until leaks are corrected.

E. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective products and retest.

F. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.

4.2 CLEANING

A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 1/2 inch (12 mm) larger than the ID of duct.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



260543 - 10



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 1

SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies electrical identification materials and includes requirements for electrical identification including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Schedule of all tags, markers, nameplates, signs, etc.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Comply with manufacturers instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. American Engraving Co. 2. Seton Name Plate Co. 3. Standard Signs, Inc. 4. W.H. Brady, Co. 5. Almetek Industries. 6. Tech Products, Inc. 7. William Frick & Company. 8. Thomas & Betts.



2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50ºF to 350ºF.

B. Cable Markers: Provide "E-Z Tag" as manufactured by Almetek Industries Inc., or "Everlast" tags as manufactured by Tech Products Inc. Tags shall consist of 1.0 inch high numerals or letters placed in a tag holder. Tags and holder shall be manufactured from U.V. stabilized non-conductive, non-corrosive polyethylene or equal. Tag holder shall be black and numerals and letters shall be black on yellow background. Numerals and letters shall be oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on orientation of cable.

C. Pressure Sensitive Markers for Outdoor Equipment: Provide markers as manufactured by Almetek Industries or William Frick & Company or equal. Provide minimum 1.0 inch high numerals or letters. On medium voltage equipment provide markers that are black on reflective yellow background. On low voltage equipment provide markers which are black on reflective silver background. Markers shall be resistant to U.V. light.

D. Underground-line Warning Tape: Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. Tape shall be recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

D. Low Voltage Conductor Color-Coding: Provide color coding for as follows:

208/120V Phase 480/277V Black A Yellow Red B Brown Blue C Orange White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green



E. Use low voltage conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors.

F. Provide equipment/system, circuit/device identification as follows:

1. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification markers on electrical equipment. For 240V systems and below provide white lettering on black background. For 480/277V systems, use black lettering on yellow background. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply markers on all of the following:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Control equipment. c. Circuit breakers

G. Circuit Schedules: For panelboards provide typed circuit schedules with identification of items controlled by each breaker.

H. Install labels, tags and markers at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

I. Raceway: Identify with pressure sensitive markers purpose of circuit ( i.e., lighting, power, alarm, signal, PA, etc.). Place marker on junction boxes and along raceway on 150-foot centers. Markers shall be black on white background.


4.1 For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.



PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PROGRAMMING 268100-1

SECTION 268100 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PROGRAMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work includes:

1. The work includes new instrumentation into an existing control panel, removing existing instrumentation and providing the associated programming.

B. Provide the following for the items listed above:

1. All devices included in this Division and as required by the scope and intent of these Specifications.

2. All internal wiring, ready for field connections at terminal blocks. 3. Wiring shall be color coded.

C. The following equipment in other sections shall be integrated with the control panel:

1. Control Valve. 2. Moisture switches. 3. Differential Pressure Transmitters.

D. All control and instrumentation work provided under this Division shall be accomplished under the direction of the control system subcontractor as described in paragraph 1.2.B below.

E. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Electrical: DIVISION 26.

F. All equipment and programming shall be fully integrated to provide a complete 100% functional system. All equipment provided in this Section shall be fully compatible with equipment at the existing fuel settling tank farm and the existing hydrant fuel farm and shall be integrated with the existing control system PLC and HMI. The existing PLC’s at both fuel farms and all existing HMI screens (available at both fuel farms) shall be modified to incorporate indication and control of devices under this contract, and to remove all devices which are removed.

G. Execution of this contract will require multiple mobilizations by the programmer due to phasing requirements.





1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. ICS - Industrial Controls and Systems.

2. National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

B. Control System Contractor's Qualifications:

1. Experience in the programming, design, manufacture, and installation of fuel system control panels and systems for a minimum of five years.

2. Capability of assembling all components and completing all internal wiring. 3. Capability to simulate each function required and complete all testing specified. 4. Capability of supporting the start-up and checkout of the total system and provide field

service as required at the installation site. 5. Capability of integrating control system into the existing fuel farm control system

PLC and HMI. 6. Control System Contractor shall be:

Mr. David Starr Willbros 400 Inverness Parkway, Suite 400 Inglewood, CO 80112

Office: (720) 399-2685 Mobile: (303) 524-0483 Assistant: (303) 790-1200 Email: [email protected]

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. PLC internal wiring diagrams indicating all wiring changes at both fuel farms.

B. External connection diagrams showing terminal block designations for all field wiring connections.

C. Bills of Material.

D. Catalog information for all equipment furnished by this contract.

E. Copy of the PLC program with complete labeling on CD or DVD.

F. Compliance submittals shall indicate clearly the exact size, model number, specification compliance and other pertinent items to be furnished.



G. Operation and Maintenance Manual including "As shipped" and "Conforming to construction records" copies (minimum of three) of programmable controller ladder diagrams (documented and labeled) and programs (with complete labeling) and all the above submittals at the completion of the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Control System Contactor:

Mr. David Starr Willbros 400 Inverness Parkway, Suite 400 Inglewood, CO 80112

Office: (720) 399-2685 Mobile: (303) 524-0483 Assistant: (303) 790-1200 Email: [email protected]

B. Wire Markers:

1. Brady. 2. Panduit Corporation. 3. Or as acceptable to the Authority.

C. Haz-Op Review

1. ABS Consulting, 16855 Northchase Drive, Suite 300 South, Houston, TX 77060, 281-673-2800.

2. Battelle, 902 Battelle Boulevard, Richland, WA 99354, 509-375-2121. 3. Primatech, Inc., 50 Northwoods Blvd., Columbus, OH 43235, 614-841-9800. 4. Or as acceptable to the Authority.

2.2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A. Wiring:

1. Provide all wiring necessary for equipment specified for installation. 2. Provide terminal blocks for all external connections except shielded cables. 3. All internal panel wiring shall meet requirements of SECTION 260519 and 260523. 4. Wire shall be sized for load being served. 5. Wiring shall be color coded consistently within panel and shall meet requirements of

SECTION 260553. All wiring shall be labeled at both ends.



6. Wiring Methods:

a. Smaller groups of wire cabled and secured with nylon cable clamps and ties or plastic spiral wraps.

b. Instrument dc signal wiring shall be routed in separate ducts or groups from ac power and control wiring.

c. Wire with no splices and all connections made on equipment studs or terminal blocks. Except for shielded cables, bring all wiring requiring field connections out to terminal blocks conveniently grouped to receive the external cables. Wire all spare contacts on switches and relays to terminal blocks.

d. Equipment Connections:

(1) All connections made with insulated locking spade lug terminals except where devices specified are available only with solder-type terminals.

e. Solder Connections: Soldering iron used not to exceed 100 W. f. Provide terminal blocks for all external connections.

B. Terminal Blocks:

1. Terminal blocks, if required, shall match type and manufacturer of existing terminal blocks in PLC cabinet.

2. Identify each terminal on each block by stamping or marking the terminal designation permanently on the block.

3. Provide a minimum of 15% extra terminals.

C. Circuit Breakers:

1. Circuit Breakers, if required, shall match type and manufacturer of existing in PLC cabinet.

D. General-Purpose Control Relays:

1. Potter & Brumfield Series KRP, Struthers-Dunn Series 219, or approved equal. 2. Provide with coil voltage as indicated with a neon coil energization indicator on 120Vac

coils. 3. Number of contacts required rated at 10-A at 120Vac. 4. Provide plug-in relay with matching socket.

E. Mounting of Relays and Control Devices:

1. Complete accessibility to all terminals, relay sockets, and other devices without dismantling of panel equipment.

2. Do not block access to any instruments or control devices mounted on face sheet. 3. Install on swing-out panels of necessary. 4. Mount all diodes, resistors and similar equipment between terminal points on terminal

blocks.



2.3 MOISTURE SWITCHES

A. Moisture switches are furnished with the filter separators. Refer to SECTION 335251 for moisture probe details.

B. Probes shall provide two normally closed contacts that shall open when moisture is detected. Contact shall interface with the PLC.

C. First stage of moisture switch activation shall be indicated on the HMI and shall cause a noncritical alarm. Designation of and location of moisture switch activated shall be displayed on the HMI.

D. Second stage of moisture switch activation shall be indicated on the HMI and shall cause a noncritical alarm and the PLC shall output a signal to close the solenoid-operated water slug valve. Activation of either one of the filter/separator water alarms shall close the slug valve. An interposting relay shall be provided for solenoid valve output signal.

2.4 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

A. Provide differential pressure transmitters at the transfer line filter train(s) to translate pressure into 4-20 mA output signals. Provide one at each of the following: PF-21, PF-22, PF-23 and F/S-21.

1. The transmitters shall incorporate temperature compensation for thermal effects. 2. House each electronics assembly in a NEMA 4X, NEMA 7 enclosure suitable for service

in Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous location. 3. Pressure span shall be 0 to 30 psi. 4. Accuracy shall be as follows: 0.1% of span. 5. Transmitters shall operate from 24Vdc. 6. Coplanar flange shall be cadmium-plated carbon steel. 7. Sensor fill fluid shall be silicone oil. 8. Process connection shall be 1/2-14 NPT. 9. Conduit connection shall be 3/4-14 NPT. 10. Transmitter shall have local display.

B. Filter/separator and pre-filter differential pressure transmitters shall have a range of 0-30 psi and shall be indicated on HMI graphics screens. Alarm shall be annunciated at 12 psi.

C. Alarms shall be logged on the PLC, the HMI event recorder and printed with date and time. Alarm summary graphics screen shall be provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install system components and software complete as specified, indicated, or required for operation and continuous service at the locations indicated.



B. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Install all necessary wiring or interconnections as required.

D. Make all internal and external connections and tighten as required.

E. Check all internal and external connections and tighten as required.

F. The control system contractor shall provide all on-site software modifications, equipment adjustments, and supervision of the control system work.

3.2 PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS - HAZARD AND OPERABILITY REVIEW (HAZ-OP)

A. Contractor shall engage a safety consulting contractor to perform a hazard and operability review of this project’s modifications to the fuel settling tank farm, hydrant system tank farm, and associated control system modifications.

1. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years' experience performing hazard and operability reviews in accordance with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1910.119 on similar facilities. The Contractor shall submit qualifications and experience and a proposed schedule and meeting agenda.

2. The hazard and operability review shall be performed in accordance with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1910.119. Following the review, the Contractor shall provide three copies to the Authority and three copies to the fuel system operator of the following:

a. Summary of hazard analysis recommendations. b. Hazard analysis letter report describing the scope of the study, meeting attendees,

hazardous analysis technique used, the basis for each recommendation, and a detailed haz-op table documenting the analysis.

3. The schedule of the haz-op review meeting(s) shall be coordinated with the Authority, the COTR, and the fuel system operator. The haz-op review meeting(s) shall be conducted at the hydrant fuel farm control building. The Authority, the COTR, and the fuel system operator shall be in attendance.

The Contractor shall notify the Authority and the fuel system operator three weeks in advance of the date and of the start of the haz-op review.


4.1 CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTOR’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Manufacturer's Field Engineer: As a minimum, provide the services of an experienced service engineer according to the following schedule to verify proper installation, debug and test the fueling system control program, calibrate instrumentation, assist in start-up and testing and instruct the fuel system operator's personnel.

1. Two days on site per tank for each startup and commissioning for valve rotation.



2. Two days on site for each of preliminary and final startup and commissioning of the filtration equipment system at the Fuel Settling Tank Farm.

3. Two days on site for startup and commissioning of modified Hydrant System Tank Farm facilities.

4. Two days on site for field verification and pre-startup programming changes.

5. Additional site visits to repeat testing and commissioning may be required, at Contactor’s expense, should tests and commissioning efforts fail or be completed with unsatisfactory results.

B. Full functional testing and commissioning shall occur in the presence of the COTR, the fuel system operator, and any applicable authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall coordinate the field visits with the COTR to assure availability of all parties listed above for commissioning and training.



EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract and Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all subgrade preparation, excavating, trenching, support of excavation, filling, embankment construction, backfilling, compacting, grading, topsoiling, and all related items necessary to complete the Work indicated or specified.

B. Data in subsurface investigation reports are provided to the Contractor for information only. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by the Contractor at the Contractor's option and at the Contractor's expense.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. M288 - Specification for Geotextiles Used for Subsurface Drainage Purposes.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) (Equivalent AASHTO standards may be substituted as approved):

a. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. b. C88 - Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate. c. C94/C94M - Ready-Mix Concrete. d. C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. e. C150 - Portland Cement. f. C173/C173M - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method. g. C231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. h. C403/C403M - Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration

Resistance. i. C618 - Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in

Concrete. j. C939 - Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone

Method). k. C940 - Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-

Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.



l. D75 - Practice for Sampling Aggregates. m. D422 - Test Methods for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. n. D1140 - Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75 μm)

Sieve. o. D1241 - Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses. p. D1556 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In-place by the Sand Cone

Method. q. D1557- Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified

Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m3). r. D2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in-Place by the Rubber

Balloon Method. s. D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification

System). t. D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth). u. D3017 - Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth). v. D3776 – Test Methods for Mass per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric. w. D4253 - Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a

Vibratory Table. x. D4254 - Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and

Calculation of Relative Density. y. D4318 - Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. z. D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,

Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. aa. D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. bb. D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoidal Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. cc. D4546 - Test Methods for One-Dimensional Swell or Settlement Potential of Cohesive

Soils. dd. D4632 - Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. ee. D4751 - Test Method for Determining the Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. ff. D4832 - Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material

(CLSM) Test Cylinders. gg. D4833 - Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and

Related Products. hh. D5084 - Test Method for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated Porous

Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter.

3. Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (VDOT).

a. Section 307 - Hydraulic Cement Stabilization.

4. International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition:

a. 1704 - Special Inspections

5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. 29 CFR Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Borrow material. 2. Granular material. 3. Each type of plastic warning tape. 4. Geotextile.

C. Samples: 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) Sample of separation geotextile.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified independent material testing agency.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill including granular material.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D1557 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill including granular material.

F. Where selecting an option for excavation, trenching, and shoring in compliance with local, state, or federal safety regulations such as OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 or successor regulations, which require design by a registered professional engineer, submit (for information only and not for COTR approval) the following:

1. Copies of design calculations and notes for sloping, benching, support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

2. Documents provided with evidence of registered professional engineer's seal, signature, and date in accordance with appropriate state licensing requirements.


A. Sampling and Testing:

1. Tests to determine conformance with all requirements of this Specification for quality and properties of all Contractor -secured materials, including borrow materials (both on or off Site) proposed for use, shall be performed by an independent, commercial laboratory retained and compensated by Contractor, and approved by COTR.

2. When incorporating materials into the Project, quality control testing will be performed during construction by a testing laboratory retained and compensated by the Contractor.


A. Lines and grades shall be as indicated. COTR will furnish benchmarks, base lines, and reference points as necessary to permit Contractor to lay out and construct the Work properly.



B. Carefully maintain all benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points and replace as directed by COTR if disturbed or destroyed.

C. Disposition of Utilities:

1. Existing underground utilities are shown on Contract Drawings using the best information available at the time of Drawing preparation. Contractor shall identify, locate and protect all underground utilities which may be affected by construction under this Contract before starting excavation or other Site construction activities which could damage existing utilities.

2. Remove or relocate only as indicated, specified, or directed. Provide a minimum 96-hours' notice to COTR and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility service.

3. Adequately protect from damage all active utilities and remove or relocate only as indicated or approved.

4. Report active, inactive, and abandoned utilities encountered in excavating and grading operations that are not indicated on Contract Drawings. Remove, plug, or cap as directed by COTR.

5. Provide as-constructed drawings of Underground Facilities either not shown or found at locations that differ from those shown on Contract Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS ENCOUNTERED

A. Suitable Materials: Materials suitable for use in embankment and fill include material that is free of debris, roots, organic matter, frozen matter, and which is free of stone having any dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm) in areas requiring a high degree of compaction, or 4 inches (100 mm) in other embankment and fill areas. Materials shall have a soil classification of CL, ML, SM, SP, SW, GW, GM, or GP based on the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487):

1. Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands generally exclusive of clayey and silty material with the following properties:

a. Are free-draining. b. Impact compaction will not produce a well-defined moisture-density relationship curve. c. Maximum density by impact methods will generally be less than by vibratory methods. d. Generally less than 15% by dry weight of soil particles pass a No. 200 (75 μm) square-

mesh sieve.

2. Cohesive materials include materials made up predominately of silts and clays generally exclusive of sands and gravel with the following properties:

a. Impact compaction will produce a well-defined, moisture-density relationship curve. b. Are not free draining.

B. Unsuitable Materials: Materials unsuitable for use in embankment and fill include:

1. All material that contains debris, roots, organic matter, frozen matter, shale particles, or material containing gravel or stone with any dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm) in



areas requiring a high degree of compaction or 4 inches (100 mm) in other embankment and fill areas.

2. Materials with soil classification not defined as suitable material. 3. Other materials that are determined by COTR as too wet or otherwise unsuitable for

providing a stable subgrade or stable foundation for structures.

C. Material used for embankment or fill:

1. For soils used below structural elements, such as footings, slabs, pavements, and mats, that portion of material passing the No. 40 (425 μm) square-mesh sieve shall have a liquid limit not exceeding 40 and a plasticity index not exceeding 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.

D. All Materials encountered, regardless of type, character composition and condition thereof, shall be considered "unclassified" for the purpose of payment. Determine quantity of various materials to be excavated prior to submitting Bid. Rock encountered shall be handled at no extra cost to the Authority.

E. Waste Materials:

1. Waste materials, as described for purposes of this Section, consist of unsuitable materials, excess suitable material, rock, demolition debris, and other materials considered unacceptable for use as fill, and which are not environmentally contaminated. Waste materials shall not include environmental pollutants, hazardous substances, contaminated products, by-products, samples, or waste materials of any kind that are regulated under environmental laws.

2. Dispose of waste materials in accordance with Paragraph 3.2F.

2.2 BORROW MATERIALS

A. Suitable fill materials, granular materials, and topsoil obtained from locations arranged for by Contractor off the Site. Required to the extent sufficient suitable materials are not obtained from excavation and trenching.

B. Obtain, excavate, haul, handle, place, and compact borrow materials.

C. Borrow materials shall not exhibit characteristics of high shrink-swell potential as determined from Atterberg limit tests (ASTM D4318) and/or swell tests (ASTM D4546) unless otherwise specified herein.



2.3 GRANULAR MATERIAL

A. Crushed stone or crushed gravel indicating a loss of not more than 15% after 5 cycles when tested for soundness with sodium sulfate as described in ASTM C88 and conforming to one of the following gradations described in ASTM C33:

Standard Square Mesh Sieve No. 57 Stone No. 67 Stone U.S. Size or No. Metric Opening Percent Passing Percent Passing 1-1/2 inch 37.50 mm 100 -- 1 inch 25.00 mm 95 to 100 100 3/4-inch 19.00 mm -- 90 to 100 1/2-inch 12.50 mm 25 to 60 -- 3/8-inch 9.50 mm -- 20 to 55 No. 4 4.75 mm 0 to 10 0 to 10 No. 8 2.36 mm 0 to 5 0 to 5

Use at all locations where granular material is required unless otherwise indicated or specified.

B. Base course may be either No. 57 stone or No. 67 stone as specified.

C. Pipe Bedding Material for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and ductile iron pipe (DIP) shall be No. 67 stone as specified.

D. Aggregate surface material within tank dike areas for use over liner material shall be VADOT No. 78 gravel meeting the following requirements:

1. Gradation:

Sieve Size (Square Openings) % Passing by Weight 3/4-inch Minimum 100 1/2-inch 95 ±5 3/8-inch 60 ±20 No. 4 Maximum 20 No. 8 Maximum 8 No. 16 Maximum 5

2. Aggregate shall be uncrushed and shall be approved by the liner material manufacturer. 3. Soundness:

a. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Loss (5 Cycles): Maximum 20%. b. Freeze and Thaw Soundness Loss (20 Cycles): Maximum 7%. c. Tested in accordance with AASHTO T103 or T104.

4. Abrasion Loss:

a. Los Angeles Abrasion Loss:

(1) 12% maximum for 100 cycles. (2) 45% for 500 cycles.



b. Test in accordance with AASHTO T96.

5. Deleterious Materials: Material % by Weight AASHTO Test Method Coal and Lignite 0.25 T113 Clay Lumps 0.25 T112 Material Passing No. 200 Sieve 2.50 T11

2.4 EMBANKMENT AND FILL MATERIAL

A. Material shall be free of roots or other organic matter, refuse, ashes, cinders, frozen earth, or other unsuitable material.

B. Use suitable material sufficiently friable for embankment to provide a dense mass free of voids and capable of satisfactory compaction.

C. Do not use material containing gravel, stones, or shale particles greater in dimension than one-half the depth of the layer or lift to be compacted.

D. Moisture content shall be that required to obtain specified compaction of the soil or as indicated.

E. Perform moisture curing by wetting or drying of the material as required to attain required compaction criteria.

2.5 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL

A. Granular material as specified or conform to ASTM D1241, Gradation A or B, well-graded, with not more than 10% passing No. 200 (75 μm) sieve.

2.6 GEOTEXTILES

A. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50%; complying with AASHTO M288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced.

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D4491. 8. UV Stability: 50% after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D4355.



2.7 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, jet fuel, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Install new warning tape 18 inches above all existing utilities to remain within the Project excavation limits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

A. Construction Access:

1. Immediately remove by shoveling and/or sweeping all sediment tracked from the construction area onto Site access roads. Place sediment in stockpile areas.

B. Stripping:

1. Remove topsoil from areas within limits of excavation, trenching and borrow, and areas designated to receive embankment and compacted fill as follows:

2. Scrape areas clean of all brush, grass, weeds, roots, and other material. 3. Strip to depth of approximately 6 inches (150 mm ) or to a sufficient depth to remove

excessive roots in heavy vegetation or brush areas and as required to segregate topsoil, or as directed by COTR.

4. Stockpile topsoil in areas where it will not interfere with construction operations or existing facilities. Stockpiled topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, debris, and stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter.

5. Remove waste from the Site.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

A. Sheeting and Bracing:

1. Design, furnish, place, maintain, and subsequently remove, to extent required, a system of temporary supports for cut and cover, open cut, or trench excavations, including bracing, dewatering, and associated items to support sides and ends of excavations where excavation slopes might endanger in-place or proposed improvements, extend beyond construction right-of-ways, or as otherwise specified or indicated.



2. Provide all materials on Site prior to start of excavation in each section, and make such adjustments as are required to meet unexpected conditions.

3. Space and arrange sheeting and bracing as required to exclude adjacent material and according to stability of excavation slopes.

4. Assess existing conditions including adjacent property and possible effects of proposed temporary works and construction methods; and select and design such support systems, methods, and details as will assure safety to the public, adjacent property, and the completed Work.

5. Modify or relocate underground facilities, at no additional cost to the Authority, if existing underground facilities interfere with Contractor's proposed method of support.

6. Use caution in areas of underground facilities, which shall be exposed by hand or other excavation methods acceptable to COTR.

7. Perform sheeting, shoring, and bracing in accordance with safety and protection requirements of the Contract Documents.

8. Provide sheeting, shoring, and bracing for trench excavation in subgrade of excavation when required to prevent movement of the main excavation support system.

9. Provide shoring, sheeting, and bracing as indicated or as needed to meet the following requirements:

a. Prevent undermining and damage to all structures, buildings, underground facilities, pavements, and slabs.

b. Perform excavations with vertical banks where necessary for construction activities or as indicated, and also within all limits of excavation noted on Drawings.

c. Design excavation support system and components to support lateral earth pressures, unrelieved hydrostatic pressures, utility loads, traffic and construction loads, and building and other surcharge loads to allow safe and expeditious construction of permanent structures without movement or settlement of the ground, and to prevent damage to or movement of adjacent buildings, structures, underground facilities, and other improvements. Design shall account for staged removal of bracing to suit the sequence of concrete placement for permanent structures and backfill.

d. Shoring and sheeting materials shall be removed by the Contractor. Contractor shall remove and replace any existing structure or underground facility damaged during shoring and sheeting. Remove sheeting and bracing as backfill progresses. Fill voids left after withdrawal with suitable material approved by COTR.

10. Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system. Review by Engineer and COTR of drawings and data submitted by Contractor shall not in any way be considered to relieve Contractor from full responsibility for errors therein or from the entire responsibility for complete and adequate design and performance of the sheeting and shoring system.

11. Provision for Contingencies:

a. Performance of components of the support system shall be monitored for both vertical and horizontal movement weekly.

b. Provide a contingency plan or alternative procedure for implementation, if system does not adequately perform.

c. Keep materials and equipment necessary to implement the contingency plan readily available.



12. Damages:

a. Document all existing damage to adjacent facilities and submit information to COTR prior to performing any excavation. Documentation shall include a written description, diagrams, measurements, and appropriate photographs.

b. Repair all damage resulting from Contractor's excavation and remove and replace all undermined pavements with COTR-approved equal, either concrete or asphalt, at no expense to the Authority.

B. Explosives: Blasting will not be permitted.

C. Excavation for Structures:

1. Excavate area adequate to permit efficient erection and removal of forms. 2. Trim to neat lines where details call for concrete to be deposited against earth. 3. Excavate by hand in areas where space and access will not permit use of machines. 4. Notify COTR immediately when excavation has reached the depth indicated. 5. Overexcavate and replace any localized zones of excessively wet, unstable, organic, yielding,

or low bearing capacity materials as directed by COTR. Restore bottom of excavation to proper elevation with trench stabilization material in areas overexcavated. Correct at no additional cost to the Authority when overexcavated without authority or to stabilize bottom rendered unsuitable through negligence or improper dewatering or other operations.

D. Trenching for Underground Utilities:

1. Side Walls:

a. Make vertical or sloped within specified trench width limitations below a plane 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe.

b. Make vertical or sloped (stepped) as required for stability, above a plane 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe.

c. Excavate without undercutting sidewalls.

2. Trench Depth:

a. Excavate to depth sufficient to provide the minimum bedding requirements for the pipe being placed.

b. Do not exceed that indicated where conditions of bottom are satisfactory. c. Increase depth as necessary to remove unsuitable supporting materials.

3. Trench Bottom:

a. Protect and maintain when suitable natural materials are encountered. b. Remove rock fragments and materials disturbed during excavation or raveled from trench

walls. c. Restore to proper subgrade with trench stabilization material when overexcavated. d. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and

conduit.



4. Trench Width:

a. Excavate trench to a width which will permit satisfactory jointing of pipe and thorough tamping of bedding and backfill.

b. Do not exceed following trench width:

(1) For single pipe installation, maintain trench widths below a plane 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe as follows:

Trench Width Nominal Pipe Size Minimum Maximum Less than 24" Pipe od + 1' Pipe od + 2

(2) For multiple pipe installations maintain trench widths below a plane 12 inches (300 mm) above the top of the largest pipe as follows:

Trench Clearances Nominal Pipe Size Minimum from Maximum from of Outside Pipe Outside Pipe Outside Pipe Less than 24" 6" 12"

(3) Above plane defined in (1) and (2), no maximum limit. (4) Maximum trench width limitations shall apply in all areas more than 3 feet (1 meter)

from manhole or structure walls. (5) Maximum width shall be as near the minimum specified as can be controlled by

construction equipment and methods used.

5. Fill and Embankment Areas: Perform trenching only after compacted fill or embankments have reached an elevation of not less than 1 foot (300 mm) above top of pipe.

6. Limit maximum length of open trench to 150 feet (45 meters) in advance and to 150 feet (45 meters) behind pipe installation.

7. Test Pits:

a. Excavate test pits sufficiently in advance of trenching to enable adequate planning of construction procedure.

b. Locate as follows:

(1) When unstable material is suspected that may require special protective measures. (2) Where groundwater may require special handling methods. (3) Where indicated or otherwise approved. (4) Where interference or conflict with other utilities or structures could affect alignment

of pipe.

c. To depth required to obtain information desired.

E. Dewatering:

1. General:

a. Contractor shall design and provide the dewatering system using accepted and professional methods of design and engineering consistent with the best current practice



to eliminate water entering the excavation under hydrostatic head from the bottom and/or sides. The system shall be designed to prevent differential hydrostatic head which may occur from rising water levels from proximity of excavation to phreatic groundwater level, or surface runoff, and which would result in floating out soil particles in a manner termed as a "quick" or "boiling" condition. System shall not be dependent solely upon sumps and/or pumping water from within the excavation where differential head would result in a "quick" condition, which would continue to worsen the integrity of the excavation's stability.

b. Provide dewatering system of a sufficient size and capacity as required to control ground and surface water flow into the excavation and to allow all Work to be installed in a dry condition.

c. Control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source and be fully responsible for disposal of the water.

d. Confine all discharge piping and/or ditches to the available easement or to additional easement obtained by Contractor. Provide all necessary means for disposal of the water, including the obtaining of all necessary permits and of additional easement at no additional cost to the Authority.

e. Control groundwater in a manner that preserves the strength of the foundation soils, does not cause instability or raveling of the excavation slopes, and does not result in damage to existing structures.

f. Commence dewatering with means to provide positive dewatering of all water sources prior to any appearance of water in excavation and continue until Work is complete to the extent that no damage results from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes.

g. Open pumping with sumps and ditches shall be allowed, provided it does not result in boils, loss of fines, softening of the ground, or instability of slopes.

h. Install, operate, and maintain the dewatering system required to control surface and/or groundwater.

i. Control grading around excavations to prevent surface water from flowing into excavation areas.

j. Drain or pump as required to continually maintain all excavations and trenches free of water or mud from any source, and discharge to approved drains or channels. Commence when water first appears and continue until Work is complete to the extent that no damage will result from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes.

k. No additional payment will be made for any supplemental measures to control seepage, groundwater, or artesian head.

2. Design:

a. Contractor shall designate and obtain the services of a qualified dewatering specialist or expert to provide a dewatering plan as may be necessary to complete the Work. Contractor shall provide a dewatering plan which shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

(1) Drawings indicating the general location and size of berms, dikes, ditches, sumps and discharge lines, including their relation to water disposal ditches.

(2) Make, model and capacities of pumps, prime movers, power generators, and standby equipment.

(3) Detailed description of dewatering procedure and maintenance method. (4) Description of emergency plan to protect in-place construction in the event of an

unanticipated rise in groundwater due to loss of power or other unexpected conditions or inundation from surface water.



(5) Additional details, as requested by COTR. (6) In preparing the dewatering plan, Contractor shall consider all available information,

together with Site constraints, excavation/sheeting requirements, and construction schedule. Other potential problems may require specific reference and amplification within the dewatering plan.

(7) Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system.

(8) Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the drawings, design data, and operational records required by this Section.

3. Damages:

a. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to Authority any damage to work in place, other contractor's equipment, utilities, adjacent structures, and the excavation, including, damage to the bottom due to heave and including but not limited to, removal and pumping out of the excavated area that may result from Contractor's negligence, inadequate or improper design and operation of the dewatering system, and any mechanical or electrical failure of the dewatering system.

b. Remove subgrade materials rendered unsuitable by excessive wetting and replace with approved backfill material at no additional cost to Authority.

4. Maintaining Excavation in Dewatered Condition:

a. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition with positive dewatering methods during preparation of subgrade, installation of pipe, and construction of structures until the critical period of construction and/or backfill is completed to prevent damage of subgrade support, piping, structure, side slopes, or adjacent facilities from flotation or other hydrostatic pressure imbalance.

b. Provide standby equipment on site, installed, wired, and available, for immediate operation if required to maintain dewatering on a continuous basis in event any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, perform such work as may be required to restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional cost to Authority.

c. Subsequent to completion of excavation and during the installation of all Work in the excavated area, Contractor shall maintain the excavation in a dewatered condition.

F. Waste Materials:

1. All suitable soil material and topsoil shall be stockpiled on site as indicated. 2. Disposal of Waste Material: Remove waste material, including trash, and debris, and legally

dispose of it off Airport's property. 3. Disposal of Surplus Material: The Authority maintains a soil bank site on airport property

that may be utilized by the Contractor to dispose of excess concrete, asphalt, and rock materials. All concrete, asphalt, or rock larger than 18 inches in any dimension is not permitted to be stockpiled at the soil bank site. The Contractor is responsible for hauling and dumping at the soil bank site or legally disposing of concrete, asphalt, and rock off Airport property. Spreading, rehandling and compacting of materials at the soil bank site will be performed by others. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for hauling and dumping of excavated material at the airport soil bank site.



4. Contaminated Soils: If, during earth moving operations, there is evidence of any unusual odor, color or visual indicators such as free product, that would lead the contractor to suspect the soil is contaminated, work shall stop and the COTR shall be notified. Soil shall be stockpiled on the site at a location approved by the COTR.

5. Organic Matter: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter such as muck, peat, organic silt or sod shall be considered unsuitable and shall be legally disposed of off Airport property.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Subgrades:

1. General:

a. Excavate or backfill as required to construct subgrades to elevations and grades indicated. b. Remove all unsuitable material and replace with acceptable fill material and perform all

wetting, drying, shaping, and compacting required to prepare subgrade. c. Proofrolling: Exposed area to receive fill, backfill, or embankment shall be proofrolled

to detect localized zones of excessively wet, unstable, organic, or low bearing capacity materials as follows:

(1) Proofroll as a single-pass operation with conventional compaction equipment during subgrade preparation and prior to placement of fill, and as a spot check process without the need for complete coverage per unit area of tire. Soft spots shall be overexcavated, backfilled, and compacted with suitable material.

(2) Proofroll within limits of proposed construction of footings, slabs, mats, or pavement and to extent of 10 feet (3 meters) beyond proposed exterior walls and stated limits, or as otherwise noted. Proofroll with loaded dump truck, loaded pan scrapper, 15-ton (13.6 metric ton) light class pneumatic tired roller compactor, or equivalent. Ground contact pressure of 80 psi (550 kPa) and average speed of 5 miles (8 kilometers) per hour shall be maintained and continue until extent of soft spots is determined with not less than one pass per unit area of tire. Soft spots shall be overexcavated, backfilled, and compacted with suitable material.

(3) Proofrolling shall be observed by Geotechnical Engineer or qualified Soils Technician.

2. Subgrade for Fills and Embankments: Roughen by discing or scarifying and wet or dry top 6 inches (150 mm) as required to bond with fill or embankment.

3. Subgrade for Roadways, Drives, Paved Areas:

a. Extend subgrade the full width of pavement or base course, plus 1 foot (300 mm) in each direction.

b. Cohesive Soil Subgrades: Compact the top 6 inches (150 mm) of subgrade for traffic areas in embankment or excavation to a minimum of 100% of maximum dry density within the moisture content range from 2% below optimum to 2% above optimum. Optimum moisture and maximum dry density shall be determined by ASTM D1557.

c. Cohesionless Soil Subgrades: Compact the top 6 inches (150 mm) of subgrade for traffic areas in embankment or excavation to not less than 95% of relative dry density as determined by ASTM Methods D4253 and D4254.



4. Subgrades for Concrete Slabs on Grade, Mats, and Footings:

a. Compact cohesive soil subgrades to a minimum of 100% of maximum dry density within the moisture content range from 2% below optimum to 2% above optimum. Optimum moisture and maximum dry density shall be determined by ASTM D1557.

b. Where subgrade consists of cohesionless granular materials, compact to not less than 90% relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.

B. Embankments and Fills:

1. Construct embankments to contours and elevations indicated, using suitable approved material from excavations and borrow areas:

a. Place fill material in maximum 8-inch (200-mm) loose lifts. b. Place embankment only on subgrades approved by COTR. c. Do not place snow, ice, or frozen earth in fill; do not place fill on a frozen surface.

2. Obtain compaction by the controlled movement of compaction equipment approved by COTR during placing and grading of layers and to minimum density specified for indicated locations.

3. Except as indicated or specified otherwise, compact cohesive soils to a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density and noncohesive soils to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density within the moisture content range from 2% below optimum to 2% above optimum. Optimum moisture and maximum dry density shall be as determined by ASTM D1557.

4. In areas of fill supporting structures or under paved areas, compact cohesive soils to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density and noncohesive soils to a minimum of 100% of maximum dry density within the moisture content range from 2% below optimum to 2% above optimum. Optimum moisture and maximum dry density shall be as determined by ASTM D1557.

C. Pipe Embedment:

1. Pipe bedding shall be as indicated, using granular material. 2. Place granular embedment as follows:

a. With level bottom layer at proper grade to receive and uniformly support pipe barrel throughout its length.

b. Form shallow depression under each joint to facilitate jointing. c. Add second layer simultaneously to both sides of pipe with care to avoid displacement. d. Complete promptly after completion of jointing operations. e. Substitute for any part of earth backfill to within 2 feet (0.6 meter) of final grade at

Contractor's option.

3. Compact granular embedment as follows:

a. In loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) in depth. b. Rod, spade, or use pneumatic or vibratory equipment:

(1) As required to obtain not less than 80% relative density as determined by ASTM Method D4253 and D4254.



(2) Throughout depth of embedment.

c. Compaction using flooding or water spraying techniques will not be allowed.

D. Backfilling:

1. Backfill for structures and trenches shall be as specified in "Embankments and Fills," this Section, with the following additional provisions:

2. Structures:

a. Backfill only after concrete has attained 70% design strength. b. Backfill adjacent to structures only after a sufficient portion of structure has been built to

resist imposed load. c. Remove all debris from excavation prior to placement of material. d. Place backfill in level loose lifts of thickness within compacting ability of equipment

used but not to exceed 8 inches (200 mm) in thickness. e. Perform backfilling simultaneously on all sides of structures. f. Exercise extreme care in use of heavy equipment in areas adjacent to structures.

Equipment operated within 10 feet (3 meters) of any wall shall not exceed 20,000 pounds (9 metric tons) gross weight.

g. Material above a 45o plane intersecting the footing shall not include rock fragments incapable of passing a 6-inch (150-mm) screen, and no shale whether disintegrated or not.

3. Trenches:

a. Backfill for trenches shall be as specified for structures and as follows:

(1) Complete promptly upon completion of pipe embedment and approval to proceed. (2) Use hand methods to a plane 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe. (3) Mechanical methods shall be acceptable where hand backfill is not required. (4) Backfill in lifts of thickness within compacting ability of equipment used, but not

greater than 8 inches (200 mm). (5) Until compacted depth over conduit exceeds 3 feet (1 meter), do not drop fill material

over 5 feet (1.5 meters). Distance may then be increased 2 feet (0.6 meter) for each additional foot (300 mm) of cover.

E. Site Grading:

1. Excavate, fill, compact fill, and rough grade to bring Project area outside buildings to subgrades as follows:

a. For surfaced areas, to underside of respective surfacing or base course. b. For areas to receive topsoil, to a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) below finished grade.

2. Grading:

a. Grade and compact all areas within Project area, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas, reasonably smooth, and free from irregular surface changes.

b. Degree of finish for rough grading shall be that ordinarily obtained from blade grader or scraper operations except as otherwise specified with due allowance for topsoil.



c. Finished grades shall generally be not more than 0.1 foot (30mm) above or below those indicated.

d. Finish all ditches, swales, and gutters to drain readily. e. Unless otherwise indicated, slope the subgrade evenly to provide drainage away from all

structures in all directions at a grade not less than 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm per meter) for a minimum distance of 10 feet (3 meters).

f. Provide roundings at top and bottom of banks and at other breaks in grade.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Protect newly graded and topsoiled areas from actions of the elements.

B. Fill and repair settling or erosion occurring prior to acceptance of the Work, and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes.

C. Under provisions of the guarantee, correct any settlement of embankment, fill, or backfill and damages created thereby within 1 year after acceptance of the Work. Make repairs within 10 days after notification by the Authority of settlement.



A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 1 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.

B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's quality Control Program for the work of this section. THE IMPLEMENTATION OF A CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM THE RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, APPLICABLE CODES, REGULATIONS, AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. The Contractor Quality Control Program shall include, but not be limited to, the elements included herein. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the Contractor to use to generate the complete Contractor's Quality Control Program.

C. Compaction:

1. Contractor shall, through services of an independent laboratory, test all embankments, fills, and subgrades under this Contract to determine conformance with specified density relationships.

2. Method of test may be either of the following at COTR's option:

a. ASTM D1556. b. ASTM D2167. c. ASTM D2922. d. ASTM D3017.



3. The frequency of in-place compaction testing including density and moisture content will be as follows:

a. At least one test for every 200 cubic yards (6 cubic meters) of fill placed in trenches or surrounding structures.

b. At least one test for every 500 square feet (46 square meters) per lift in structural fill or on subgrades for foundations and pavement.

c. At least one test for every shift of compaction operations.

4. At least one test when COTR suspects quality of moisture control or effectiveness of compaction. Remove or scarify fill failing to meet required densities and recompact as necessary to achieve specified results.

5. Removal of in-place material and replacement with approved new material will be required if scarifying and recompaction do not produce the required densities.

6. Perform at least one classification test (ASTM D2487) and one moisture-density test (ASTM D1557) on soil used in fill or backfill operations during construction. a. Each sample shall be taken from trenches or other excavations as directed by COTR and

should be generally representative of distinguishably differing materials encountered and used for backfill or fill.

b. Perform one set of tests at the beginning of excavation and one additional set of tests when material properties vary (more or less plastic, different color, more or less granular, or other conditions) from the material initially tested.

c. Additional tests shall be performed when directed by COTR.

D. Subgrades:

1. Contractor shall inspect all subgrades to determine conformance with indicated lines and grades and notify COTR when subgrade preparation is complete.

2. Subgrades for roadways, drives, and parking areas shall have a maximum deviation of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any 10 feet (3 meters) when tested with a 10-foot (3-meter) straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerlines of subgrade areas. Actual grade shall not be more than 0.1 foot (30 mm) from indicated grade.

E. Special Inspections in Accordance with IBC 2000 Chapter 17, Section 1704:

1. Prepared Fill.

F. Inspection Services:

1. All site inspection relating to geotechnical issues shall be performed by a qualified Soils Technician, supervised by a Geotechnical Engineer that is thoroughly familiar with the contents of the site subsurface information. The Geotechnical Engineer or Soils Technician shall review the following details:

a. Observation of water conditions and effect on soils. b. Suitability of soil materials used as controlled structural fill, or other fill materials used

on site. c. Inspection of all cuts and foundation subgrades. d. Proofrolling of prepared subgrades. e. Placement and compaction of structural fills. f. Support of excavation measures.



g. All other geotechnical matters related to completion of the project.

2. The Geotechnical Engineer, thoroughly familiar with the project design, shall inspect the site at least once per week during construction. These site visits shall be in addition to regular inspection services for this project. The purpose of these inspections will be to provide periodic engineering, on-site review of the construction, and inspection so that the geotechnical design recommendations are properly translated to the field during construction. All geotechnical site inspection services shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.



TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes subsoil scarification, topsoil placement, application of soil amendments, final grading, fertilizing, turf seeding, mulching, and initial irrigation for the areas indicated on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following to COTR in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section, "Submittals."

B. Certification of Grass Seed: Seed vendor's signed statement of turf seed analysis, certifying that each lot of seed has been tested in accordance with requirements of the Commonwealth of Virginia within the previous 6 months by a recognized independent seed testing laboratory. This statement shall include:

1. Name and address of laboratory. 2. Date of analysis. 3. Origin and lot number for each type of seed variety. 4. Results of analysis, including, for each seed variety:

a. Botanical and common name (species and variety). b. Percentage by weight of variety in overall mixture. c. Percentage of purity. d. Percentage of germination. e. Percentage by weight of weed content. f. Percentage by weight of inert content.

C. Topsoil Analysis Report: Report of analysis by an Authority approved soil testing laboratory stating percentages of silt, clay, sand and organic matter, soil pH, and the mineral and plant nutrient content of soil. Report shall indicate suitability of topsoil for healthy, vigorous growth of turf grasses. If not suitable, include recommended quantities for nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, limestone, aluminum sulphate, or other soil amendments that shall be added to make topsoil suitable.




A. Planting time: Sow permanent seed in all areas of project in periods between March 15 to May 15, or between August 15 and October 1 unless otherwise approved in writing by the COTR.

B. Maintenance period: Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1.5 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Warranty turf areas through specified maintenance period and until final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NEW TOPSOIL

A. Fertile, friable, naturally loamy, surface soil; free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds, and other litter; and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

B. When tested in accordance with the methods of testing as recommended by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.6. Organic content shall not be less than 3 percent or more than 20 percent as determined by the wet-combustion method (chromic acid reduction). Not less than 20 percent or more than 80 percent of the topsoil material shall pass the 200 - mesh (0.075 mm) sieve, as determined by the wash test in accordance with ASTM C 117.

1. Natural topsoil may be amended by the Contractor with approved materials and methods to meet above requirements.

C. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at site of work. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep. Obtaining topsoil from bogs or marshes is prohibited.

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: Natural limestone, conforming to requirements of ASTM C 602, and containing at least 85 percent of total carbonates ground to such fineness that at least 90 percent passes a 10-mesh sieve and at least 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve.

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. Complete, 10-20-10 commercial fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources, conforming to requirements of Federal Specification O-F-241d and applicable laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia. Fertilizer to provide nitrogen in a form that will be available during initial period of turf growth.



2.4 GRASS SEED MIXTURE

A. Grass Seed: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America for lawn grasses. Seeds included in the mix shall be listed in the most current version of the Virginia Turfgrass Variety Recommendations. Seed mixtures shall be a blend of three standard varieties with no dwarf and shall consist of the following (by weight):

10% Kentucky Bluegrass 80% Tall Fescue 10% Perennial Rye

2.5 MULCH

A. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Clean, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats or barley. Mulch to be air-dry and free of mold and seeds of noxious grasses or weeds.

B. Seed Mulch: Peat moss in natural, shredded, or granulated form, of fine texture, with a pH of 4.0 to 6.0 and a water absorbing capacity of 1,100 to 2,000 percent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SOIL PREPARATION

A. Limit preparation to areas that will be planted within 72 hours.

B. Till sub grade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones exceeding 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter including gravel or other inorganic deposits in excess of 4 stones per square foot (average).

1. Immediately after initial tilling, remove existing grass clumps, vegetation, and turf. Dispose of such material outside of the Authority's property; do not turn over into soil being prepared for turfs.

2. Maintain grades in a true and even condition where grades to be provided with topsoil have been established by others.

3. Where grades have not yet been established, smooth-grade the areas to the prescribed elevations indicated and leave in a condition that is properly compacted and evenly graded to prevent formation of low areas where water may pond.

C. Spread topsoil mixture to depth required meeting thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement.

1. Provide minimum depth of 2 inches (50 mm) after compaction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not spread if either topsoil material or sub grade is frozen.

D. Add soil amendments to top surface of topsoil at rates specified and spread initial fertilizers at rate of 1500 lbs. per acre of topsoil.

1. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing in fertilizer.



2. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of topsoil prior to fine-grading. 3. Do not mix fertilizer with topsoil more than 72 hours in advance of seeding or sodding

operations. 4. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots, and

other extraneous matter.

E. Fine-grade to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. After compaction rolling, leave surfaces at prescribed grades with uniform slope to drain and free from low areas where water might pond. Limit fine-grading to areas that can be planted within 72 hours. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.

F. Promptly remove topsoil or other materials falling on pavement as result of hauling or spreading of topsoil.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Restore prepared turf areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine-grading and before planting.

B. Moisten prepared turf areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry off before seeding operations. Do not create muddy soil.

C. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour. Distribute seed evenly over entire area by sowing equal quantity in 2 directions at right angles to each other.

1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. 2. Sow no less than the quantity of seed specified.

D. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

3.3 HYDROSEEDING

A. Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and pulverized mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

B. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded. Rate of application as required obtaining seed application rate equivalent to 6 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. (260 lbs. per acre).

3.4 MULCHING

A. Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying specified mulch within 24 hours after completion of seeding operations. Presoak and scatter evenly to a depth of 1/8 inches to 3/16 inches thick and roll to a smooth surface. Do not mound.



3.5 RECONDITIONING EXISTING TURF AREAS

A. Recondition turf areas where settlement or washouts occur or where minor re-grading is required.

B. Recondition existing turf areas damaged by Contractor's operations including storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.

C. Provide fertilizer, seed or sod, and soil amendments same as specified for new turf areas and as required to provide healthy stand of grass in reconditioned areas. Provide new topsoil as required to fill low spots and meet required finish grades.

D. Remove diseased or unsatisfactory grass clumps; do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations including oil drippings, stone, gravel, and other construction materials; replace with new topsoil.

E. Where substantial turf remains (but is thin), mow, rake, aerate if compacted, fill low spots, remove humps, cultivate soil, apply lime, fertilizer, and sow specified seed at rate indicated. Remove weeds before seeding. If weeds are extensive, apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition.

F. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout the maintenance period. Maintain barricades until a substantial and healthy stand of grass is established.

B. Take necessary precautions as required to avoid damage to existing plants, turf, and structures.

3.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Obtain the services of a professional lawn and landscape firm to provide the required maintenance services of this Article. Do not use Contractor’s own forces to accomplish this maintenance.

B. Begin maintenance of grass areas immediately after each area is planted and continue for the periods required to establish acceptable stand of turf grass, but no less than the following:

1. Seeded areas, at least 60 days, after date of Substantial Completion.

a. If seeded in fall after September 1, provide minimum of 30 days maintenance in fall, and provide a minimum of 45 additional days continuing maintenance during following spring until acceptable turf is established.

C. Maintain turf areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, re-grading, and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable turf, free of eroded or bare areas.



D. Re-mulch with new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations sufficiently to nullify its purpose. Anchor as required preventing displacement.

E. Replant bare areas with same materials specified for new turf.

F. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and watering equipment to convey water from Authority's water source(s) location indicated and to keep turf areas uniformly moist as required for proper growth. Design temporary watering system to provide a minimum of 3/4 inch of water per day.

1. Lay out temporary watering system and arrange watering schedule to prevent puddling, water erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid necessity of walking over muddy or newly seeded areas.

2. Begin watering immediately. Water on a daily basis for the following 10 days. Apply water uniformly, providing coverage over entire site nominally equivalent to 3/4 inches of rainfall per day. Reduce rate to nominal 1/2 inch of water per day after 5 days.

3. At end of initial 10-day period, remove temporary irrigation system. Continue watering with conventional sprinkler watering system on an as-needed basis.

G. Mow grass as soon as there is 3 - 4 inches of top growth, cut grass with the mower blades set at 1-1/2" to 2" height. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height.

1. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Time initial and subsequent mowings to maintain following grass heights.

a. Mow grass from 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches high. Do not mow to less than 1-1/2 inches.

2. Apply second fertilizer application after first mowing and when grass is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide at least 1.0 lb. of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft. of turf area.

3.8 ACCEPTANCE

A. When work is substantially completed, including maintenance, COTR will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability.

B. Replant rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected by COTR and found to be acceptable.

C. Seeded areas will be acceptable provided requirements, including maintenance, have been met and healthy, uniform close stand of specified grass has been established with an average of one healthy grass plant per square inch, free of weeds, with no bare spots in excess of 5 inches in diameter, and free of surface irregularities.

3.9 CLEANUP

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of paved areas.



B. Maintain all areas neat and clean during seeding operations. On a daily basis, remove excess materials and debris to site location designated by COTR. At completion of Work, remove all such materials from site and dispose of in a legal manner.

C. Restore any damage caused by seeding operations to original condition.



LEAK MONITORING SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 330531 - 1

SECTION 330531 - LEAK MONITORING SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes materials and installation of modifications to the existing leak monitoring systems beneath above-ground fuel storage tanks, including all related items necessary to complete the work indicated or specified.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D1785, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 2. ASTM D2564, Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and

Fittings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Division 01.

B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Furnish completely dimensioned shop drawings, catalog cut or other data as required to provide a complete description of piping, fittings and other appurtenances as follows but not limited to:

1. Pipes, fittings, and gaskets. 2. Fabricated leak inspection port. 3. Grout and flowable fill mix designs.

C. Work Plan

1. Provide a pipe grouting work plan at least 30 days prior to the start of pipe grouting operations for center sump monitoring pipes.

2. Work plan shall include a description of pumping equipment and accessories, grout mix design, pipe fittings and connections to be used for grout injection, fabrication details for grouting connection points, and proposed methods to be used for grout injection and plugging of grouting ports.



D. Certificates

1. Certified records or reports of results of shop tests, such records or reports to contain a sworn statement that shop tests have been made as specified.

2. Manufacturer's sworn certification that pipe will be manufactured in accordance with specified reference standards for each pipe type.

E. Television inspection reports and videotapes made during grouting operations.

F. Leak testing results.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Schedule 80 per ASTM D1785 with solvent cement joints per ASTM D2564.

1. Manufacturers:

a. J.M Manufacturing Co. b. National Pipe and Plastics, Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Co. d. Or as accepted by The Authority.

2. Fittings: Conforming to same applicable ASTM Specification requirements for pipe.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.3 GROUT

A. Grout for annular spaces shall be sand cement slurry consisting of 3 parts ASTM C144 sand to one part C150 cement and enough water to create a flowable slurry. Bentonite material may also be added to produce a more flowable mixture. All slurry shall be plant batched and transit mixed unless otherwise approved by the Authority.



2.4 FLOWABLE FILL

A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Portland. 2. Density: 115- to 145-lb/cu. ft. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse. 4. Retain subparagraph above or first two subparagraphs below. 5. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine. 6. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral. 7. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 8. Strength: 100 to 200 psig at 28 days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and modify remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slopes.

D. Install piping free of sags and bends.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.



3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855.

3.4 GROUTING

A. Grout shall be injected into pipes using grout pump and grout injection hose. Details of the equipment and grout injection methods to be used shall be described in the pipe grouting work plan.

B. Install pipe connections, riser pipes, couplings, and temporary pipe seals as required to pump grout into the containment pipe interstitial space.

C. Add grout until the maximum volume indicated on the plans is installed.

D. If grout appears in the video monitoring of the 2-inch pipe, grout injection shall stop immediately and measures shall be taken to limit the quantity of additional grout entering the pipe.




B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's Quality Control Program for the work of this Section. THE IMPLEMENTATION OF A CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM THE RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, APPLICABLE CODES, REGULATIONS, AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. The Contractor Quality Control Program shall include, but not be limited to, the elements included herein. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the Contractor to use to generate the complete Contractor's Quality Control Program.



C. Leak Inspection Port

1. Each leak inspection port assembly shall be tested for leaks prior to being connected to the existing center sump monitoring pipe. The assembly shall be tested using temporary pipe plugs and a low pressure airline acceptance test in accordance with ASTM C828 and the following:

a. Plugs shall hold without bracing and show no movement. After plug is placed in pipe and sealed, brace or protect as insurance against blow out. Protect workers from potential of plug blow out.

b. Introduce low-pressure air slowly into sealed section until the internal air pressure is 4 psig.

c. Allow no less than 3 minutes for air temperature and pressure to stabilize. Add air only to maintain required test pressure.

d. After the stabilization period, disconnect the air supply. Continue to hold the test pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure.

e. Pressure testing shall be performed on site and witnessed by the COTR.

2. If actual time is longer, the port passes the test. If not, repair or replace the failed port and retest.



ABANDON EXISTING FUEL LINES 330533 - 1

SECTION 330533 – ABANDON EXISTING FUEL LINES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 01 Specifications apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Work includes abandoning existing fuel lines by grout filling and all related items necessary to complete the Work indicated or specified.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. SECTION 335245 - FUEL SYSTEM PIPE, CONNECTIONS, AND INSTALLATION.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Final Report: Report pipe size, length, and quantity of grout installed in each pipeline.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GROUTING PIPES

A. Abandon fuel lines as indicated. All work shall conform to current Federal requirements and Commonwealth of Virginia regulations.

B. Contractor shall remove residual fuel from piping and purge piping.

1. Prior to making modifications, piping shall be thoroughly purged with air for the removal of flammable vapors or any residue capable of producing flammable vapors. Continue purging and testing as required to ensure that subsequent natural ventilation will not result in the reinstatement of a flammable atmosphere.

2. Remove any obstructions to allow for continuous ventilation. 3. Refer to SECTION 335245 for additional requirements related to "Gas-Free" conditions.

C. Testing for Flammable Atmospheres.

1. Test for flammability with a combustible gas indicator properly calibrated and thoroughly checked and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


ABANDON EXISTING FUEL LINES 330533 - 2

2. Contractor personnel shall be trained in proper operation of the combustible gas indicator, interpretation of the readings obtained and the effects of oxygen deficient atmospheres on flammability measurements.

3. The atmosphere shall be tested within the pipe and associated excavations. The instrument shall be cleared after each reading.

4. Continuously monitor for flammable conditions within the pipes and surrounding area. If a flammable atmosphere is found, all work must stop and the pipes repurged or the area ventilated as appropriate. Do not begin work again until tests show that the atmosphere is not flammable.

D. Grout for fuel pipes to be abandoned in place shall be a high slump, low strength flowable material with a bentonite material additive. Fuel pipes shall be completely filled by pumping methods to removal all air pockets. Contractor shall demonstrate that each pipe segment has been completely filled with grout. Weld a minimum 0.25-inch steel plate to the open ends of each pipe section to seal pipe while grout is curing, refer to SECTION 335245 for pipe welding and testing requirements.

E. Contractor shall collect fuel residues and dispose of in accordance with applicable rules and regulations and requirements of the Authority. Contractor shall exercise caution to limit the potential for fuel spills during all grout filling and pipe capping operations.


4.1 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 01, Section "Quality Requirements.



IMPERVIOUS MEMBRANE LINER 334713 - 1

SECTION 334713 - IMPERVIOUS MEMBRANE LINER

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 1 Specifications apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Work includes furnishing and installing impervious membrane liner and geotextile filter fabric material within dike containment areas as shown on the drawings and as specified in these Special Provisions.


1. Earth Moving: SECTION 312000.




a. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. b. D412 - Rubber Properties in Tension. c. D471 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids. d. D751 - Coated Fabrics. e. D1149 - Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber (Flat

Specimens). f. D1204 - Test Method for Linear Dimensional, Charges of Nonrigid Thermostatic

Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature. g. D1777 - Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials. h. D2136 - Low-Temperature Bend Test for Fabrics Coated with Rubber and

Rubber-Like Materials. i. D4533 - Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. j. D4632 - Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. k. D4833 - Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes,

and Related Products.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's certification that materials comply with requirements and installer is acceptable.



B. Manufacturer's standard catalog information and specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations from membrane materials manufacturer for type of membranes required.

C. Samples of fabricated liner material 8-inch x 8-inch size.

D. Samples of factory- and field-jointed fabricated liner.

E. Guarantee to be submitted to COTR.

F. Shop drawings indicating location of field-fabricated joints, methods of sealing to other structures, and openings through lining.

G. Geotextile manufacturer's catalog information and material samples, 8-inch x 8-inch size.

H. Manufacture shall submit a list of not less than 5 projects totaling not less than 1 million square feet of jet fuel containment projects in service with the material specified in this section.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Subcontractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing, and handling of membrane lining materials as recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty, for a useful life of 10 years, signed by Subcontractor, Installer and manufacturer of primary membrane lining materials.

B. Within warranty period, the Subcontractor shall replace or repair at no additional cost to the Authority, defective materials and workmanship including leakage, abnormal aging or deterioration of materials, and other failures of membrane lining to perform as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All lining materials shall be first-quality, nonrecycled products designed and manufactured specifically for the purpose of containing Jet A fuel spills.

B. Lining shall consist of sheeting fabricated into large sections by means of factory joints into the minimum number of large pieces required to fit facility.

C. Lining shall be suitable for burial by aggregate surface and installation to concrete walls.

D. Include with liner all items necessary for complete installation including adhesive, anchoring bars and bolts, pipe shrouds, clamps, etc.

E. The liner shall be oil-resistant flexible liner with hydrocarbon Jet A fuel resistance characteristics, with or without fabric reinforcement.



F. The manufacturer of the lining material shall have a minimum of ten years of proven experience in the manufacture and shop assembly of the lining for field installation.

G. Geotextile filter fabric shall be Jet A fuel resistant and used as a protective material for the impervious liner.

2.2 LINER MATERIAL

A. Seaman XR-5 Liner Material 8138, or Engineer-approved equal material:

1. Properties:

a. Base material - Polyester Fabric. b. Fabric weight - 6.50 oz./sq. yd. minimum. c. Finished thickness - 38 mils minimum. d. Finished coated weight: ASTM D751 38+2 oz/sq. yd. minimum. e. Tensile strength grab lbs.: ASTM D751 550 x 550 lbs. min. f. Tear strength trapezoidal, ASTM D4533 35/35 lbs minimum. g. Hydrostatic resistance: ASTM D751 800 psi min. h. Puncture resistance: ASTM D4833 250 lbs. min. i. Bursting strength: ASTM D751 650 lb. min. j. Bonded seam strength as modified by NSF5Y: ASTM D751 550 lb. min. k. Cold crack resistance: ASTM D2136 1/8-inch mandrel for 4 hours at -30oF min. l. Dimensional stability: ASTM D1204, 212oF for 1 hour, 1.5% maximum. m. Resistance to Jet A: ASTM D471, 4% maximum change in mass after 28 day

immersion in Jet A with exposed fabric edges at room temperature. n. Ozone resistance: ASTM D1149, no cracks after 70 hours exposure of 30%

elongated sample at 104oF and 3 ppm ozone minimum. o. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion - Contraction: ASTM D1696, 8 x 10-6 in/in/deg

F minimum. p. Dead Load Seam Strength: ASTM D751 2-inch overlap seams, 4 hours. 210 lbs

load minimum at 70oF.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Seaman Corporation (8138) XR-5.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: Provide types of adhesive compounds and tapes recommended by liner manufacturer for bonding to structures, sealing of seams in membrane, and sealing projections through liner, and is resistant to jet fuel.

2.4 ANCHORING MATERIALS

A. Continuous Anchoring Bar: 1/4-inch x 2-inch stainless steel when connecting to concrete structure.



B. Anchoring Bolts and Clamps:

1. Anchoring bolts shall be of stainless steel, 1/2-inch diameter and length as required for sufficient installation to concrete structure.

2. Bolt spacing shall be at 12 inches oc. 3. Clamps shall be of stainless steel.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer liner sheets in as large a width as possible to minimize seaming.

B. Fabricate liner membrane in sizes as large as possible with factory-sealed seams, consistent with limitations of weight and installation procedures.

C. Factory seams shall be made with a 2-inch overlap plus or minus 1/4-inch by an automatic thermal high pressure welding process.

2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC

A. Geotextile shall be of first quality, nonrecycled products and be nonwoven needle-punched polyester or polypropylene material compatible for periodic exposure to Jet A fuel immersion.

B. Geotextile shall conform to the following:

1. Thickness: ASTM D1777 - 150 mils. 2. Tensile strength: ASTM D4632 - 400 lbs. min. 3. Elongation: ASTM D4632 - 50% min. 4. Puncture strength: ASTM D4833 - 200 lb. min. 5. Trapezoid Tear: ASTM D4533 - 130 lbs. min.

C. Geotextile shall be resistant to jet fuel.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Webtec Inc. 2. Hoechst Celanese Corp. 3. Contech Construction Products.

2.7 AGGREGATE BACKFILL

A. Aggregate backfill shall be placed in leak monitoring zones where indicated, and conform to the following gradation:

1. Aggregate No. 67 conforming to ASTM C33.



Gradation: Standard Square-Mesh Sieve Percent Passing U.S. Size or No. 100 .................................................... 3/4-inch 60-100 ................................................. 1/2-inch 0-5 .................................................... No. 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing and handling of membrane lining materials as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Place impervious membrane liner over prepared subgrade and one layer of geotextile fabric material in such a manner as to assure minimum handling. Follow installation procedures as recommended by liner fabric manufacturer.

1. Seal liner to all concrete structures, pipes, openings and lining joints to prevent leakage. 2. Do not install liner on wet or frozen subgrade or structures. 3. Use lapped and sealed joints in field, matching factory-fabricated joints. Form lapped

joints by lapping edges of pieces 2 inches to 4 inches, unless larger overlap recommended by liner manufacturer. Wipe contact surfaces of pieces clean and free of dirt, dust, moisture, or other foreign materials. Use solvent cleaning methods when recommended by liner manufacturer. Apply bonding cement to both contact surfaces in joint area and press together immediately, or use other seaming methods recommended by liner manufacturer. Roll as required to remove wrinkles. Carefully inspect seams and reseal voids.

a. No field joints shall be made when the ambient air temperature is less than 35oF. b. No field joints shall be made during any rainfall.

4. All liner-to-concrete joints shall be sealed and anchored as indicated. 5. Jointing of the liner to pipes shall consist of sealer, liner shroud and stainless steel

clamps. 6. Use manufacturer's recommended trench anchoring method for typical installation.

C. Joints to Structures: Remove curing compounds and coatings from joints area. Use liner manufacturer's recommended adhesive system. Seal to concrete structure and other openings through lining. Fit closely and seal around inlets, outlets and other projections through liner. Install anchor bar over bonded liner as indicated.

D. Repair or replace, as directed by COTR, areas of liner showing injury from scuffing, penetration by foreign objects, distress from rough subgrade, or other unacceptable conditions.

E. Repair tears, punctures, and other imperfections in liner fabric using patches of liner material itself and bonding methods recommended by liner fabric manufacturer. Repairs shall be made using heat welding methods. Roll as required to remove any wrinkles. For reinforced membranes, seal exposed fabric edges with a 3-inch wide nonreinforced tape of liner fabric.

F. Protect installed liner in accordance with liner manufacturer's instructions.



G. Geotextile filter fabric shall be used as a protective material for the impervious liner.

1. Install geotextile filter fabric, and all accessories in strict accordance with filter fabric manufacturer/fabricator's instructions, and as indicated and specified.

2. Install first layer of fabric on soil subgrade, install liner material, then install second layer of fabric on installed liner, only where indicated, using careful procedures with minimum handling. Panels will be unrolled as close to their final position as possible.

3. Field Overlap for Filter Fabric:

a. Fabric surfaces to be overlapped shall be clean before overlapping. b. Provide overlap of fabric panels of 12 inches minimum.

4. The Subcontractor shall adhere to the following stipulations while working on or near the filter fabric:

a. No smoking shall be allowed. b. No glass or metal containers or other sharp objects shall be used. c. No construction installation equipment shall pass over any exposed fabric surface. d. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for removing water from the surface prior to

fabric installation.

5. Inspect seams and patched areas immediately prior to initial placing of sand surface to ensure tight, properly bonded installation. Reseal any voids.

H. An aggregate surface material shall be placed over the geotextile/liner to a covering of 4 inches.

1. This material shall be as specified in Section 31 20 00. 2. Any damage to linings during covering portion shall have the sand covering carefully

removed by hand methods, the liner repaired as directed by the manufacturer, and the sand cover reinstalled at no cost to the Authority.

I. Subcontractor shall be to provide qualified factory technician to supervise the assembly and installation of liner, as necessary to obtain warranty conditions.




B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's quality Control Program for the work of this section. THE IMPLEMENTATION OF A CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM THE RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, APPLICABLE CODES, REGULATIONS, AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. The Contractor Quality Control Program shall include, but not be limited to, the elements included herein. These elements are provided only as a



minimum starting point for the Contractor to use to generate the complete Contractor's Quality Control Program.

C. Subcontractor shall provide a quality assurance certification regarding field installed material.

D. Subcontractor shall provide vacuum box testing of all field installed seams. COTR shall witness test.

E. Subcontractor shall perform a test field seam a minimum length of 5 feet and joint test performed. Test shall be performed for each days work or as required by the COTR.



FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 335243 - 1

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES-FUEL SYSTEM SECTION 335243 - FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, equipment and material for the complete installation of the aircraft fueling system indicated and specified.

B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by this Contract.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Fuel System Pipe, Connections, and Installation: SECTION 335245. 2. Identification of Fuel Piping and Equipment: SECTION 335244. 3. Fuel System Coatings for Corrosion Protection: SECTION 335246. 4. Fuel System Valves: SECTION 335247. 5. Fuel System Accessories: SECTION 335248. 6. Fuel System Filtration: SECTION 335251. 7. Inspection, Testing, and Flushing: SECTION 335253.

D. All control and instrumentation provided for fuel systems under DIVISION 33 shall be accomplished under the direction of the qualified control system Subcontractor described in DIVISION 26.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the individual Sections for fuel systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittals shall constitute a representation to the Authority that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data or he assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that he has coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor certifies that the Material and Equipment shown and marked on the Submittals are in compliance with the Contract Documents and can be installed, operated, and maintained in the allocated space.

C. Include as listed below and as specified in the contract documents, but not limited to, the following:



1. Piping fabrication drawings.

a. Include in-plan view of all systems piping 2-1/2 inches and larger. Provide isometrics for piping systems or tubing 2 inches in diameter and smaller.

b. Show the actual Equipment furnished, Equipment location by dimension, and connections.

c. Dimension pipelines in plan view and locate in elevation. Indicate support locations. d. Submit and obtain approval from the COTR before fabrication is begun. e. The pipe routing and supports shown are within the stress limits of ASME/ANSI B31.3.

Changes in piping configuration resulting from Contractor's selection of Equipment, or a preferred method of pipe routing, will require detailed stress analysis. For changes in the design documents by Contractor, stress analysis and support design shall be reanalyzed for all anticipated loads including gravity, thermal, pressure, and seismic in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.3. These calculations shall be performed and sealed by a Virginia-registered Professional Engineer and submitted as Submittals for review by COTR.

f. Pipe insulation and heat tracing plans, sketches, and details.

2. Concrete Foundations: Submit detailed drawings which include the following information:

a. Plan size, height, configuration, and top elevation of foundation. b. Location of each Equipment foundation dimensioned to a common reference point. c. Equipment anchor bolt location projection and dimensions. d. Type, size, and length of anchor bolts. e. Indicate reinforcing steel and size. f. List Equipment manufacturer's reference drawing numbers used for anchor bolt location.

3. Motors and Drives:

a. List all motor nameplate data on drawings including full load amps, locked rotor amps, and service factor for the motor at the voltage specified

b. List operating brake HP or the Equipment furnished c. Furnish dimensioned motor drawing. d. Provide drawings for shop or field fabricated guards.

4. Hangers and Supports:

a. Detailed drawings of support assemblies indicating the following:

(1) Plan and elevation of piping. (2) Plan and elevation of support components. (3) Complete Bill of Materials. (4) Support ID designation. (5) Concrete pad, grout, and foundation details.

5. Filter Separators. 6. Prefilters. 7. Manual Valves. 8. Check Valves. 9. Coating Materials. 10. Pipe Insulation and heat tracing



11. Pipe, Fittings, and Accessories. 12. Instrument Certifications. 13. Torque Certification for valves and vessels. 14. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under "Quality Assurance" Article. 15. Instruction books and maintenance manuals include, but not limited to, the following:

a. Filter Separators. b. Prefilters. c. Manual-Operated Valves. d. Controlling Instruments. e. Pressure Gauges. f. Pipe Supports. g. Fittings and Specials. h. Pipe insulation and heat tracing. i. Installation and Erection Details. j. Welding qualification and procedures.

16. Bind all instruction books and manuals complete in three-ring binders with hard durable covers clearly and permanently identified with Contract name and number.

17. Each manual shall include the Equipment purchase order.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Specified in each Section of DIVISION 33.

B. All Equipment and Materials shall be the latest design, new, undeteriorated, and the first quality standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such Equipment and Materials for a minimum of 5 years.

C. When two or more units of the same class of Equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer.

D. Unless otherwise specified, all items, materials, and components specified herein shall be suitable for use within an aviation jet fuel system with maximum operating condition of 275 psig, within a temperature range of 0ºF to 100ºF, and having a specific gravity of 0.81.

E. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

F. Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not supply, furnish, or install any pipe flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts of foreign manufacture. All pipe flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts shall be manufactured in the United States of America, and Contractor shall warrant the U.S.A. origin of all such items. Pipe flanges and fittings shall bear a stamp attesting to their place of origin. Contractor shall provide written certification from the manufacturer as to the origin of all flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts installed on the Project. If at any time Authority determines that any flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts are not of U.S.A. origin, Authority shall be entitled to replace all flanges, and/or fittings, and/or bolts and/or nuts (as the case may be) without the need for individual testing for conformance to technical specifications, or for proof of non-U.S.A. origin of the other items. Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, and consequential costs connected with such replacement.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, unload, check, and store in suitable facilities all Equipment and Materials.

B. Examine all Equipment and Materials for concealed damage and report any damage to COTR.

C. Be responsible for the safety and protection from loss or damage of all Equipment and Materials received until the Work is complete.

D. Pay all demurrage charges and claims for damage to vehicles resulting from the unloading operation.

E. Protect all Equipment and Materials during storage and prior to start-up which shall include the coverings of all openings, protection against rust and other damage, and other similar measures. Equipment may be stored outdoors only when approved. Contractor shall protect all coated pipe and fittings from ultraviolet deterioration.

F. Furnish all labor, Materials, and Equipment necessary to make a complete installation as indicated and specified.

G. Provide all necessary supports, brackets, or foundations for properly installing all Equipment or temporary piping.

H. Coordinate with the other trades before installation of Materials. Extra charges shall not be approved for interferences due to lack of coordination.

I. All Equipment shall be properly aligned, adjusted, and lubricated before final acceptance.

J. Spot paint all Equipment where the shop paint has been damaged or flaked off. Finish painting of all exposed piping and mechanical Equipment is specified in SECTION 335246 unless otherwise specified.

K. Furnish all bolts, studs, nuts, and gaskets for makeup of all connections to the Equipment and replace all gaskets damaged during storage, inspection, cleaning, or placing into service.

L. Retighten all threaded and bolted connections after installation. (This applies to Authority-furnished equipment as well and shall be accomplished by Contractor at no additional cost to Authority.)

M. Contractor shall be responsible for all added expenses due to his choice of Equipment.

N. All Materials shall be installed at times necessary to avoid delays in construction.

O. All work in existing buildings shall be done on a schedule as approved by COTR and Fuel System Concessionaire to assure minimum interruptions.



P. Provide vents and drains at high and low points where indicated and as required elsewhere for satisfactory draining and venting of fuel systems. For abovegrade piping systems, high point vents shall consist of a threadolet or weldolet, 3/4-inch ball valve and plug or cap, unless otherwise indicated. Low point drains for aboveground piping systems shall be similar except ball valve shall be 2-inch, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. All connections to valves 3 inches and larger shall be made with flanges unless indicated otherwise; all connections to Equipment shall be made with unions or flanges.

R. Piping shown on the Drawings is partially diagrammatic and not necessarily the exact routing. Provide all necessary bends that may be required to avoid conflict and interferences. Bends required in addition to those indicated shall be submitted for approval by COTR prior to fabrication.

S. Provide sleeves and flashings for all piping penetrating walls and slabs. Provide all required openings in walls and slabs.

T. Installation shall equal or exceed the minimum requirements of the applicable codes and these Specifications; however, where local codes and ordinances are more stringent, they shall govern.

U. Verify all measurements and location of existing facilities and underground piping before commencing work.

V. Certain permanent and temporary piping and equipment systems shall be installed, inspected, tested, flushed, and placed into operation prior to complete installation of the Work. Contractor shall provide all gaskets, companion flanges, bolting, weld caps, temporary blank-off plates, temporary piping systems, labor, materials, and accessories required to place these systems into operation.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENT



4.2 WELDING QUALIFICATION AND APPROVAL

A. Procedure: Upon award of the Contract, the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) that is intended to be used on the job shall be submitted to COTR.

B. Submit certified copies of the Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) as evidence that the intended procedures have been qualified in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes:

1. ANSI B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping. 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I and Section IX.

C. Design for the conditions of this Contract. Be complete and specific, and where necessary, differentiate between shop and field welding.



D. Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) Test Certificates:

1. Furnish welder performance qualification test certificates for positions 2G and 5G or 6G, made in strict compliance with the above codes.

2. Submit current qualification test records for each welder on the Project and keep record files current. Welder shall have been qualified to the WPS within the last six months.

3. Welder Performance Qualification test certificates shall be submitted to COTR before the welder shall be permitted to work on the Project.

4. Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material welded. 5. Submit copies of the Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) test certificates to COTR for

review as specified for Submittals. 6. Welders and welding operators shall be qualified without the use of backing rings for all

welding.

E. Submit WPS, PQR and WPQ on the forms contained within Appendix A of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

1. Stamp all welds with the welders or welding operators' identification number or symbol.

F. Costs: Costs incident to procedure and welders qualification tests shall be assumed by Contractor.

4.3 FIELD TESTS

A. Service and Test Engineers:

1. Furnish the services of experienced factory service engineers for at least the minimum time specified and additional time as required to perform and/or supervise the erection, start-up, testing and placing into successful operation all piping systems and equipment and to instruct the Fuel System Operator's personnel in the operation of equipment.

2. Travel and living expenses shall be paid by Contractor. 3. The services of the service engineer shall be provided upon request at the times required by

COTR. 4. The service engineer shall be directly responsible to COTR and when requested shall make

daily reports to COTR. 5. The service engineer's performance shall be satisfactory and acceptable to Authority.

Unsatisfactory performance time shall not be considered as qualified service time. 6. The service engineer shall be replaced at the request of COTR. 7. Upon arriving or leaving the site, the manufacturer's service engineer shall report to COTR. 8. The service and test engineers required to conduct start-up and tests of the systems and

Equipment furnished shall be called to the Site only after the installation is complete and ready, and COTR has been notified at least 24 hours in advance.

B. Testing:

1. Perform all tests as specified, recommended by the manufacturer, and required by the codes. Additional tests deemed necessary by COTR shall be performed to ensure proper operation and function of the Equipment furnished, and to certify that the furnished Equipment meets the performance specified.

2. Perform tests before Work is concealed and only after notifying COTR that items are ready. All tests shall be witnessed by COTR.



3. Conduct tests in a safe and orderly manner with qualified trained personnel in accordance with safety codes and local ordinances.

4. Obtain all necessary approvals, acceptances, and permits. 5. Correct all deficiencies resulting from tests. 6. Equipment and System Performance, and Acceptance Tests:

a. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all performance and acceptance tests and ensure that all required factory service engineers and test personnel will be present. The required test equipment and instruments will be available and calibrated for the tests.

b. Contractor shall conduct all performance and acceptance tests, and provide all test labor. c. Furnish all instruments, thermometers, and gauges required for testing. If the accuracy or

completeness of installed instrumentation is not sufficient, Contractor shall provide additional instrumentation.

d. Provide all pipeline connections, valves, temporary connections, and lines as specified or as required for testing.

e. Make all performance tests as soon as practical after successful operation to determine if the Equipment furnished meets the Specifications and guarantees.

f. Notify COTR at least one week in advance before the test. Contractor shall submit a written notice containing the test schedule, test procedure, and the personnel to be present at the test.

g. Contractor shall prepare a typewritten report of the test and submit six (6) copies of all test log sheets and reports to COTR as specified.

h. Contractor shall furnish electrical power, water, and operating personnel for start-up, operating, and performance testing.

i. In the event of failure of any Equipment or systems specified in this Contract to operate and perform as specified, or if the Equipment fails to meet the performance guarantees provided for in this Contract, Authority shall have the right to operate the system or Equipment until such defects have been remedied by Contractor, and the guarantees complied with. In the event that defects necessitate the rejection of the system or Equipment, Authority shall have the right to operate the Equipment without additional cost until such time as new Equipment is provided to replace the rejected Equipment. Replacement of the Equipment shall be coordinated and scheduled with COTR.

7. Tests and Checks of Piping Systems for Acceptance:

a. Inspection, Testing, and Flushing shall be as specified in SECTION 335253.

4.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. For factory testing of Equipment, refer to specific Sections of DIVISION 33 where Equipment is specified.



IDENTIFICATION OF FUEL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 335244 - 1

SECTION 335244 - IDENTIFICATION OF FUEL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the identification of fuel piping and equipment.


1. Fuel System Coatings for Corrosion Protection: SECTION 335246.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

B. American Petroleum Institute:

1. Bulletin No. 1542 - Airport Equipment Marking for Fuel Identification. 2. Recommended Practice 1637 - Using the API Color-Symbol System to Mark Equipment and

Vehicles for Product Identification at Service Stations and Distribution Terminals.

C. Federal Aviation Administration:

1. Advisory Circular 150/5230-4 - Aircraft Fuel Storage, Handling and Dispensing on Airports.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. 704 - Identification of the Hazards of Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals:

1. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. 2. Include, but not limited to, the following:

a. Proposed identification scheme including plans identifying proposed piping and equipment label locations.

b. Catalog cuts. c. Sample(s) representative of labels specified. d. Color chips.




A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. Comply with listed Codes and Standards for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following:

1. W. H. Brady Company. 2. Seton Name Plate Corporation. 3. Gammon Technical Products. 4. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

B. Paint products shall be as specified in SECTION 335246.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

A. Materials: Pressure-sensitive type labels or paint/stencil as specified herein.

B. Sizing of Pipe Markers, Arrows:

1. Conform to ANSI A13.1 as a minimum for legend letter size and length of color field based upon outside diameter of pipe or covering if applicable.

2. Size of arrows shall be coordinated with pipe marker and letter size and also be based upon outside diameter of pipe, or covering if applicable.

C. Color Coding:

1. Jet A piping systems:

a. Label in accordance with API Bulletin 1542 and FAA Advisory circular 150/5230-4. Label or stencil flow direction on piping.

b. Provide pressure sensitive type labels, Gammon Technical Products GTP-2135-5 (JET-A) and GTP-2135-4 (AVGAS 100 LL) or equal.

c. Label piping according to its function and/or origin (i.e. “T-23 Suction”, “T-22 Recirc” or “T-24 Low Suction”) Pipe shall be named generally as indicated on Contract drawings. Submit list of pipe naming scheme to COTR for approval. Every pipe shall be labeled.

d. Provide pipe label every 100 ft of pipe, or at least one label between 90 degree elbows.



2. Miscellaneous Piping Systems:

a. Label in accordance with ANSI A13.1. b. Use paint/stencils and decals as required.

D. Placards shall be installed on all sump separator inlet lines indicating the filter vessel type and mark number or storage tank number from which the inlet line emanates. Placards shall also indicate the line fill in gallons between the filter separator or tank and the sump separator inlet valve. This applies to both new and relocated filter vessels.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION OF FUEL EQUIPMENT

A. Materials: Protective Coatings as specified in SECTION 335246.

B. General: Stencil equipment designation with black paint on tanks, filters, air eliminators and pumps. Marking scheme and arrangement shall be submitted for approval by COTR.

C. All fuel system valves shall be painted black.

D. Nomenclature: Follow equipment designations used on mechanical flow diagram, arrangement drawings and control room graphics panel.

1. Filter change dates shall be stenciled on filtration vessels.

E. Sizes:

1. Filters, vessels - minimum 6-inch high letters, 2 places each.

2.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Provide identification markers for all piping and valves as described below. Permanently install in easily visible locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean area of surface to receive label or other pressure-sensitive item free of oil, grease, dust, dirt, or other substances which would affect adhesion.

B. On painted surface, install label only after coating system is complete and dry.

3.2 LOCATIONS

A. Piping Labels:

1. Use proper label type suitable for interior or exterior location as applicable. 2. Locate labels on piping near connections to equipment, adjacent to valves or fittings, and at

intervals not to exceed 25 feet.



3. For piping with arrows, indicate direction of flow. Place arrows adjacent to or below labels, depending upon visibility. For dual-flow piping, indicate both directions.

4. Locate legends to be visible from normal line of vision above floor finish or grade level. 5. Replace labels which do not adhere properly.

B. Equipment Identification:

1. Identification should be visible from normal operating position, platform, and control room. 2. Location of identification shall be approved by COTR.

PART 4 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:


A. For additional Quality Control requirements, refer to DIVISION 1 SECTION - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.



FUEL SYSTEM PIPE, CONNECTIONS, AND INSTALLATION 335245 - 1

SECTION 335245 - FUEL SYSTEM PIPE, CONNECTIONS, AND INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers aircraft fueling system piping, fittings, welded and screwed connections, qualification procedures, welding procedures, materials, radiographing (and other nondestructive testing) requirements, and construction requirements.

B. Aboveground piping shall be of conventional single-wall construction with pipe and fittings as specified herein for "CARRIER PIPE."


1. Fuel System General Requirements: SECTION 335243. 2. Fuel System Coatings for Corrosion Protection: SECTION 335246. 3. Identification of Fuel Piping and Equipment: SECTION 335244. 4. Fuel System Valves: SECTION 335247. 5. Inspection, Testing, and Flushing: SECTION 335253.

D. All materials, items, and components specified herein shall be suitable for use within an aviation jet fuel system with a maximum operating condition of 275 psig at 100ºF and a specific gravity of 0.81 + 0.05.

E. All end connections on piping and fittings to be welded shall be prepared for butt welding, without backing ring. Butt welding end preparation shall conform to ANSI B16.25.

F. Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not supply, furnish, or install any pipe flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts of foreign manufacture. All pipe flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts shall be manufactured in the United States of America and Contractor shall warrant the U.S.A. origin of all such items. Pipe flanges and fittings shall bear a stamp attesting to their place of origin. Contractor shall provide written certification from the manufacturer as to the origin of all flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts installed on the Project. If at any time COTR determines that any flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts are not of U.S.A. origin, Authority shall be entitled to replace all flanges, and/or fittings, and/or bolts and/or nuts (as the case may be) without the need for individual testing for conformance to technical specifications, or for proof of non-U.S.A. origin of the other items. Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, and consequential costs connected with such replacement.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.



2. A105 - Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 3. A139 - Electric-Fusion (Arc) - Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). 4. A193 - Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 5. A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature

Service. 6. A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated

Temperatures. 7. A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 8. D229 - Test Methods for Rigid Sheet and Plate Materials Used for Electrical Insulation.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 2. B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 3. B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. 4. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 5. B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.

C. American Petroleum Institute (API):

1. Spec 5L - Line Pipe. 2. STD 601.21 - Metallic Gaskets for Piping, Double-Jacketed Corrugated and Spiral Wound.

D. American Welding Society (AWS).


A. All pipe and piping materials shall be produced by a manufacturer acceptable to Authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the listed manufacturers.

1. Flange Gaskets:

a. Flexitallic. b. Furon. c. Klinger. d. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2. Flange Insulation Assembly:

a. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. b. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. c. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.



3. Pipe Supports:

a. Blaw-Knox. b. Grinnell. c. Piping Technology. d. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

4. Instrument Tubing, Fittings, and Tube Tray:

a. Parker. b. Swagelok. c. Hoke. d. B-Line. e. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2.2 FUEL CARRIER PIPING MATERIALS

A. Pipe shall be ASTM A53 Grade B or API 5L Grade B, seamless or electric resistance welded (double random lengths to reduce the number of joints). Stamp all pipe with specification and grade. Shop-wrapped pipe shall be stamped within 3 inches of end. Material certificates and mill test reports shall be provided.

B. Pipe 2 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 80, pipe 2-1/2 inches through 10 inches shall be Schedule 40, and 12 inches or larger shall be 3/8-inch (0.375-inch) wall thickness.

C. All carrier piping shall have full penetration welded connections, with the following exception. Socket-weld connections shall be used for 2 inches and smaller pipe in pits and aboveground piping except for connections to threaded valves, unions, and other equipment.

D. Pipe or fittings in the fuel piping systems shall not be galvanized.

E. Mill Cleaning and Coating of Pipe:

1. Pipe and fittings 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be internally epoxy lined at the mill as specified in SECTION 335246.

2. All pipe and fittings shall be externally coated as specified in SECTION 335246. 3. Clean inside and outside of pipe and fittings by sand or grit blasting or pickling to remove all

mill scale. 4. Apply in the mill an approved rust preventive coating to the interior and exterior of pipe and

fittings immediately after cleaning. Rust preventive shall be approved by the Authority and applied as recommended by the manufacturer. Rust preventive coating may be deleted from the pipe interior if pipe is internally epoxy lined immediately after cleaning. Rust preventive coating may be deleted from the pipe exterior if the pipe is externally epoxy coated immediately after cleaning.

5. The ends of the pipe shall be capped at the factory using suitable galvanized metal or plastic caps, secured with a double wrap of 2-inch-wide pressure sensitive tape.

2.3 FITTINGS FOR WELDED CARRIER PIPE

A. Butt welding type carbon steel, ASTM A234 Grade WPB, ANSI B16.9 for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. Wall thicknesses shall match pipe.



B. Socket welding 3,000-pound forged steel, ASTM A105, conforming to ANSI B16.9 and B16.11.

C. Elbows shall be long radius unless noted otherwise.

D. Changes in direction of pipe of other than 45 or 90 degrees shall be made as follows:

1. With long radius weldells cut to the proper angle and shop beveled. 2. Or, at the option of Contractor, with long radius pipe bends. Pipe roundness shall be

maintained to factory tolerance for straight pipe lengths. Submit Shop Drawings of all bends and bending procedures for approval by COTR.

3. Bends of 2 degrees or less may be miter joints.

E. Welded Branch Connections:

1. Welded branch connections shall be butt welding tees except as described herein and with COTR approval.

2. Fabricated tees shall be insert-type weldolets, elbolets, or vessolets. Standard weldolets shall not be used for below ground application. Fittings and connections shall provide a smooth and accessible surface suitable for 100% nondestructive examination of all welds.

3. Standard weldolets may be used for welded branch connections for aboveground piping. 4. Fabricated branch connections for aboveground piping or piping exposed in pits 2 inches and

smaller shall be sockolets, elbolets, or threadolets. Field-fabricated half couplings shall not be used.

2.4 FITTINGS FOR THREADED FUEL PIPE

A. 3,000-pound forged steel conforming to ANSI B16.11.

B. Threads of threaded jointed piping shall be full, clean, sharp, and true.

C. Bushings shall not be used except as noted on the Drawings.

2.5 FLANGES AND GASKETS

A. Flanges shall be standard weldneck type 150-pound forged steel, ASTM A105, and conforming to ANSI B16.5, except where 300-pound, 600-pound, or API flanges are required to correspond to the equipment to which the piping is joined. Inside diameter of flanges shall be bored to match the inside diameter of the mating piping.

B. Flange facings shall correspond to the equipment to which the piping is joined, and unless otherwise required, shall be standard 1/16-inch raised face flanges.

C. Flange gaskets shall be "Flexitallic Type CG" using 304 stainless-steel windings with flexible graphite "fire rated" filler, or approved equal, conforming to ASME B16.20.

D. Gaskets shall be resistant to the effects of aviation hydro-carbon fuels and manufactured of fire-resistant materials.

E. Full face gaskets shall be used for flat face steel flanged joints.

F. Ring gaskets shall be used for steel flanged joints with raised face flanges.



G. Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch in thickness.

2.6 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS

A. Machine bolts shall be heavy hexagonal alloy carbon steel conforming to ASTM A193 Grade B7.

B. Nuts shall be heavy hexagon alloy carbon steel conforming to ASTM A194, Grade 2H.

C. Stud bolts may be used as required for corresponding equipment.

2.7 FLANGED INSULATING JOINTS

A. Joints shall consist of weldneck companion flanges or a weldneck flange with mating valve flange and a package flange insulation assembly.

B. Flange insulation assembly shall be Gask-O-Seal Type "E" by PSI Products, Inc., for full insulation.

C. Assembly shall have full-face thermosetting molded phenolic insulating gasket with Buna-N synthetic rubber sealing element molded in a groove on each side of the phenolic retainer, 1/8-inch thick for series 150 raised face flanges. Minimum dielectric strength shall be 500 VPM conforming to ASTM D229.

D. Insulating washers shall be high strength phenolic, 1/8-inch thick (minimum). Dielectric strength shall be compatible with minimum insulating values of insulating sleeves and gaskets. Furnish double quantity of insulating and cadmium-plated steel washers for "full" insulation of flanges.

E. Insulating sleeves shall be of spiral wound Mylar, 1/32-inch wall thickness length as required to match thickness of two series 150 raised face flanges plus insulation. Gasket shall provide "full" insulation of studs, minimum dielectric strength shall be 4000 VPM.

F. Install insulating joints at the locations indicated.

G. Flange assemblies shall provide a minimum resistance of 1,000 ohms measured between each stud and both flanges when dry.

2.8 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Support design and location shall be as indicated. Refer to SECTION 335243.

B. Provide complete assemblies adequately rated for the applied loads.

C. Install all required inserts and anchors prior to concrete placement.

D. Expansion bolts shall be Hilti or equal.

E. Spacing and arrangements shall conform to ANSI B31.3.

F. Support locations are indicated on the Drawings for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger only, based on the pipe routing shown. Contractor shall locate and provide supports for piping smaller than 2-1/2 inches in accordance with specified Codes and Standards.



G. Contractors shall provide additional supports as required due to changes in the pipe routing or equipment supplied.

H. Reduce spacing one-quarter where changes in direction occur.

I. Pipes run parallel in the same plane may be supported on gang supports.

J. Install to prevent sag or vibration and to adequately support the piping without interfering with inherent flexibility.

K. Make adjustments after systems are placed in operation.

L. Explosion or powder driven fasteners shall not be used.

2.9 WELDING FILLER MATERIALS

A. Welding filler material shall be provided in accordance with the applicable welding procedure specification.

B. Filler materials shall be compatible with the base metal and shall be specified and purchased by ASME or AWS classification and chemical composition.

C. Welding electrodes and filler materials shall be properly stored in suitable regulated temperature enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The use of wet or moist electrodes will not be permitted.

2.10 THREADED PIPE JOINT SEALING

A. Either of the two materials specified below may be used for sealing of threaded pipe joints unless otherwise specified. All threaded joints shall be sealed.

B. Screwed Pipe Joint Tape: TFE tape applied to male threads. Tape width, number of wraps, and use of additional paste sealant shall be in accordance with tape manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Screwed Pipe Joint Compound: Use compound which is resistant to the effects of aviation hydrocarbon fuels and Underwriters' Laboratories approved for the application intended.

2.11 INSTRUMENT TUBING, FITTINGS, AND TUBE TRAY

A. Tubing:

1. Material shall be ASTM A269 Type TP316 annealed, seamless stainless steel. 2. Wall thickness shall be as required by the fittings, but not less than .049-inch.

B. Fittings: Stainless-steel compression type tube fittings for flareless tubes. Fitting connections shall be of four-piece construction including nut, front and back (double) ferrules, and fitting body.



2.12 INSULATION AND HEAT TRACING

A. Insulate sumped fuel pipe, wastewater drain pipe, wastewater transfer pipe and wastewater disposal pipes as indicated in the contract drawings. Match existing insulation.

B. Insulate only the aboveground portions of the pipe segments.

C. Heat trace the insulated pipe segments as specified in the contract drawings and electrical specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HAULING AND STRINGING PIPE

A. Perform the hauling and stringing of pipe and other materials in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and material. If damage is sustained, Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement cost.

B. Galvanized metal or plastic caps covering the ends of the pipe shall remain in place until the welding of the pipe. If any caps are not in place, resecure to the pipe ends to prevent dirt, water, and other foreign material from entering.

C. String pipe on right-of-way in such a manner as to cause the least interference with the normal use of the land crossed. Leave gaps at intervals to permit use of land and passage of equipment.

D. Contractor shall promptly repair, at his own expense, all roads, fences, building, or other property damaged by him in the progress of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ABOVEGROUND PIPE

A. Install complete with valves, fittings, and accessories and make all necessary connections.

B. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories required to eliminate interferences and to match actual equipment connection locations and arrangements.

C. All fabrication and installation shall conform to ANSI B31.3.

D. Verify all measurements, and location of existing facilities and underground piping, before commencing work. Submit discrepancies for clarification before proceeding with the installations.

E. Arrange all piping with proper slopes, true to line, without sags, traps, or pockets, and pitched to drain at the lowest points so that entire systems can be emptied.

F. Provide high point vents, pump outs, and low point drains as required or indicated on the Drawings.

G. Provide threaded unions where indicated and as required elsewhere to permit satisfactory disassembly of small bore piping for threaded valve and equipment maintenance.



3.3 HANDLING COATED PIPE

A. Storage Racks:

1. Storage rack material shall be 4 to 6 inches in bearing width and placed not less than 10 feet apart.

2. Do not rack pipe 10-inches in diameter and larger more than two sections in height; and pipe 8-inches and under not more than 4 sections in height.

3. Protect all racked pipe by use of suitable padded material between sections. 4. All coated pipe shall be protected from ultraviolet deterioration.

B. Handling Operation:

1. All trucks handling coated pipe shall have properly padded bolsters, chains, and binders so as to not damage the coating.

2. Pipe shall not be rolled off the truck but shall be carefully lowered onto the skids by mechanical equipment.

3. Coated and wrapped sections of pipe must be lifted with slings of approved width and are not to be dragged or pulled into position.

3.4 PIPE CLEANING

A. Clean each joint before welding into the system, to remove all loose debris.

B. Remove materials such as welding rods, dirt, and similar materials, left inside after completion of the lines. Expenses incurred by the Authority for removal of such objects shall be reimbursed by Contractor.

3.5 GAS-FREE CONDITIONS

A. All operations in the construction area that involve open flames or the possibility of arcing or sparking shall be conducted in a "Gas-Free" condition.

B. These operations shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Use of internal combustion engines not equipped with Underwriters' approved spark and flame eliminators.

2. Use of electric motors or electric devices with arcing brushes or sliding contacts that could produce arcing or sparking.

3. Use of tools which may produce impact sparks. 4. Electric or gas welding. 5. Use of cutting or other torches or other open-flame equipment. 6. Holiday testing. 7. Use of equipment with hot surfaces or glowing elements. 8. Use of any other equipment or procedure that could create a fire hazard.

C. Contractor shall monitor the use and suitability of the equipment and procedures on the job and maintain a safe "Gas-Free" condition when necessary during construction.



D. Prior to commencing any phase of the Work requiring a gas-free condition, Contractor shall make the following provisions:

1. Empty pipes containing fuel and purge of all vapors. 2. Isolate, blank off, and adequately ventilate open piping sections so that no part of the pipe

containing fuel or vapors is exposed. 3. Drain and ventilate fuel tanks prior to work inside tanks or on any of the tank connections. 4. Make certain that there are no open pools or reservoirs of fuel exposed in the vicinity of the

Work. 5. Perform all other safety precautions necessary to ensure that these operations are conducted

in a safe manner in accordance with all applicable codes.

E. Use a combustible gas analyzer to make certain no combustible gas concentrations exist in the construction area when performing these operations.

3.6 PERMITS

A. Provide special permits required for any work under the various sections of this Section of the Specifications and pay all permit fees.

3.7 WELDED JOINTS

A. Process: Welding shall be accomplished by the use of the shielded metallic arc process and shall be in strict accordance with ANSI B31.3.

B. Procedure: Upon award of the Contract, submit for review the welding procedures and qualifications that are intended to be used on the job in accordance with SECTION 335243.

1. COTR reserves the right to request qualification tests to be performed at the jobsite for each welder and welding operator on the job, such tests being made in strict compliance with the above code.

C. Costs: Costs incident to these procedures and the welder's qualification tests shall be assumed by Contractor.

D. Inspectors: Shop welding and fabrication shall be subject to the right of the Authority to maintain one or more inspectors in the shop or to visit the shop at any time this work is in progress.

E. Identification:

1. Each welder shall identify his weld with specific code marking signifying his name and assigned number.

2. Contractor shall maintain a code listing assigned to each welder. 3. Stamp on the pipe using "low stress" steel stamp, or other approved method, not closer than

4 inches to a weld.

F. Butt Welding End Preparation on all Pipe:

1. Conform to ANSI B16.25. 2. Shop and field bevels shall be machine cut; manual flame cutting (without machine guide)

shall not be permitted.



G. All welds shall have full penetration and fusion and shall conform to ANSI B31.3.

H. Backing rings shall not be used.

I. Align pipe joints with pipe clamps prior to welding. Clamps or other alignment devices shall not reduce the internal pipe diameter.

J. Defective welds shall be repaired in accordance with ANSI B31.3 at Contractor's expense.

K. Repairs to defective welds shall not be made prior to authorization. COTR will determine on the basis of the testing laboratory report if repairs may be made or if the entire joint must be cut out and welded again.

L. No weld metal shall project within the piping at completion of the welding.

3.8 RADIOGRAPHING

A. Contractor shall coordinate and arrange for radiography by an approved testing laboratory of a minimum of 10% of selected aboveground or exposed welded joints. This shall include all circumferential butt welds and all fabricated branch connections.

B. Testing laboratory shall be selected by and employed by Contractor subject to COTR's approval.

C. The radiographing shall be coordinated by Contractor and conducted at the Project Site such that COTR and the testing laboratory are provided with adequate notice that welds are available for radiographing and all the work required of Contractor in connection with the radiographing is properly completed at no additional cost to the Authority. Factory welds of the final carrier pipe shall be radiographed by an approved testing laboratory. Radiography of factory welds may be conducted at the factory site.

D. Reports for both factory and field welds shall be submitted throughout the progress of the Work as described below.

E. All radiographing and subsequent reports shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.3.

F. Each weld shall be assigned a number. Contractor shall maintain a marked up copy of piping drawings identifying the location and number of each radiographed weld. Upon completion of the Work, these drawings shall be submitted with as-constructed drawings.

G. Radiograph exposure records shall be kept by the testing laboratory which show date, location, area, film number, serial number, film combination, time, source-film distance, angulation, weld number and other pertinent information for each weld radiographed.

H. A summary of this record and an expert interpretation by the testing laboratory shall be submitted in report form for each weld to COTR and Contractor. Submit test results before pipe is filled with fuel.

I. All joints shall be left exposed until radiographing and other testing is completed.



J. Welds which do not meet the standards of acceptability as outlined in the above mentioned ANSI B31.3, will be judged unacceptable and shall be repaired or cut out and rewelded by Contractor as directed by the testing laboratory, all at no additional cost to the Authority. Repaired and rewelded joints will then be reradiographed.

K. Inspection stamps, code symbol stamps, and other required information shall be stamped on the pipe by using "low stress" steel stamps, or other approved method.

L. All the costs of the radiographing at each weld and the accompanying reports and interpretation shall be paid by Contractor and shall be included in the Contract Price. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and scheduling of the work.



A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 1 SECTION - QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS.



FUEL SYSTEM COATINGS FOR CORROSION PROTECTION 335246 - 1

SECTION 335246 - FUEL SYSTEM COATINGS FOR CORROSION PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers the field and shop-applied corrosion protection coatings of exterior and interior surfaces for fuel system piping, pipe supports, valves, fittings, equipment, and structural steel. Coating systems are specified by "Protective Coating System" sheets at the end of this Section.

B. Coating includes surface preparation, prime coat (first coat), finish coats (second and third coats), inspection, cleaning, and touch-up of surfaces and equipment. Shop preparation, prime coat and finish coats to be shop applied, may be specified elsewhere or referenced to this Section so that a complete system is specified and coordinated.

1. Where surface preparation and first (prime) coat are specified in other Sections to be shop applied such as for structural steel, or equipment, only the touch-up and finish coats are a part of field painting. Surface preparation is the required degree of preparation prior to application of first (prime) coat.

2. If materials are provided without shop primer such as miscellaneous steel or sheet metal, then surface preparation, first, second, and third coats are a part of field painting.

3. Where equipment or materials are provided with shop-applied finished coating system, only touch-up is a part of field painting.

4. Refer to applicable Sections to determine whether surface preparation and first coat, or complete coating system, is to be shop applied.


1. Fuel System General Requirements: SECTION 335243. 2. Fuel System Pipe, Connections, and Installation: SECTION 335245. 3. Identification of Fuel Piping and Equipment: SECTION 335244. 4. Fuel System Valves: SECTION 335247. 5. Fuel System Accessories: SECTION 335248. 6. Fuel System Filtration: SECTION 335251. 7. Inspection, Testing, and Flushing: SECTION 335253.

D. See Specification SECTION 335245 for special safety requirements for a "gas-free" condition during certain operations in the construction area.

E. Colors:

1. Colors shall be selected after submittal of approved manufacturer's color Samples. 2. Color of finish coatings shall match accepted color Samples.



3. When second and finish coats are of same type, tint or use an alternate color on second coat to enable visual coverage inspection of the third coat.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. Removes oil, grease, soil, and other substances. Used with other methods to remove rust, paint, and mill scale.

2. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. Removes loose material. Not intended to remove all scale or rust.

3. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. Removes all scale, rust, foreign matter. Leaves surface gray-white uniform metallic color.

4. SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. Two-thirds of every 9 square inches free of all visible residues; remainder only light discoloration.

5. SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. Removes only loose material, remaining surface tight and abraded to give anchor pattern.

6. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. At least 95% of every 9 square inches shall be free of all visible residues.

7. SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Includes, but not limited to, the following:

1. Schedule of products to be used. Schedule shall include the following information:

a. Surfaces for system to be applied. b. Surface preparation method and degree of cleanliness. c. Product manufacturer, name, and number. d. Method of application. e. Dry film mil thickness per coat of coating to be applied.

1. Color charts for selection and acceptance.

C. Technical and material safety data sheets.


A. Include on label of container:

1. Manufacturer's name, product name, and number. 2. Type of paint and generic name. 3. Color name and number. 4. Storage and temperature limits. 5. Mixing and application instructions, including requirements for precautions which must be

taken. 6. Drying or curing time.



B. Factory-Applied Pipe Coatings:

1. Coating applicator shall have a minimum of 5 years of certifiable experience in the type of coating Work required.

2. Certification of quality control procedures during application of internal and external coatings shall be submitted to COTR for review. Certification to include: surface preparation, film thickness per coat, curing procedures, and holiday testing.

C. Pre-Painting Conference:

1. Within 90 days after Contract award and before Project field painting starts, representatives for COTR, Contractor, coating contractor, and coating manufacturer's technical representative shall meet with the Authority.

2. Agenda for the meeting will include details of coating specifications to ensure understanding and agreement by all parties for compliance.

D. Coating contractor shall certify in writing to COTR that he has previously applied all the systems in this Specification and has the ability to prepare the surfaces correctly as specified.

1. A coating report shall be completed daily at each phase of the coating system starting with surface preparation. These will be submitted on the form attached at end of this Section.

E. In the event a problem occurs with coating system, surface preparation, or application, coating contractor and coating manufacturer's technical representative shall promptly investigate the problem and submit results to COTR.

F. Stated Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) shall be unthinned maximum VOC certified by manufacturer. Maximum VOC allowable this area are 2.8 lb/gal for shop-applied coatings and 3.5 lbs/gal for field-applied coatings.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials:

1. Deliver in sealed containers with labels and information legible and intact. 2. Allow sufficient time for testing if required.

B. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable materials on Project Site. 2. Provide separate area and suitable containers for storage of coatings, and related equipment. 3. Dispose of used or leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, rollers, and related materials in

accordance with applicable regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Proprietary names and product numbers are specified in most protective coating system data sheets for material identification.



B. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide products from the listed manufacturers.

1. Ameron Protective Coatings Division, Ameron Corp. 2. Carboline Company, Inc. 3. International. 4. Tnemec Company, Inc. 5. ICI Devoe Coatings. 6. Lilly Powder Coatings. 7. 3M Electrical Specialties Division. 8. Sherwin Williams. 9. Or as Acceptable to the Authority

2.2 GENERAL

A. Materials furnished for each protective coating system shall be compatible to the substrate.

B. When unprimed surfaces are to be coated, entire coating system shall be by the same coating manufacturer to assure compatibility of coatings.

C. When shop-painted surfaces are to be coated, ascertain whether finish materials will be compatible with shop coating. Inform COTR of any unsuitable substrate or coating conditions or product.

D. Internal pipe coating shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for exposure to Jet A fuel.

2.3 COATING SYSTEMS

A. Specified on the "Protective Coating System" sheets at the end of this Section. System E-4 shall be factory-applied.

2.4 SURFACES AND MATERIALS TO BE COATED

A. System E-4:

1. Internal coating of fuel piping and fittings 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. System T-1:

1. Exterior structural and miscellaneous steel not galvanized including:

a. Columns, beams, platforms, stair supports, stringers, checkered plate treads, railings, kickplates, and pipe supports.

2. Guard posts (exterior).

a. Paint all guard posts reflective yellow.

3. Aboveground exposed piping, valves, filter vessels. All fuel system valves shall be painted black.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces for each coating system conforming to SSPC or ASTM surface preparations specifications listed.

1. If grease or oils are present, SSPC-SP1 shall precede any other method specified. 2. Remove surface irregularities such as weld spatter, burrs, or sharp edges, prior to specified

surface preparation. 3. Prepare surfaces of field welds, sears, or other damage, and touch up with coating as

specified or recommended by manufacturer.

B. Depth of profile will be as specified for each system, but in no instance shall it exceed one-third of the coating dry film thickness per coat.

C. Prepare only those areas which will receive the first coat of the system on the same day.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Use properly designed brushes and rollers and spray equipment for all applications.

C. Dry film thickness of each system shall meet the minimum specified but not exceed it more than 20% or coating manufacturer's requirements if less.

D. On unprimed surfaces apply first coat of the system the same day as surface preparation.

E. Field painting shall remain 3 inches away from unprepared surface of any substrate such as areas to be welded or bolted.

F. Environmental Conditions:

1. Atmospheric temperature must be 50ºF or higher during application, unless approved by coating manufacturer. Do not apply coatings when inclement weather or freezing temperature may occur within coating curing time requirements.

2. Wind velocities for exterior applications shall be at a minimum and not greater than coating manufacturer's limits.

3. Relative humidity must be less than 85% and the temperature of the surface to be painted must be at least 5 degrees above the dew point.

4. Provide adequate ventilation equipment in all areas of application to ensure that at no time does the content of air exceed the Threshold Limit Value given on the manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for the specific coatings being applied.



G. Protection:

1. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not being painted, areas not to be painted, and the work of other trades. Remove protective materials when appropriate.

2. Provide signs to indicate fresh paint areas. 3. Mask, remove, or otherwise protect finish hardware, machined surfaces, grilles, lighting

fixtures, and prefinished units as necessary. 4. Provide cover to prevent paints from entering orifices in electrical or mechanical equipment. 5. Provide daily cleanup of both storage and working areas and removal of all paint refuse,

trash, rags, thinners, and related materials. Dispose of leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, rollers, and related materials in accordance with applicable regulations.

6. Do not remove or paint over equipment data plates, code stamps on piping, or UL fire-rating labels.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to original condition as required.

B. Remove spilled, dripped or splattered paint from all surfaces.

3.4 COATING REPAIRS

A. Repair all damages to pipe coating systems before the piping is holiday tested.

B. This includes all cuts, breaks, voids, bruised or scarred spots, or other damage caused prior to delivery, or resulting from handling or installation of the pipe, or from any cause whatsoever.

C. Included also are damaged coatings where new connections are made to existing coated pipes or where existing coated pipes are uncovered or exposed for any reason.

D. Also repair the coating where welds are made and where damaged or broken by the installation of instrumentation or other accessories or appurtenances.

E. Repair all holidays detected during inspection of coatings.

F. Repair coating where field welds are made or where otherwise damaged as follows:

1. Exposed Piping Systems: Use Protective Coating System T-1 materials and techniques. 2. Complete all weld radiography for fuel piping joints prior to application of coatings.

PART 4 - QUALITY CONTROL


A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 1 – SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.



4.2 INSPECTION

A. Use wet film gauges to check each application about every 15 minutes in order to correct low or heavy film build immediately.

B. Use dry film gauge to check each coat when dry, and the total system when completed.

C. Use holiday or pinhole detector on metal systems to detect and correct voids when indicated on system sheet.

D. Furnish a sling psychrometer and perform periodic checks on both relative humidity and temperature limits.

E. Check temperature of the substrate at regular intervals to be certain surface is 5ºF or more above the dew point.

F. Complete coating reports daily using form attached at end of this Section. END OF SECTION 335246



COATING REPORT

Contract Name: Contract No.:

Coating Contractor: Foreman:

Unit or Surface Identification:

Unit or Surface Location: Exterior , Interior

Surface Preparation:

Date ; Air Temp oF; Relative Humidity %

Method of Surface Preparation:

Profile achieved mils (if applicable).

Touch-Up:

Date ; Time ; Air Temp oF; Surface Temp oF

Relative Humidity %; Dew Point oF

Coating Used ; Dry Film Obtained mils.

First Coat:



Coating Used ; Dry Time Before Recoat hrs.

Dry Film Obtained mils.

Second Coat:




Dry Film Obtained mils.

Third Coat




Dry Film Obtained mils



Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company Engineers – Architects – Consultants

Kansas City Missouri

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEM

System: E-4

SERVICE: Internal Pipe Coating, Fuel Systems

Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP5 with nominal profile depth of 1.5 to 2.5 mils (0.038 to 0.051 mm).

First Coat: High solids, high build, amine-cured epoxy, 69% solids by volume, off-white or similar color. Apply at 5 to 6 mils (0.127 to 0.152 mm) dry film thickness. 2" (50 mm) cutback at pipe ends.

Second Coat: Same as first coat, except white color. 2" (50 mm) cutback at pipe ends.

System Total: Minimum 10 mils (0.254 mm) dry film thickness.

Volatile Organic Content: Maximum 2.8 lbs per gallon (340 g/L).

Inspection: Check for voids with suitable electric holiday detector operating at proper voltage.

COATING MANUFACTURER

PRODUCT DESIGNATION

FIRST COAT TOUCH UP SECOND COAT

Ameron Amercoat 395 Amercoat 395

Carboline Plasite 9060 Plasite 9060

ICI Devoe Devran 744 Devran 744

International Interline 850 Interline 850

Sherwin-Williams Dura-Plate 235 Dura-Plate 235 B67-235/B67V235 B67-235/B67V235

Tnemec Tneme-Liner Series 61 Tneme-Liner Series 61



Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company Engineers – Architects – Consultants

Kansas City, Missouri

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEM

System: T-1

SERVICE: Steel Storage Tanks – Exterior of Tanks Coating System Field Applied

Surface Preparation: Field First Coat: SSPC-SP6

First Coat: High build, high solids polyamide, polyamine, or polyamidoamine epoxy with minimum 65% solids by volume. Apply at 4.0 mils (0.102 mm) dry film thickness.

Second Coat: High build, high solids polyurethane low sheen enamel with minimum 60% solids by volume. Apply at 5.0 mils (0.127 mm) dry film thickness when spraying. If environmental conditions are such that rolling is required, several coats may be required to achieve 5.0 mils (0.127 mm) dry film thickness.

System Total: Minimum 9.0 mils (0.229 mm) dry film thickness.

Volatile Organic Content: Maximum 2.8 lb/gal (340 g/L)

COATING MANUFACTURER

PRODUCT DESIGNATION

FIRST COAT TOUCH UP SECOND COAT

Ameron Amercoat 395 Same as first coat Amershield SG

Carboline Carboguard 893 Series Same as first coat Carbothane 133 VOC

ICI Devoe Devran 224HS Same as first coat Devthane 378

International Intergard 345 Same as first coat Interthane 870 HS, semi-gloss

Keeler & Long Kolor-Poxy Primer Same as first coat Neothane Hi-Solids KL3200 KLNC-2 Series

Pittsburgh Paints Pitt-Guard 97-145 Same as first coat Pitthane 95-8800 Series

Sherwin-Williams Recoatable Epoxy Primer Same as first coat Acrolon 218 HS B67 Series B65-300 Series

Tnemec Epoxoline II N69 Same as first coat Endura-Shield II, Series 1075 Note: A low sheen or semi-gloss is specified to reduce reflections in vicinity of air terminals. Gloss or Hi-gloss enamel will not be acceptable in these areas.


FUEL SYSTEM VALVES 335247 - 1

SECTION 335247 - FUEL SYSTEM VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.


1. For general requirements of fueling system: DIVISION 33, SECTION 335243 - FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

2. Electrical Work: DIVISION 26.

C. Extent of Work shall be as follows:

1. All special valves, pilots, fittings, equipment, and related items, shall meet the following requirements:

a. Be furnished, installed, tested, and put into successful operation. b. Be complete with all necessary miscellaneous pipe, valves, unions, fittings, auxilia-

ries, and related items, whether shown on the Drawings or not, but required. c. Meet the requirements of applicable codes and standards as specified.

2. Piping connected to Equipment which must vary from the Drawings shall be furnished and installed as required to make a complete and workable installation without additional cost to the Authority. This requirement includes changes due to the selection of a differ-ent Equipment manufacturer than what is indicated on the Drawings, specified, or a de-sign change made by the manufacturer between the time the piping system was designed and the time of installation.

3. Control Valves: Furnish complete with pilots, couplings, tubing, etc. 4. Spare, Replacement, or Additional Parts:

a. Where spare, replacement, or additional parts are required for the Equipment speci-fied herein, these items shall be delivered to COTR immediately upon receipt at the Site.

b. Parts shall be packaged and sealed for long storage and be securely and visibly la-beled as to part, function, and name of Equipment to which they apply.

c. Contractor shall prepare an inventory list of the items delivered to COTR.

D. This Section covers valves related to the aircraft fueling system for this Project. All items, materials, and components specified herein shall be suitable for use within an aviation jet fuel



system with a maximum operating condition of 275 psig, 0°F to 100°F, and having a specific gravity of 0.81.

E. Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not supply, furnish, or install any flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts of foreign manufacture.

1. All flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts shall be manufactured in the United States of America and Contractor shall warrant the U.S.A. origin of all such items.

2. Flanges and fittings shall bear a stamp attesting to their place of origin. 3. Contractor shall provide written certification from the manufacturer as to the origin of all

flanges, fittings, bolts, and nuts installed on the Project. 4. If at any time the Authority determines that any flanges, fittings, bolts, or nuts are not of

U.S.A. origin, the Authority shall be entitled to replace all flanges, and/or fittings, and/or bolts, and/or nuts (as the case may be) without the need for individual testing for conformance to technical specifications, or for proof of non-U.S.A. origin of the other items.

5. Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, and consequential costs connected with such replacement.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. A216 - Carbon Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Ser-vice.

2. A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. 16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.


1. 6FA – Specification for Fire Test of Valves 2. 6D - Specification for Pipeline Valves (Gate, Plug, Ball and Check Valves). 3. 600 - Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Buttwelding End. 4. 607 - Fire Tests for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves.

D. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM).

E. Military Specifications:

1. MIL-C-4556 - Coating, Kit, Epoxy for Interior of Steel Fuel Tanks. 2. MIL-STD-810 - Environmental Test Methods and Engineering Guidelines.

F. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).




A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ball Valves:

a. Worcester Controls. b. Watts. c. Jamesbury. d. Whitey. e. MCF. f. WKM. g. Nibco. h. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2. Check Valves:

a. Gammon Technical Products (Model GTP-1294, SS valve). b. Cameron. c. Walworth (Figure W55405). d. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

3. Thermal Relief Valves:

a. Consolidated b. Hydroseal. c. Taylor Tools. d. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

4. Double Block and Bleed (DBB) Plug Valves:

a. General Twin Seal. b. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

5. Gate Valves:

a. Powell. b. Velan. c. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.



6. Instrument Valves:

a. Anderson, Greenwood & Co. b. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

7. Solenoid Valves:

a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO). b. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2.2 BALL VALVES

A. Valve body shall be of carbon steel with 316 stainless steel ball and stem.

B. Valve shall be rated for 275-psig working pressure.

C. Valves 2-1/2-inch size and smaller shall be of three-piece bolted construction, with threaded end connections unless indicated or specified otherwise.

D. Valves 3-inch size and larger shall be of two-piece split body construction, with flanged end connections. Valves shall comply with API 6D.

E. Seals and/or seats shall be reinforced TFE.

F. Provide with a vinyl-coated, stainless steel locking handle suitable for padlocking. Valves 6-inch size and larger shall be provided with a closed case gear operator.

G. Valves shall be certified "fire safe" per API-607.

H. Where noted, valves shall have quick closing spring return handle.

I. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve number.

2.3 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves 2-1/2-inch and smaller:

1. Forged steel, Class 800, lift check. 2. Elastomers shall be compatible with jet fuel. 3. End connections shall be threaded. 4. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve

number.

2.4 THERMAL RELIEF VALVES

A. Carbon steel body, stainless steel internals, disc and seat type, Viton elastomers (seat, O-ring), closed cap (no lever).

B. Valves located at other system locations shall be set to relieve at 125 psi.



C. All set points shall be a nominal point within a "SET POINT" range, adjustable for field conditions.

D. Inlet and outlet connections shall be 3/4-inch and 1 inch, respectively, with threaded connections.

E. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve number.

2.5 DOUBLE BLOCK AND BLEED (DBB) PLUG VALVES

A. Valve body shall be steel with reduced port configuration and chrome-plated bore. Valve plug shall be chrome or nickel plated. Valve port openings shall be approximately 70% free area of pipe size installed in.

B. The valve assembly shall include a manual bleed valve and a thermal relief valve discharging upstream of valve throat.

C. Slip seals and valve O-rings shall be Viton.

D. Valve shall be fire tested and qualified to API 6FA. Valve shall be rated for 275-psig working pressure.

E. Gear operators shall be provided for valves 6 inches and larger.

F. Valve extensions shall be provided and installed as indicated in the contract drawings.

G. Valve drains shall be 1" with pipe, elbows, a spring-loaded ball valve drain, and plug design to match DBB-21 at Tank 24.

H. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve number.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Valve shall be outside screw and yoke, cast steel body design, solid disc.

B. Valve shall be rated for 275-pound working pressure.

C. Body and bonnet materials shall be high-grade cast steel conforming to ASTM A216. Valves shall conform to API 600 and API 6D.

D. Valve disc and seat ring shall be chromium stainless steel.

E. End connections shall be 150-pound raised-face flanged.

F. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve number.

2.7 INSTRUMENT VALVES

A. Shall have a replaceable seat insert of Delrin and Teflon stem packing.



B. Body shall be carbon steel, with working pressure of 3,000 psi.

C. Shall have a needle type bleed valve.

D. End connections shall be screwed.

E. All valves shall be labeled with a stainless steel name tag pendant identifying the valve number.

2.8 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Two-way pilot operated. Normally closed, energize to open.

B. NPT ends, stainless steel body, 0 psi minimum differential pressure to open, 100 psi maximum operating pressure differential.

C. Combination explosionproof/watertight, 277Vac.

D. Provide with maintained-position manual operator.

E. Valve shall be ASCO or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect valve for cleanliness, corrosion and operability. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve's closure member to the shipping position.

C. Examine threads or flanges on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or indentation) and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, defects, and damage.

E. Prior to valve installation, examine the pipe for cleanliness and proper alignment.

F. Replace defective valves with new valves.

3.2 VALVE ENDS SELECTION

A. Unless indicated otherwise, select valves with the following end connections.

1. Sizes 2-1/2-inch and smaller: Threaded.



2. Sizes 3 inch and larger: Flanged.

3.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

A. Contractor shall adjust all valves for the flows, level settings, and pressure settings indicated and specified.

B. Set rate of closure of control valves to eliminate surges and shocks in the systems as installed.

C. Final adjustments shall be made with system in operation during system commissioning. Contractor shall frequently check all valve settings following final adjustment to monitor for potential drift. Adjustments back to original setting shall be performed immediately if drift occurs.

D. Modify adjustments during start-up, including flow rates, pressure settings, meter settings, and other variables as required by COTR on the job.

3.4 TUBING INSTALLATIONS

A. Assemble and tighten fittings as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Route as required to interconnect the instrumentation provided.

C. Provide an instrument valve and threadolet for all "root" valve locations where instrumentation tubing connections are made to the piping system.

3.5 VALVE AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Replace any and all valves and equipment that prove defective during testing. Arrange all valves during installation such that operating handles and controls are accessible, have sufficient clearance, and in the correct orientation for Fuel System Operator's operation.

C. Install all butterfly valves with the disc shaft in the horizontal axis.

D. Provide spool pieces or spacers in the piping as necessary to ensure valve parts, operators, and butterfly discs have sufficient operating clearances.

E. For adapters with integral screens; remove, clean, and reinstall screen after completion of flushing, before putting system into service.


A. Clean all fabricated assemblies and all equipment items thoroughly before operating or testing.



B. Protect equipment from damage, deterioration, paint or coating spills or spots, corrosion, or harm from any source.



A. For additional Quality Control requirements, refer to DIVISION 1, SECTION "Quality Requirements."

4.2 EQUIPMENT TEST AND CHECKOUT

A. Before equipment installations will be accepted, the equipment shall be tested and demonstrated to be correctly connected and installed.

B. All testing and checkout procedures of the manufacturer shall be carried out completely.

C. All tested equipment found to be defective or inoperable to any extent is to be reported to COTR immediately.

D. Any operating difficulty or defective item as a result of Contractor's work shall be repaired or replaced and put into proper operation by Contractor immediately.

E. Protect all equipment and surrounding areas from damage resulting from testing operations. Clean up any spills or leakage from testing.



FUEL SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 335248 - 1

SECTION 335248 - FUEL SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers special Equipment and mechanical accessories applicable to the fuel system.


1. For general requirements of fueling system: SECTION 335243 - FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.



1. All special valves, pilots, fittings, equipment, and related items shall meet the following requirements:

a. Be furnished, installed, tested, and put into successful operation. b. Be complete with all necessary miscellaneous pipe, valves, unions, fittings,

auxiliaries, and other items, whether shown on the Drawings or not, but required. c. Meet the requirements of applicable codes and standards as specified.

2. Piping connected to Equipment which must vary from the Drawings shall be furnished and installed as required to make a complete and workable installation without additional cost to Authority. This requirement includes changes due to the selection of a different Equipment manufacturer than what is indicated on the Drawings, specified, or a design change made by the manufacturer between the time the piping system was designed and the time of installation.

3. Spare, Replacement, or Additional Parts:

a. Where spare, replacement, or additional parts are required for the equipment specified herein, these items shall be delivered to the COTR immediately upon receipt at the Site.

b. Parts shall be packaged and sealed for long storage and be securely and visibly labeled as to part, function, and name of Equipment to which they apply.

c. Contractor shall prepare an inventory list of the items delivered to Authority.

D. This Section covers fittings, meters, and accessories related to the aircraft fueling system for this Project. All items, materials, and components specified herein shall be suitable for use



within an aviation jet fuel system with a maximum operating condition of 275 psig, 0ºF to 100ºF, and having a specific gravity of 0.81.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Blade and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. A216 - Carbon Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature

Service.


1. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 2. B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End. 3. Section VIII of Code.


1. 8.2 Automatic Sampling of Petroleum and Petroleum Products. 2. 600 - Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Buttwelding End. 3. 607 - Fire Tests for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves. 4. 1581 - Specifications and Qualification Procedures for Aviation Jet Fuel

Filter/Separators. 5. 1529 - Aviation Fueling Hose

D. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers' Association (AFBMA).

E. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM).

F. Military Specifications:

1. MIL-C-4556 - Coating, Kit, Epoxy for Interior of Steel Fuel Tanks. 2. MIL-R-6855 - Rubber, synthetic, sheets, strips, molded or extruded shapes.

G. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

H. Oil Companies Materials Association (OCMA).

I. Local governing code.


A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves and Equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Dry Break Couplings:

a. OPW. b. Emco-Wheaton. c. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2. Sight Flow Indicators:

a. OPW. b. Emco-Wheaton. c. Or as Acceptable to the Authority.

2.2 DRY BREAK COUPLING

A. Shall be a dry break coupling adaptor and dust cap, size as indicated.

B. Construction of adaptor and cap shall be aluminum.

2.3 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS

A. Indicators shall have two viewing windows of high strength tempered windows and Teflon window gaskets. Indicator shall have a propeller.

B. Cast-steel body shall be suitable for 150-psi working pressure.

C. End connections shall be screwed for 2-inch and smaller, 150-pound ANSI raised face flanged for sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING AND ALIGNING EQUIPMENT

A. Set and align all Equipment supplied under this Section in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Set true and level all Equipment at the locations shown. Demonstrate adequate leveling of installed Equipment.

C. Provide coupling alignment records indicating parallel and angular dial indicator readings as well as coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Alignment for pumps, couplings, and drivers



requiring "cold" and "hot" settings shall be checked in both conditions and so indicated on the alignment record.

D. Retighten all bolted and threaded connections after installation.

3.2 INSPECTIONS

A. The Work will be inspected by COTR at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction during the course of construction.

B. Provide for inspection by all others having jurisdiction over the work performed under the various Sections of these Specifications during the proper phase.

C. At time of final inspection, furnish certificate or certificates of final approval by all others having jurisdiction.

3.3 START-UP, MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Check all motors and drives carefully for correct rotation and alignment before placing Equipment into operation.

B. Disconnect and realign couplings before placing into service or testing.



B. Set rate of closure of control valves to eliminate surges and shocks in the systems as installed. Final adjustments shall be made during system operation prior to final start-up.

C. Final adjustments shall be made during system operation prior to final start-up.

D. Adjust all items at start-up, including flow rates, pressure settings, meter settings, and other variables as required by COTR's representative on the job.


A. Assemble using Hy-Fer-Set presetting device as recommended by manufacturer.





3.6 GAUGES

A. Install where indicated on the Drawings.



B. Replace any and all valves and Equipment that prove defective during testing.

C. Arrange all valves during installation such that operating handles and controls are accessible, have sufficient clearance, and in the correct orientation for Fuel System Operator's operation.




A. Clean all fabricated assemblies and all Equipment items thoroughly before operating or testing.

B. Protect Equipment from damage, deterioration, paint or coating spills or spots, corrosion, or harm from any source.



A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to DIVISION 1 SECTION "Quality Requirements."


A. Before Equipment installations will be accepted, Contractor-furnished Equipment shall be tested and demonstrated to be correctly connected and installed.

B. All testing and checkout procedures of manufacturer shall be carried out completely.

C. All tested equipment found to be defective or inoperable to any extent is to be reported to COTR immediately.

D. Any operating difficulty or defective item as a result of Contractor's Work shall be repaired or replaced and put into proper operation by Contractor immediately.



E. Protect all Equipment and surrounding areas from damage resulting from testing operations. Clean up any spills or leakage from testing.



FUEL SYSTEM FILTRATION 335251 - 1

SECTION 335251 - FUEL SYSTEM FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other DIVISION 1 Specification Sections Apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers special filters applicable to the fuel system.


1. For general requirements of fueling system: SECTION 335243 - FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.



1. All special valves, pilots, fittings, equipment, and other items, shall meet the following requirements:

a. Be furnished, installed, tested, and put into successful operation. b. Be complete with all necessary miscellaneous pipe, valves, unions, fittings,

auxiliaries, and related items, whether shown on the Drawings or not, but required.

c. Meet the requirements of applicable codes and standards as specified.

2. Piping connected to Equipment which must vary from the Drawings shall be furnished and installed as required to make a complete and workable installation without additional cost to the Authority.

a. This requirement includes changes due to the selection of a different Equipment manufacturer than what is indicated on the Drawings, specified, or a design change made by the manufacturer between the time the piping system was designed and the time of installation.

3. Spare, Replacement or Additional Parts:

a. Where spare, replacement or additional parts are required for the Equipment specified herein, these items shall be delivered to COTR immediately upon receipt at the Site.

b. Parts shall be packaged and sealed for long storage and be securely and visibly labeled as to part, function, and name of Equipment to which they apply.

c. Contractor shall prepare an inventory list of the items delivered to COTR.



D. This Section covers filtration related to the aircraft fueling system for this Project. All items, materials, and components specified herein shall be suitable for use within an aviation jet fuel system with a maximum operating condition of 275 psig, 0ºF to 100ºF, and having a specific gravity of 0.81.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Blade and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. A216 - Carbon Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service.


1. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 2. B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End. 3. Section VIII of Code.


1. 600 - Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Buttwelding End. 2. 607 - Fire Tests for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves. 3. 1581 - Specifications and Qualification Procedures for Aviation Jet Fuel Filter/Separators.

D. American Bearing Manufacturers' Association (ABMA).

E. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM).

F. Military Specifications:

1. MIL-C-4556 - Coating, Kit, Epoxy for Interior of Steel Fuel Tanks. 2. MIL-R-6855 - Rubber, synthetic, sheets, strips, molded or extruded shapes.

G. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

H. Oil Companies Materials Association (OCMA).

I. Local governing code.


A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves and equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Prefilters:

a. Velcon. b. No equal.

2. Filter Separators:

a. Velcon. b. No equal.

2.2 PREFILTERS

A. General Requirements: Vertical type filter for removing impurities from jet fuel.

B. Performance Characteristics: Designed in accordance with API 1590, most recent edition, to remove impurities with cartridge rated for 3.0 micron absolute filter mesh from 5,400 gpm of jet fuel.

C. Tests:

1. Shop tests shall be conducted on the filters in the manufacturer's shop in accordance with the standards of the ASME Code.

2. Furnish certified shop test reports and submit to COTR. 3. Perform hydrostatic pressure tests of the vessel at 150% of the maximum design pressure.

D. Construction:

1. Vessels shall be designed and fabricated of carbon steel in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Code and stamped for 150 psig maximum working pressure.

2. All wettable components inside the vessel shall be epoxy coated conforming to MIL-C-4556 to a dry film thickness of 3 mils.

3. Cartridge chamber shall be complete with mounting plate, support rods. 4. Piping inlet and outlet connections shall be 10-inch, with 150-pound ANSI raised-face

flanges. Shall have Gammon Kit No. 7 millipore test connections on the inlet and outlet elbows.

5. Air eliminator shall be 1-inch size with carbon or stainless steel body and cover, stainless steel float, and Buna-N seat.

a. All wettable carbon steel surfaces shall be epoxy coated conforming to MIL-C-4556.

b. A Gammon Technical Products GTP 1294 check valve shall be installed above the air eliminator.

c. A manual air vent shall be provided between the air eliminator and the vessel.



d. A tee connection shall be provided with a ball valve as specified herein and threaded plug.

6. Relief valve shall be as specified in SECTION 335247, set at 125 psig.

a. Relief piping shall include a ball valve in the inlet and outlet lines of the relief valve.

b. In addition, a tee shall be installed between each ball valve and the relief valve, with a nipple and cap for testing the valve operation.

7. Provide direct-reading differential pressure gauge assembly mounted directly on the vessel, complete with Gammon GTP-534-30S gauge, dampeners, valves, and stainless steel tubing and fittings.

8. Provide 3/4-inch side and bottom drain connections and 3/4-inch drain connections on bottom of inlet and outlet elbows.

9. Provide hydraulic jack head lift assembly, with self-centering closure guide. 10. Provide 4-inch clean-out connections with victaulic coupling and plug. 11. Provide a differential pressure transmitter mounted on the platform support column

adjacent to the vessel. Transmitter DP range shall be 0 to 30 psig. 12. Provide one extra set of filter media for each vessel.

2.3 FILTER SEPARATORS

A. Existing Filter Separators F/S-21 and 22 shall be relocated and installed in the specified locations. All relief and drain lines shall be installed as shown on the drawings, while reusing as many valves and fittings from the original installation as possible. Vessels shall be retrofitted with Water Detection Probes as described below.

B. Construction:

1. Coalescer cartridges shall be inside/outside flow. Separator cartridges shall be outside/inside flow. Cartridge shall be screw mount.

2. Provide Water Detection probes:

a. Design Requirements: Water detection system shall be dual stage, 120Vac, explosionproof, UL-listed intrinsically safe water probe capable of being tested in its operating position. System shall have two normally-closed relay contacts (120Vac, 10A continuous):

1) Stage #1 shall signal an alarm at the PLC upon detection of water in the Filter Separator.

2) Stage #2 shall signal the PLC upon detection of high water level to actuate the solenoid valve, triggering the flow control valve to close.

b. Acceptable Manufacturer: Manufacturer and model shall be Gammon GTP-1750-6-1-3-1-3-3-3-0 or approved equal.

3. Air eliminator shall be existing 1-inch size with carbon or stainless steel body and cover, stainless steel float, and Buna-N seat.



a. All wettable carbon steel surfaces shall be epoxy coated conforming to MIL-C-4556.

b. A Gammon Technical Products GTP 1294 check valve shall be installed above the air eliminator.

c. A manual air vent shall be provided between the air eliminator and the vessel. d. A tee connection shall be installed with a ball valve as specified herein and

threaded plug.

4. Air eliminator check valve shall be installed in discharge piping above or after the air eliminator. Body shall be stainless steel with 3/4-inch threaded connections.

5. Pressure-relief valve shall be as specified in SECTION 335247, set at 125 psig. Relief piping shall include a ball valve in the inlet and outlet lines of the relief valve. In addition, a union and tee shall be installed between each ball valve and the relief valve, with a nipple and cap for testing the valve operation.

6. Reinstall existing direct-reading differential pressure gauge assembly mounted directly on the vessel, complete with Gammon Technical Products GTP-534-30S gauge, dampeners, valves, and stainless steel tubing and fittings.

7. Provide 1-1/2-inch bottom drain connection and 3/4-inch drain connections on bottom of inlet and outlet elbows.

8. Two-inch manual sump drain valve shall be provided. 9. Reinstall existing water sump heater assembly for F/S-22. The assembly shall be rated at

500 watt, 277V, 3 phase, 60 hertz. The heater shall have a preset thermostat control with indicating light. Heater to extend over the drain entrance.

10. The entire drain line, heater, and manual valve assembly shall be insulated with cellular glass protected by an aluminum jacket.

11. A differential pressure transmitter shall be mounted on the platform support column adjacent to the vessel. Transmitter DP range shall be between 0 and 30 psig.

12. Provide water sensor-operated 120Vac solenoid valve for hydraulic interface with water slug valve.

a. Solenoid valve to close water slug valve in the event of high water level in the filter separator.

b. Operation of solenoid valve shall be capable of external testing without the introduction of water.

c. Water Sensor actuation point shall be above water probe alarm point. d. Dimension both points on vessel submittal. e. System shall be designed so that water slug valve closes if either Filter/Separator

detects water. f. System shall also be designed to isolate one system from the solenoid controls for

vessel cleaning or if operating only one vessel at a time.

13. Provide one extra set of filter media for each vessel.

C. Manufacturer's Service Engineer: Furnish the services of an experienced service engineer for (2) days on the Site to verify proper installation, assist in start-up, flushing, and testing, and instruct Fuel System Operator's personnel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING AND ALIGNING EQUIPMENT

A. Set and align all equipment supplied under this Section in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Set true and level all Equipment at the locations shown. Demonstrate adequate leveling of installed Equipment.

C. Provide coupling alignment records indicating parallel and angular dial indicator readings as well as coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Alignment for pumps, couplings, and drivers requiring "cold" and "hot" settings shall be checked in both conditions and so indicated on the alignment record.

D. Retighten all bolted connections after installation.

3.2 INSPECTIONS

A. The Work will be inspected by COTR at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction during the course of construction.

B. Provide for inspection by all others having jurisdiction over the work performed under the various Sections of these Specifications during the proper phase.

C. At time of final inspection, furnish certificate or certificates of final approval by all others having jurisdiction.



B. Set rate of closure of control valves to eliminate surges and shocks in the systems as installed. Final adjustments shall be made during system operation prior to final start-up.

C. Final adjustments shall be made during system operation prior to final start-up.

D. Adjust all items at start-up, including flow rates, pressure settings, meter settings, and other variables as required by COTR.


A. Assemble using Hy-Fer-Set presetting device as recommended by the manufacturer.





3.5 GAUGES

A. Install where indicated on the Drawings.



B. Replace any and all valves and Equipment that prove defective during testing.

C. Arrange all valves during installation such that operating handles and controls are accessible, have sufficient clearance, and in the correct orientation for Fuel System Operator's operation.




A. Clean all fabricated assemblies and all Equipment items thoroughly before operating or testing.

B. Protect Equipment from damage, deterioration, paint or coating spills or spots, corrosion, or harm from any source.

PART 4 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS




A. Before Equipment installations will be accepted, Contractor-furnished Equipment shall be tested and demonstrated to be correctly connected and installed.

B. All testing and checkout procedures of the manufacturer shall be carried out completely.



C. All tested Equipment found to be defective or inoperable to any extent is to be reported to COTR immediately.

D. Any operating difficulty or defective item as a result of Contractor's Work shall be repaired or replaced and put into proper operation by Contractor immediately.

E. Protect all Equipment and surrounding areas from damage resulting from testing operations. Clean up any spills or leakage from testing.



INSPECTION, TESTING, FLUSHING 335253 - 1

SECTION 335253 - INSPECTION, TESTING, AND FLUSHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the inspection, testing, and/or flushing of all fuel system piping, testing of corrosion protection coatings, and Equipment performance.

B. Provide for the "Gas Free" conditions required by SECTION 335245, as applicable to the Work of this Section.

C. Related Word Specified Elsewhere:

1. For radiography of pipe welds: SECTION 335245 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPE, CONNECTIONS, AND INSTALLATION

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Air Transport Association of America (ATA):

1. 103 - Standards for Jet Fuel Quality Control at Airports.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. D3241 – JFOT (Thermal Stability). 2. D130 – Copper Corrosion. 3. D1094 – Water Reaction. 4. D381 – Existent Gum. 5. D1655 - Specification for Aviation Turbine Fuels. 6. D2276 - Test Methods for Particulate Contaminants in Aviation Turbine Fuels. 7. D4176 - Standard Test Method for Free Water and Partic Contamination in Distillate

Fuels.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed procedures for testing methods for approval before proceeding with pipe fabrication. This includes all radiographing, pressure testing, holiday testing (if required), and flushing.

B. Submit examination personnel qualifications before proceeding with any testing method.

C. Submit completed examination procedures with actual testing data (readings) and signatures of examination personnel.

D. Submit calibration certifications for instrumentation, and for manufacturer required certifications including torque requirements for valve installations.


A. All required tests (for example, radiographing, pressure testing, holiday testing, and flushing) shall be performed in accordance with ANSI B31.3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUEL TESTING LAB

A. Subject to compliance requirements, provide lab testing by one of the following:

1. Laboratories;

a. Penniman & Browne, Inc. (410-825-4131). b. Or as acceptable to the Authority.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Compressors used for air testing shall have sufficient capacity to bring the system under test up to the test pressure in a maximum of 20 minutes.

B. The Authority will furnish all aviation kerosene fuel for testing and flushing except as otherwise specified.

C. Contractor shall furnish and operate all equipment required, including tankers, fuel transport trucks, gauges, instruments, hoses, connections, temporary pumps, temporary filter separators, and other items specified or required.

D. Contractor shall furnish electronic holiday detectors and all other labor and Equipment required.

E. Procedures:



1. Perform holiday testing of coating systems on all underground piping including joints. 2. Pneumatically test fuel carrier and containment piping. 3. Perform soak test of pipe interior coating. 4. Hydrostatically test fuel carrier piping. 5. Flush fuel carrier piping. 6. Electrically test all insulating flanges and joints. 7. Water shall not be used for testing fuel piping. 8. Perform preliminary pneumatic tests and final hydrostatic fuel tests before piping joints

are concealed with backfill or other construction. Variances from this may be allowed but must be approved by COTR.

F. Responsibility of Contractor:

1. Notify the proper authorities and COTR that items are ready for inspection and testing. Twenty-four hours' notice shall be given for all inspection and tests.

2. Furnish and install all necessary equipment, materials, and personnel including pumps, compressors, gauges, and valves. Valves shall be approved by COTR and shall be suitable to hold test pressure for the specified time without leakage.

3. Conduct the tests of all systems in a safe manner and correct all deficiencies. 4. Apply the specified test pressures by means of a pump or compressor connected to the

piping of highest elevation, and plug tightly afterwards. 5. Be fully responsible for operating trucks and equipment throughout the testing and

flushing operations. 6. Obtain and pay for all necessary approvals, acceptances, and permits. 7. Contractor shall make provisions to conduct all tests during inclement weather, if

necessary.

3.2 FUEL CARRIER PIPING PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TEST

A. A pneumatic test shall be applied in accordance with ANSI B31.3 to the entire length of fuel carrier pipe installed under this Contract.

B. All pneumatic testing shall be done using dry compressed air at -20°F dew point.

C. Install temporary closures or other fittings, including Victaulic coupling caps, blind flanges, and similar items, as necessary for the integrity of the piping system to be tested. Permanent valves and adapters shall be in place for testing.

D. The pressure shall be gradually increased until a gauge pressure which is one-half the test pressure, 25 psig, is attained, at which time a preliminary check shall be made, including examination of exposed joints in accordance with ANSI B31.3. Thereafter, the pressure shall be gradually increased in steps until the test pressure of 50 psig is reached, holding the pressure at each step long enough to equalize piping strains.

E. Maintain 50 psig pressure for at least 1 hour.

F. Soap exposed joints and carefully inspect to detect leaks.

G. Pressure and temperature reading shall be taken as follows:



1. Temperatures shall be representative of actual conditions. 2. Readings shall not be taken during times of rapid atmospheric changes. 3. There shall be no indication of reduction in test pressure after corrections for temperature

and pressure have been made according to the relationship T1 P2 = T2 P1, where T and P are absolute temperatures and pressures and subscripts refer to initial and final readings.

H. Repair defective joints and repeat tests until approved.

3.3 FUEL SOAK TEST

A. The interior coating applied to fuel carrier piping installed under this contract shall be soak tested with jet fuel. The purpose of this test is to determine if any excess solvents or other fuel-soluble contaminants are present in the coating materials.

1. The soak test of the 10” and 12” filtration lines shall be performed before the vessels are put into operation.

a. Fill pipe soak test procedure:

1) In order to establish a baseline for testing, the contractor shall obtain samples of the fuel as it first enters the pipe. At least two samples shall be taken and analyzed/ contractor shall pay for all cost associated with sampling analysis.

a) Contractor shall fill the 10 and 12-inch tank fill lines with fuel. Close all valves at the incoming line to filtration and the outgoing line from filtration.

b) Allow fuel to reside in the pipe for a period of four (4) days. The fuel must not experience any significant movement during this time. Hydrostatic testing of the fill pipe may be performed during this time, however,

2) At the end of the test duration, the Contractor shall take two composite samples from the fuel in the fill pipe.

3) The fuel samples shall be sent to a fuels lab selected by the Contractor. Contractor shall arrange and pay for transport of the samples and pay for sample analysis costs.

4) Fuel testing lab selected by the contractor shall have at least five (5) years of experience in performing tests of jet fuel in accordance with ASTM standards. Submit lab qualifications to SOTR for approval.

5) Testing shall be performed according to the following standards:

a) ASTM D3241 – JFOT (Thermal Stability). b) D130 – Copper Corrosion. c) D1094 – Water Reaction. d) D381 – Existent Gum.

B. The Contractor shall arrange for testing of jet fuel delivered into tank T-22, T-23, and T-24.

1. This testing shall establish a baseline for the fuel quality.



2. The Contractor shall pay for lab analysis of these samples. 3. At least one sample per tank shall be taken. 4. This fuel shall be determined to comply with all applicable ASTM standards before the

soak test of other pipe segments is performed.

C. If any samples indicate excessive contamination, Contractor shall then replace piping or make all repairs necessary to ensure coating is acceptable to the Authority. Contractor shall repeat the soak test for the segments or coating areas repaired or replaced.

D. All contaminated fuel shall be hauled off site at the contractor’s expense. Contractor shall reimburse the Authority for all fuel removed from the site due to contamination.

3.4 FUEL PIPING HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST

A. Apply a liquid pressure test with jet fuel to the entire fuel carrier piping system following the pneumatic pressure test. Jet fuel with be supplied by the Authority.

B. The pressure shall be gradually increased until a gauge pressure which is one-half the test pressure, 138 psig, is attained, at which time a preliminary check shall be made, including examination of exposed joints in accordance with ANSI B31.3. Thereafter, the pressure shall be gradually increased in steps until the test pressure of 275 psig is reached, holding the pressure at each step long enough to equalize piping strains.

C. The test pressure of 275 psig shall be maintained for at least 4 hours.

D. Decrease pressure by venting at high points and then increase again to the test pressure and hold again for a 24-hour period.

E. Repair any leaks in a manner approved by COTR.

F. Provide calibrated temperature and pressure instruments and chart recorders to provide continuous temperature and pressure readings variations during the tests. Instruments shall be calibrated for temperature and pressure immediately prior to each test. Recorder charts shall be submitted to COTR for review prior to final acceptance of the piping.

G. Permanent valves and adapters which are rated for the test pressure shall be in place for the liquid pressure test. Equipment which is not rated by the manufacturer for the test pressure shall be removed prior to testing. Install temporary connections as necessary.

H. For additions or connections to other modifications, where isolation for the liquid pressure test is not feasible, radiographing of the welds and careful observation of the system piping put under operating pressure with fuel before joints are covered will satisfy the requirement for this testing. This includes points of system interconnection and blanked off tank connections and other miscellaneous piping modifications.

3.5 INSPECTION OF COATINGS

A. Contractor shall make a detailed inspection with a holiday tester of all pipe coating and joint coating preceding the lowering of the pipe.



B. Holiday-tester voltage shall not be higher than the manufacturer's recommended voltage for the coating tested. Testing shall be for holidays only and not to test the dielectric strength of the coating materials.

C. All holidays and damaged or broken places in the coating shall be repaired in a workmanlike manner at Contractor's expense.

D. All holidays shall be patched using the methods specified for field-applied external protective pipe coating and procedure in SECTION 335246.

3.6 TESTING INSULATED FLANGES AND JOINTS

A. Each insulating flange and joint assembly shall be tested with an approved ohmmeter.

B. Ohmmeter used shall have at least 20 megohms, full-scale deflection when using the meter's highest dc resistance multiplier setting.

C. Ohmmeter tests shall be made when flange assembly is dry using the highest multiplier setting and shall indicate infinity measured between each stud and both flanges.

D. Each insulating flange assembly shall be field tested after installation and shall be tested not higher than the manufacturer's recommended voltage.

E. Insulating flanges in the existing hydrant pits shall be tested by this Contract after installation of hydrant pit valves provided by this Contract.

3.7 FLUSHING

A. Before a new, modified, or repaired hydrant fuel system, or portion thereof, is placed into service, all piping affected by change shall be flushed to ensure system cleanliness before aircraft fueling is permitted.

B. All flushing procedures, fuel sampling and testing shall be in accordance with ATA 103, latest revision.

C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for all flushing requirements.

D. A reasonable amount of fuel required for flushing and testing will be supplied by Authority. The Authority will arrange for delivery of the fuel. Fuel which is flushed into transport trucks and is determined to be acceptable by COTR, may be unloaded back into storage.

E. Contractor shall not waste, spill, or contaminate the fuel used to flush or fill the system. The cost of all fuel spilled, wasted, or contaminated by Contractor shall be paid for by Contractor at Fuel System Operator's purchase rate times a 1.15 multiplier.

F. All fuel required for flushing and testing will be supplied by Contractor and shall become property of the Authority upon completion of flushing and testing. Authority shall arrange for delivery of fuel. Fuel which is flushed into transport trucks and is determined acceptable by COTR, shall be unloaded back into storage. However, fuel which is unacceptable shall be removed from the Site and disposed of at Contractor's expense.



G. Product used for flushing shall meet ASTM D1655, latest revision, specifications for kerosene Jet A/A-1 type aviation grade turbine fuels.

H. Desired flow rate of flush is 10 feet per second minimum unless a lesser rate is agreed upon by airline quality assurance representative. Additional temporary pumps and filters, if required to provide minimum flow velocity, shall be provided by Contractor.

I. Test samples shall be drawn immediately ahead of filtration on closed loop recirculation systems; immediately ahead of storage tanks in receiving manifold on recirculation systems returning flushed fuel to tankage; or immediately ahead of transport trucks on single line systems.

J. Where possible, temporary piping connections to form a closed loop piping system shall be installed and the system flushed by means of recirculation. All temporary cross connections or special fabrication of adapters required shall be provided by Contractor.

K. For flushing into tank trucks, Contractor shall supply any temporary manifolds plus sufficient number of single compartment tank trucks and hoses to allow the desired flow rates to be achieved in a safe manner. Hoses and couplings shall be aircraft type with a minimum 350 pound rating and shall be hydrostatically tested. A 4-inch hose size shall be used to achieve flow capacities during flush.

L. All general service valves and adapters shall be in place throughout the flushing procedure. Contractor shall remove control valves and metering assemblies prior to initiating flush.

M. Contractor shall provide all filtration media required for return of fuel to the airport fuel storage facility following the system flush. This includes intermediate filtration media changeouts if excessive media loading or disablement occurs during return of flushed fuel to the fuel storage facility. Upon completion of flush and return of flushed fuel to the airport fuel storage facility, Contractor shall again provide new filtration media if replacement is determined necessary by the COTR due to filter element loading from the return of flushed fuel.

N. The following descriptions outline the general procedures the Contractor shall take in order to adequately flush the fuel system. Contractor shall submit detailed flushing plans to the COTR for approval.

1. Open the bypass line around the clay treater CT-21 and CT-22 during flushing. At no time shall the Contractor flush fuel through the clay treaters.

a. 12-Inch Transfer Lines Located on Equipment Pad:

1) Open tank 16-inch suction valve and recirculation valve. Open and close equipment pad valves in order to create a flow path from the tank to a transfer pump (P-21 through P-23) and then to the tank recirculation line. Operate one transfer pump at 2400 gpm and flush piping until clean. Create multiple flow paths in order to flush all 12-inch pipe segments located on the equipment pad. Flush each segment at 2400 gpm until clean.



O. Acceptance Specifications:

1. Visual - All fuel samples shall be clear and bright. Other visual clues must be observed and acted upon accordingly, i.e.; feel, color, odor, and similar characteristics. This test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D4176.

2. Perform a membrane test per ASTM D2276. A minimum of 1 gallon of jet fuel shall be used for this test. Visually assess the membrane and compare it with a color rating booklet. The color shall be a maximum of #3 Rated Wet with a particulate contamination not exceeding the B scale. Flushing shall continue and the membrane test repeated, until a sample is obtained which meets these requirements. Note: If color rating exceeds the above limits or is in dispute, a matched weight gravimetric rating not to exceed 0.5 mg/gal shall govern.

3. Water - 5 ppm maximum. 4. Water Separation (Microsep) Rating - 85 minimum.

P. Final Acceptance:

1. It shall be the responsibility of the airline fuel quality assurance representative, or his designee, to have final decision on system cleanliness and acceptance before aircraft fuel servicing is permitted.

Q. After flushing has been completed and approved, Contractor shall remove all temporary cross connections and related items, and install control valves, metering elements, strainer baskets, and other system components. Contractor shall also be responsible for replacing all filter media and return of fuel to storage has been completed, so that the entire facility may be received in a new and clean condition as described previously.

3.8 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Contractor shall subject the entire fueling system to such operating tests as required by Authority, to demonstrate satisfactory functioning and operating efficiency.

B. Tests shall include checks to determine that all control valves and switches are properly adjusted.

C. Testing shall include the functions of the complete electrical system.

D. All instruments required to conduct the tests shall be furnished by Contractor.

E. The following test are required to be performed by the Contractor as part of acceptance testing:

1. Prefilters:

a. Test differential pressure gauge. b. Test differential pressure transmitter output to PLC. c. Test high differential pressure alarm at PLC.



2. Filter/Separators:

a. Test differential pressure gauge. b. Test differential pressure transmitter output to PLC. c. Test high differential pressure alarm at PLC. d. Test water slug valve rate of flow control. e. Test water slug valve shutdown via water probe switch.

F. All tests may be witnessed by a representative of COTR.

G. Submit typed samples of test reports to COTR for approval.

H. Submit completed test reports.

PART 4 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS




Date post:	24-Mar-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	8 times
Download:	2 times